A2 Elementary Teacher Handbook

ELEMENTARY A2
LET’S TALK!
ENGLISH
Lindsey Klein
Danielle Kempf
Mirella Morrone
LET’S TALK! ENGLISH

ELEMENTARY LEVEL A2
Robotel Corp.
Brookfield, WI 53045
U.S.A.
© Robotel Corp. 2018
First published in 2018
Printed in Canada
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be

reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted,
in any form or by any means, without the prior written
permission of Robotel Corp., or as expressly permitted by
law, by license or under terms agreed with the appropriate
reprographics rights organization. Inquiries concerning
reproduction outside the scope of the above should be
sent to the Robotel Corp. Marketing Department, at the
above address.
Photocopying
The Publisher grants permission for the photocopying

of those pages marked “photocopiable” according to the
following conditions. Individual purchasers may make
copies for their own use or for use by classes that they
teach. School purchasers may make copies for use by
staff and students, but this permission does not extend
to additional schools or branches.
Under no circumstances may any part of this book be

photocopied for resale.
Acknowledgements
Authors: Lindsey Klein

Danielle Kempf
Illustrator: Mirella Morrone
Technical Consultant: Gerry Sullivan
Collaborators: Erin Swierczek

Jaimie Dini
Eva Ennamorato
Videographer/Editor: Kelsi Gard
Many thanks to the participants that played a role in the

videos for the book. As well, a thank you to our main
characters: Jack, Connor, Skyler, and Grace.
Acknowledgements
Robotel Corp., would like to thank the following for their kind
permission to reproduce photographs and other copyright
material. All-free-downloads.com, pxhere.com, pixabay.com,
pexels.com, adobe.com, freeimages.com, wikipedia.
Although every effort has been made to trace and contact copy-
right holders before publication, this has not been possible in
some cases. We apologize for any apparent infringement of
copyright and, if notified, the publisher will be pleased to rectify
any errors or omissions at the earliest possible opportunity.
ISBN: 978-1-7326616-2-2
SmartClass® and Robotel® are registered trademarks of Robotel Corp..

CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION I - IV
CHAPTER ONE
AT HOME
1-1 TO 1-64
CHAPTER TWO
FOOD & DRINK
2-1 TO 2-56
CHAPTER THREE
TRAVEL
3-1 TO 3-59
CHAPTER FOUR
AROUND TOWN
4-1 TO 4-63
CHAPTER FIVE
5-1 TO 5-55
HEALTH & WELLNESS
CHAPTER SIX
6-1 TO 6-66
AT WORK
RUBRIC R-1 TO R-6

LET’S TALK ENGLISH
Revision 1.0
Copyright © Robotel Corp.
Robotel Corporation Robotel Inc. (HQ)

Brookfield, WI 53045 Laval, QC H7L 5A4
USA Canada
+1 (800) 465-0356 +1 (450) 680-1448

+1 (800) 680-1448 (US & Canada)
+1 (450) 680-1928
info@robotel.com info@robotel.com
www.robotel.com www.robotel.com
Robotel Oceania Robotel Middle East

Melbourne, VIC 3109 Amman, 11953
Australia Jordan
+61 (0) 4 3090 1475 +962 795088015
info@robotel.com info@robotel.com
All materials in this document (except as noted) are ©copyrighted by Robotel Corp. Do not reprint without express written permission.
LET’S TALK ENGLISH
The LET’S TALK! ENGLISH is partitioned into four (4) different courses, corresponding to levels A1,
A2, B1 and B2 of the Common European Framework of Reference (CEFR) for languages as described
below:
LEVEL DESCRIPTION
 Can understand everyday expressions and very basic phrases
A1 Beginner  Can introduce themselves and answer personal questions
 Can interact in a simple way with others
BASIC
 Can understand sentences and frequently used expressions

A2 Elementary  Can communicate in simple and routine tasks
 Can describe in simple terms aspects of their background
 Can understand topics concerning family, work, school, etc.
INDEPENDENT
B1 Intermediate  Can deal with most situations that arise while traveling
 Can describe experiences, events, dreams, hopes & ambitions
 Can understand main ideas on both concrete & abstract topics
B2 Upper
 Can interact with a degree of fluency and spontaneity
Intermediate  Can produce clear detailed text on a wide array of subjects
 Can understand a wide range of demanding clauses
C1 Advanced  Can express ideas fluently and spontaneously
PROFICIENT
 Can use language effectively, socially & professionally

 Can understand with ease virtually everything heard or read
C2 Proficiency  Can summarize information and reconstruct arguments
 Can express themselves very fluently and precisely
SMARTCLASS+
LET’S TALK! ENGLISH is designed to be used in conjunction with the SmartClass+ language lab platform.
The majority of activities presented herein require the use of the SmartClass+ Live Activities Dashboard
(LAD) for classwork and/or the use of the SmartClass+ Media Activities Dashboard (MAD) for self-study
work. The icons shown below are used to indicate which dashboard should be used with each activity.
I
CONTENT VOCABULARY GRAMMAR
CHAPTER 1 - AT HOME
Prepositions of Place
1 Describe your house. Rooms and Location Review of Open-ended
Questions
Present Continuous of
2 What’s in your home? Appliances and Furniture Regular Verbs
There is/There are
Adverbs of Frequency
3 Let’s help at home! Chores and Frequency Present Continuous of
Irregular Verbs
CHAPTER 2 - FOOD & DRINK
Some vs. Any

1 Let’s make a meal! Food and Meals Basic Intensifiers
(enough, so, too)
Verbs of Preference + Gerund

2 Go to the grocery store. Grocery Shopping Countable vs. Uncountable
Nouns
Polite Requests using could

3 Do you want to go out to eat? In a Restaurant
Review of would like
CHAPTER 3 - TRAVEL
Past Simple of to be
1 Have fun outdoors. Outdoor Activities Questions in Past Simple
of to be
Past Simple
2 Let’s travel! Travel
Questions in Past Simple
Past Simple of Irregular Verbs

3 Explore the natural world. Natural World Past Simple of More Irregular
Verbs
II LESSON PLAN
ELEMENTARY LEVEL A2
CONTENT VOCABULARY GRAMMAR
CHAPTER 4 - AROUND TOWN
Past Continuous
1 Explore the city. In the City
Coordinating Conjunctions
Imperatives (+, -)
2 How do I get there? Directions
Prepositions of Movement
Imperatives (Let us/Let’s)

3 Let’s take the bus! Getting Around Town
Adverbs
CHAPTER 5 - HEALTH & WELLNESS
Reflexive Pronouns
1 What hurts? Body Parts and Injuries
Past Participles as Adjectives
Indefinite Pronouns
2 Let’s go to the doctor! Going to the Doctor
The verbs should and ought
Present Perfect
3 Is it an emergency? It’s an Emergency
Indirect Objects
CHAPTER 6 - AT WORK
Future Tense
1 What profession will you choose? Professions
Present Continuous for Future
1st Conditional
2 Let’s go to work! In the Workplace
Review of Contractions
Gerunds
3 It’s a technological world. Technology
Infinitives
LESSON PLAN III

Welcome to Milwaukee, Wisconsin (USA)!
Throughout this book you will follow 4 students as they discuss topics relevant to each chapter.
These students live in the Milwaukee, Wisconsin area and are excited to be a part of your English
learning experience.
My name is Jack Jones. My name is Connor Olsen.

I am 19 years old and come I am 20 years old. I come from
from Sussex, Wisconsin where Milwaukee, Wisconsin. I study
I was born and raised. I go to German and business at the
the University of Wisconsin - University of Wisconsin-Madison.
Oshkosh to study business. When I am not studying or
In my free time, I enjoy working, I am playing sports.
working on cars and being Baseball and ice hockey are my
with my friends or family. favorites. I also love to travel.
Hi! My name is Grace Parker. Hi! My name is Skylar Campbell,

I’m 19 years old and live in and I am 18 years old. I was born
Madison, Wisconsin. I’m and still live in Milwaukee,
studying pharmacy at the Wisconsin. I go to the University
University of Wisconsin - of Wisconsin-Milwaukee, where
Madison. In my freetime, I I am pursuing a career as a Speech
enjoy hanging out with my - Language Pathologist. In my
friends & family, reading, freetime, I love to meditate and
cooking, baking and spending do yoga, read books, take hikes
time outdoors. outside and go thrift shopping!
IV INTRODUCTION
1 CHAPTER ONE
AT HOME
VOCABULARY
Rooms in a House and Location of Items ............. 1-4
Items in a Home .......................................................... 1-18
Chores and Frequency .............................................. 1-32
GRAMMAR
Prepositions of Place .................................................. 1-8
Review of Open-Ended Questions .......................... 1-12
Present Continuous of Regular Verbs .................... 1-22
There is / There are .................................................... 1-25
Adverbs of Frequency ................................................ 1-37
Present Continuous of Irregular Verbs .................. 1-46
CONVERSATION
Draw a Room ................................................................ 1-15
What’s your house like? ............................................. 1-15
Which box is it in? ....................................................... 1-28
Describe a Room ......................................................... 1-2 1-29
Let’s Build Sentences ................................................. 1-46
How often? .................................................................... 1-46
Chores at Home .......................................................... 1-48
READING
Ads for a House ........................................................... 1-16
Furniture Store Ad ...................................................... 1-30
Family Chores ............................................................... 1-49
LET’S TALK!
Video - Let’s do some chores! .................................. 1-50
LEARNING OBJECTIVES Interviews - Let’s talk about your home! ................ 1-53
I will be able to...
• describe rooms in a house and household items. REVIEW & ASSESSMENT

• use prepositions of place. Review ............................................................................ 1-55
Projects .......................................................................... 1-60
• describe items in a room using there is/there are. Assessment ................................................................... 1-61
• use the present continuous.
• use adverbs of frequency.
INTRODUCTION 1-1
1
INTRO SECTION 1 SECTION 2 SECTION 3 LET’S TALK! REVIEW & ASSESSMENT
UNITED STATES OF AMERICA

CULTURE IN THE U.S.A.
CALIFORNIA
CA
Abbreviation: CA Known For: Golden Gate Bridge

Nickname: The Golden State Hollywood
Capital City: Sacramento Beaches & Surfing
Other Major Cities: Los Angeles, Mountains
San Francisco, San Diego, California Redwood Trees
San Jose, Long Beach Disneyland
Population: 39.14 Million (2015) Alcatraz Island
Area: 163,696 mi² (square miles) Lombard Street
Flag: Yosemite National Park
Fisherman’s Wharf
San Diego Zoo
State Song: I love you, California Santa Monica Pier
State Bird: California Valley Quail Wineries
State Flower: California Poppy
INTERNET SEARCH: (in your language)

1. Choose one of the places of interest from the list and research it. What is
interesting about it? Would you like to visit it someday? Why or why not?
2. There are many famous people from California. Research one famous person
and describe him/her. What is his/her name? What is he/she famous for?
What other fun facts do you know about this person?
1-2 INTRODUCTION
1
VOCABULARY
SECTION 1 VOCABULARY: Rooms and Location
Rooms in a Home Discuss a Home Prepositions of Place

the basement the address the stairs above on
the bathroom the apartment upstairs behind under
the bedroom the door downstairs between
the dining room the garage the window far from
the kitchen the gate the yard in
the laundry room the hallway (the hall) in front of
the living room the house (the home) near
the key next to
SECTION 2 VOCABULARY: Items in a Home
Appliances Household Furnishings

the dryer (the clothes dryer) the armchair the curtain the poster
the computer the bathtub the dresser to put the poster...
the dishwasher the bed the furniture the rug
the refrigerator (the fridge) the blanket the lamp the shower
the television (the TV) the chair the light the sink
the washing machine the clock the picture the toilet
the couch; the sofa to hang the picture the towel
the cupboard the pillow
SECTION 3 VOCABULARY: Chores and Frequency
Household Chores Set the Table Adverbs of Frequency

to clean the room to make the bed the bowl How often do you ___? daily
to clear the table to mow the lawn the cup always (every day)
to cook dinner to set the table the fork usually weekly
to do the chores to take out the garbage the glass often (every week)
to do the laundry to vacuum the knife (pl=knives) sometimes monthly
to dry / to wash to wash the windows the napkin rarely (every month)
the clothes to water the plate never yearly
the dishes the flowers the spoon (every year)
to feed the pet the plants
(cat/dog)
INTRODUCTION 1-3
1
VOCABULARY
ROOMS AND LOCATION
ACTIVITY 1.1.1 - SPEAK

MAD Open Recording
Record yourself saying as much as possible about the Section 1 Vocabulary picture.
What words or phrases do you know? What do you see?
TEACHER NOTE: After students complete the activity in the MAD, discuss the image as a
class using the LAD Presentation Mode.
ACTIVITY 1.1.2 - LISTEN & SPEAK

MAD Segmented Recording
Section 1 Vocabulary Pronunciation

MAD Pronunciation
Pronounce sentences using Section 1 Vocabulary.
1. This is my house. 6. I like a lot of windows.
2. I live near school. 7. We eat in the dining room.
3. I live far from school. 8. I wash my clothes in the laundry room.
4. Do you have the key? 9. The garage is behind our house.
5. Is your room upstairs or downstairs? 10. Their house has a small basement.
1-4 SECTION 1
1
VOCABULARY
ACTIVITIES
ACTIVITY 1.1.4 - WRITE
MAD Letter Jumble
Spell vocabulary words from Section 1.
1. between 5. the address
2. the door 6. the apartment
3. downstairs 7. under
4. in front of 8. the bedroom
ACTIVITY 1.1.5 - READ

MAD Text Match
Use the image of the house to match the letter with the correct room.
A. the garage B. the bedroom C. the bathroom D. the living room

E. the dining room F. the kitchen G. the basement H. the laundry room
SECTION 1 1-5
1
VOCABULARY
ACTIVITIES
MAD Image Match
Match the image with its vocabulary word.
the address the hallway the yard the apartment the stairs
the door the gate the key the window the garage
ACTIVITY 1.1.7 - LISTEN

MAD Category Match
Listen to the following people describe their homes. Drag the words that describe the
house to the correct person.
Jim: I live in an apartment in the city of Los Angeles. It is very expensive to live in California,
and my home is extremely small. I have one bedroom, one bathroom, a kitchen and a living
room. I do not have a garage or a yard.
Molly: We have a large house near the city of Helena, Montana. We have three bedrooms
and two bathrooms upstairs. Downstairs in the basement, we have one bedroom and one
bathroom. We have a small, but nice yard.
Kristin: I live in a medium-sized house outside of Phoenix, Arizona. It has three bedrooms,
two bathrooms and lots of windows. We also have a 2 car garage. What I love most about
my home is the very large yard.
1-6 SECTION 1
1
VOCABULARY
ACTIVITIES
ACTIVITY 1.1.7 - LISTEN (Continued)
MAD Category Match
Jim Molly Kristin
apartment large house medium house
California Montana Arizona
1 bedroom & 1 bathroom 4 bedrooms & 3 bathrooms 3 bedrooms & 2 bathrooms
living room basement garage
no yard small yard large yard
ACTIVITY 1.1.8 - LISTEN & WRITE

MAD Fill-in-the-Blanks
Listen to the description of the house and fill in the blanks with the missing vocabulary
words that you hear. The blanks may have more than one word.
My [house] has two stories. There are three [bedrooms] [upstairs]. We have two [bathrooms].
The [kitchen], [dining room] and [living room] are [downstairs]. Our [laundry room] is in the
[basement]. We have a beautiful [yard] with a [gate] that leads to it. The front [door] leads to
a [hallway] that is big and open. Above the door is the [address] of our [home]. I love that our
house has so many [windows] to let in the natural sunlight.
Listen to and then answer the questions in complete sentences.
1. What city do you live in? 4. How many rooms are in your home?
2. Do you live in an apartment or a house? 5. Do you have a big or small yard?
3. What is your address?
CULTURAL NOTE
Addresses
Have you ever wondered how a house gets an address number? Although there is no national
standard in the US of how we number our houses and apartments, you can easily notice patterns.
Look on one side of a street, and the numbers are all even. The addresses on the other side of the
street are all odd. As you go down a street, the numbers go up or down. A block, for example, might
be an increase of 100. You will see the 1500 block of Main Street and then the 1600 block of Main
Street. This system helps us navigate to addresses more efficiently. The addresses of apartment
buildings include the building address and then add information for the floor and apartment
number. For example: 1500 Main Street, 5B. This apartment is on the fifth floor, unit B.
SECTION 1 1-7
LET’S BREAK IT DOWN!
PREPOSITIONS OF PLACE
Prepositions can be used to show where something is located.
Prepositions of place are used with the verb to be.
above The picture is above the couch.
behind The yard is behind the house.
The dining room is between the living room and the

between
kitchen.
far from The bedrooms are far from the basement.
in The cars are in the garage.
1-8 SECTION 1
PREPOSITIONS OF PLACE
in front of The car is in front of the garage.
near The chair is near the bed.
next to The bedroom is next to the bathroom.
on The cat is on the sofa.
under The dog is under the table.
SECTION 1 1-9
ACTIVITIES
MAD Pronunciation
Pronounce sentences that use prepositions of place.
1. The key is above the door.
2. The dining room is next to the kitchen.
3. The garage is near the house.
4. The kids are in the yard.
5. The book is on the table.
6. My school is far from my house.
7. The plate is between the fork and knife.

MAD Image Match
Match the image with the correct sentence describing where the girl is in relation to the box.
1. The girl is behind the box. 5. The girl is under the box.
2. The girl is next to the box. 6. The girl is between the

boxes.
3. The girl is on the box. 7. The girl is in the box.
4. The girl is in front of the box.
1-10 SECTION 1
ACTIVITIES
MAD Image Match
Listen to where the ball is located in relation to the box. Then, match the number with the
correct image.
1. The ball is on the box. 5. The ball is under the box.
2. The ball is in front of the box. 6. The ball is between the boxes.
3. The ball is in the box. 7. The ball is far from the box.
4. The ball is next to the box. 8. The ball is near the box.

Look at the picture. Write the correct preposition in the blanks according to what you see in
the picture. Pick from the following prepositions: between, far from, in, in front of, near,
next to, on, under.
1. The cat is [on] the chair.
2. The books are [in front of] the cat.
3. The sandals are [under] the table.
4. The dog is [in] the box.
5. The table is [between] the dog and the cat.
6. The chair is [next to] the table.
7. The clock is [near] the books.
8. The dog is [far from] the cat.
SECTION 1 1-11
ACTIVITIES
MAD Open Recording
Look at the pictures and say where the dog is located in relation to the dog house.
Use prepositions of place.
1. The dog is in the dog house. 4. The dog is on the dog house.
2. The dog is behind the dog house. 5. The dog is far from the dog house.
3. The dog is next to the dog house. 6. The dog is near the dog house.

REVIEW OF OPEN-ENDED QUESTIONS
Question Word Example Meaning
What? What is your address? object, idea or action
Where? Where is the bathroom? place
When? When do you do chores? time
Why? Why do you like to cook? reason
Which? Which bedroom is yours? choice
How? How are you? manner

How often? How often do you clean your room? frequency
Who? Who lives in that house? person

*Whom? With whom do you live? person (refers to the object of
Whom do you like? a verb or preposition)
*Note: Ask yourself if the answer to the question is him or her. If yes, use whom.
1-12 SECTION 1
ACTIVITIES
MAD Multiple Choice
Choose the question word that best completes each question.
1. ____________ room do you like best, the living room or the kitchen?
A. How B. What C. Which D. Who
2. ____________ is the towel? I can’t find it.
A. Where B. Why C. What D. How
3. ____________ often do you take out the garbage?
A. Which B. What C. How D. Who
4. ____________ are your friends’ names?
A. How B. Why C. When D. What
5. ____________ is going to the game with you?
A. Why B. Who C. What D. How
6. ____________ does the movie begin?
A. When B. What C. Which D. Who
7. ____________ don’t you like to play soccer?
A. What B. Which C. Who D. Why
8. With ____________ are you going to live in the apartment?
A. which B. whom C. when D. who

MAD Sentence Jumble
Put the conversation between Mandy and Steve in the correct order.
Mandy: Hi. My name is Mandy. What’s your name?
Steve: My name is Steve. Where are you from?
Mandy: I am from Los Angeles but now live in San Diego. Where do you live?
Steve: I live in San Diego, too. What street do you live on?
Mandy: I live on Eighth Street.
Steve: Eighth Street! I live on Ninth Street.
Mandy: No way! Which house is yours?
Steve: My house has a red door and is next to the park.
Mandy: I know exactly where you live. See you around.
SECTION 1 1-13
ACTIVITIES
ACTIVITY 1.1.17 - LISTEN & READ
MAD Text Match
Listen to the answers and match them with the correct question.
For example: You hear: Mr. Smith is my Science teacher.
You match it with: Who is your Science teacher?
1. Mark lives in Chicago. Where does Mark live?
2. The movie starts at 9 p.m. When does the movie start?
3. I do my homework daily. How often do you do your homework?
4. I play soccer because I love to run. Why do you play soccer?
5. My mom is from New York. Who is from New York?
6. The dog is in the yard. Where is the dog?
7. My mom’s name is Mary. What is your mom’s name?
8. I do my homework with Chad. With whom do you do your homework?

Listen and then answer the questions in complete sentences.
1. Where do you live?
2. What is your address?
3. With whom do you live?
4. Which room do you like best in your home? Why?
5. How far do you live from school?
1-14 SECTION 1
1
CONVERSATION
ACTIVITIES
ACTIVITY 1.1.19 - SPEAK: Draw a Room
LAD Pairing Activity
1. Using the new prepositions of place you have learned, draw pictures of objects on the
‘My House’ image. You may use current and past vocabulary for the objects.
2. When you are done with the drawing, write 5 sentences that demonstrate where objects
are located in relation to the house. For example, “The cat is in the house.”
3. Partner B will listen/draw first. Partner A describes his/her house to Partner B.
Partner B draws the objects on the My Partner’s House part of the worksheet.
4. Now switch roles. Partner B reads his/her sentences and Partner A draws.
5. At the end, compare drawings and make sure your partner’s drawing matches your house.
My House My Partner’s House
TEACHER NOTE: If you want to be able to listen to these conversations later, launch the
recorder at the beginning of this activity and hit record. Print the worksheet from the
A2 Resources Google Doc Folder, or download the A2StudentWorksheet.pdf.
ACTIVITY 1.1.20 - SPEAK: What’s your house like?

Create five open-ended questions using a different question word in each one to learn about
your partner’s real house.
Here are some topics to help you think of questions:
house or apartment
location of rooms
address
number of bedrooms, bathrooms
members of the household
SECTION 1 1-15
1
READING
ADS FOR A HOUSE
*TEACHER NOTE: Buying

a home in the city is more
expensive than a home in
the suburbs.

MAD Category Match
Read each house advertisement. Then, drag the description under each house it describes.
SPRING VALLEY LEMON GROVE SAN DIEGO

has a pool has un updated kitchen the most expensive
the smallest house the biggest house one car garage
two bedrooms three bedrooms four bedrooms
$249,900 $419,000 $600,000
1-16 SECTION 1
1
READING
ACTIVITIES
ACTIVITY 1.1.22 - READ & SPEAK
MAD Open Recording
Answer the questions in complete sentences.
1. Which house do you like the most? Why?

2. Which house do you like the least? Why?
3. Do you prefer a big house or a little house? Why?
4. Do you like a small or big yard? Why?
CULTURAL NOTE
Bathrooms are an important part of the decision when people buy a home. Most families look
for 2 bathrooms in a home. Some homes even have a half bathroom. A half bathroom has a
toilet and a sink. People will usually have a half bathroom on their main floor for their guests to
use. A full bathroom has a toilet, a sink, and a bathtub or a shower. When buying a home, the ad
will say 2 full bathrooms or 2.5 bathrooms. The .5 refers to the half bathroom.
When selling a home, having an updated bathroom often allows for a

higher selling price. An updated bathroom will often have a standup
shower and a separate spa bathtub. Having two sinks is also a
convenience that many families like to have in their bathroom.
Half bathroom Normal bathroom Updated bathroom
SECTION 1 1-17
ITEMS IN A HOME

MAD Open Recording
Record yourself saying as much as possible about the Section 2 Vocabulary pictures.
What words or phrases do you know? What do you see?
TEACHER NOTE: After students complete the activity in the MAD, discuss the image as a
class using the LAD Presentation Mode.


MAD Pronunciation
1. We have a dishwasher. 6. Here is the shower.

2. That is a new washing machine. 7. The curtains make it dark in here.
3. Do you have outdated furniture? 8. I like lots of pillows on my bed.
4. The cupboards are in the kitchen. 9. We need a bigger refrigerator.
5. The toilet is in the bathroom. 10. My towel is all wet.
1-18 SECTION 2
ACTIVITIES
MAD Letter Jumble
1. the fridge 2. the television 3. the armchair 4. the blanket
5. the dresser 6. the light 7. the bathtub 8. the curtain

MAD Image Match
Match the vocabulary word with the correct image.
the cupboard the poster the rug the lamp the towel
the dresser the shower the dishwasher the computer the sink

MAD Multiple Choice
Answer the following questions based on your knowledge of the vocabulary.
1. Which item is in a bathroom?
A. the bathtub B. the blanket C. the pillow D. the desk
2. Which item is NOT in a bathroom?
A. the bathtub B. the towel C. the sink D. the desk
3. Which item is in a living room?
A. the bathtub B. the bookshelf C. the sink D. the refrigerator
4. Which item is NOT in a living room?
A. the armchair B. the toilet C. the sofa D. the lamp
SECTION 2 1-19
ACTIVITIES
ACTIVITY 1.2.6 - READ (Continued)
MAD Multiple Choice
5. Which item is in a laundry room?
A. the dryer B. the chair C. the bookshelf D. the bathtub
6. Which item CAN’T go in a washing machine?
A. the towel B. the blanket C. the clock D. the clothes
7. Which item is in a kitchen?
A. the dishwasher B. the bed C. the armchair D. the sofa
8. Which item is NOT in a kitchen?
A. the cupboard B. the refrigerator C. the sink D. the couch
9. Which item is in a bedroom?
A. the yard B. the garage C. the dresser D. the gate
10. Which item is NOT in a bedroom?
A. the curtains B. the bed C. the lamp D. the dishwasher

MAD Word Jumble
Look at the picture of the room. Put the words in the correct order to make sentences
describing the room.
1. The clock is above the desk.

2. The books are on the bookshelf.
3. The light is above the bed.
4. The desk lamp is under the clock.
5. The curtain is in front of the window.
6. The computer is on the desk.
7. The window is behind the chair.
8. The desk is between the window and
the bookshelf.
1-20 SECTION 2
ACTIVITIES
MAD Open Recording
Look at the picture of the living room and say where the first item is located in relation to
the second item.
1. the table / the couch The table is in front of the couch.

2. the curtains / the bookshelf The curtains are far from the bookshelf.
3. the picture / the television The picture is near the television.
4. the TV / the lamp The TV is next to the lamp.
5. the table / the armchair and the sofa The table is between the armchair and the sofa.
6. the rug / the table The rug is under the table.
7. the pillows / the couch The pillows are on the couch.
8. the books / the bookshelf The books are in the bookshelf.

MAD Open Text
Choose one room in your home. Describe in detail what furniture and other items are in this
room. Include prepositions to describe the location of the furniture and other items.
TEACHER NOTE: Give students an idea of how many sentences you want them to write.
SECTION 2 1-21
1
GRAMMAR
PRESENT CONTINUOUS OF REGULAR VERBS
The present continuous tense talks about actions that are happening at the present moment.
In the continuous tense, verbs are formed with the auxiliary verb to be and the present participle of
the action verb.
How to form the present participle:

The main rule is to take the base form of the verb and add -ing.
For example: work → working read → reading go → going study → studying
The statement is formed using this formula:

subject + to be conjugated + the present participle of the main verb + other information
My sister and I are washing the windows today.
My dad is not (isn’t) mowing the lawn.
A closed (yes/no) question is formed using this formula:

to be conjugated + subject + the present participle of the main verb + other information
Are you doing the laundry?
Isn’t he cooking dinner yet?
An open-ended question is formed using this formula:

question word + to be conjugated + subject + present participle of the main verb + other information
What are you doing on Saturday?
How is Kelsey feeling?

Change the infinitive verb into a present participle.
For example: You see: to clean [ _________ ] You type: [cleaning]
1. to cook [cooking] 6. to hang [hanging]
2. to sleep [sleeping] 7. to feel [feeling]
3. to buy [buying] 8. to go [going]
4. to watch [watching] 9. to listen [listening]
5. to sing [singing] 10. to wash [washing]
1-22 SECTION 2
1
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
MAD Word Jumble
Put the words in the correct order to form a statement or question.
1. Are you buying a new armchair?
2. I am hanging this clock in the living room.
3. Where are you going to put the television?
4. Sarah is starting the washing machine now.
5. What are you looking for in the kitchen?
6. My friends and I are studying in the dining room.
7. This chair is going next to the table.
8. When are you washing the bathtub?

MAD Multiple Choice
Read the question and choose the answer with the correct form of the present continuous.
1. Are you buying a new couch? 5. Is she surfing the web on the computer?
A. Yes, I buy a new couch. A. No, she not surfing the web.
B. Yes, I am buying a new couch. B. No, she is not surfing the web.
C. Yes, I buying a new couch. C. No, she not to surf the web.
2. Is Ryan starting the dishwasher? 6. Are you looking at the address?

A. No, he not starting the dishwasher. A. Yes, I am looking at it.
B. No, Ryan is not to start the dishwasher. B. Yes, I look at the address.
C. No, Ryan is not starting the dishwasher. C. Yes, I to look at it.
3. Is Sam hanging the picture above the couch? 7. Are the kids playing in the yard?
A. Yes, she is hanging it above the couch. A. No, they are playing upstairs.
B. Yes, hanging it above. B. No, they playing upstairs.
C. Yes, she hangs it above the couch. C. No, playing upstairs.
4. Are they studying in the living room? 8. Is the garage door opening?
A. No, they are studying in the basement. A. Yes, it opening.
B. No, they study in the basement. B. Yes, it opens.
C. No, they to study in the basement. C. Yes, it is opening.
SECTION 2 1-23
1
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
MAD Open Recording
Use the subject pronoun and infinitive to create a present continuous sentence.
For example: You see: I / to go home You say: I am going home.
1. She / to buy a new fridge She is buying a new fridge.
2. You / to hang the posters You are hanging the posters.
3. John and Paul / to watch TV John and Paul are watching TV.
4. I / to look at the pretty yard I am looking at the pretty yard.
5. Ashley / to bring a blanket Ashley is bringing a blanket.
6. Molly and Ryan / to talk on the computer Molly and Ryan are talking on the computer.
7. You / to paint the bedroom You are painting the bedroom.
8. Jake / to dry the dishes Jake is drying the dishes.

MAD Text Match
Listen to the following answers. Match the correct question with the answer you hear.
1. I am surfing the web for darker curtains.
2. No, he is watching a movie on the computer.
3. I am calling your cell phone.
4. Hannah is playing in the bathtub.
5. She wants a new kitchen.
6. He is on the couch in the living room.
7. The one upstairs. Max is painting the one downstairs.
Answers:
Is Chad doing his homework? Answer 2
Which bathroom can I use? Answer 7
Why is Beth buying cupboards? Answer 5
What are you doing online? Answer 1
Why is there water on the floor? Answer 4
Which phone are you calling? Answer 3
Where is Lucas sleeping? Answer 6
1-24 SECTION 2
1
GRAMMAR
THERE IS / THERE ARE
SINGULAR PLURAL
Affirmative Statement There is a TV in my bedroom. There are 2 televisions in our house.
There is not a clock in this room. There are not any clocks in the
Negative Statement basement.
There is no clock in this room. There are no clocks in the basement.
Question Is there a towel for me? Are there any towels for us?
Contractions in the Affirmative Contractions in the Negative
A contraction is possible with there is when it is A contraction is possible with there is not and
used in a statement, not a question. there are not when they are used in a statement,
not a question.
There is becomes there’s.
A contraction is not possible with there are. There is not becomes there isn’t.
There are not becomes there aren’t.

Fill in the blanks with There is or There are.
1. [There is] a hallway behind the front door.
2. [There are] pillows on the couch.
3. [There is] a sink in the bathroom.
4. [There is] a silver clock on the wall.
5. [There are] two cars and one bike in the garage.
6. [There is] a lot of light in this room because of the big windows.
7. [There are] a computer and a picture on my desk.
8. [There are] two armchairs, a rug and a table in my living room.
SECTION 2 1-25
1
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
Complete the questions with Is there or Are there.
1. [Is there] a chair behind your desk?
2. [Is there] a bookcase in your living room?
3. [Are there] curtains on the windows?
4. [Is there] a dishwasher in your kitchen?
5. [Are there] lamps on the tables in the bedroom?
6. [Are there] posters on your bedroom walls?
7. [Is there] a shower or a bathtub in your bathroom?
8. [Are there] many pillows on the bed?
9. [Is there] a towel in the bathroom for me?
10. [Are there] a lot of cupboards in the kitchen?

MAD Multiple Choice
Choose the answer that best completes the statement or question.
1. ____________ a new lamp in the living room.
A. There is B. There are C. Is there D. Are there
2. ____________ any books for the bookshelf?
3. ____________ towels in the bathroom closet.
4. ____________ an extra blanket?
5. ____________ lots of posters to choose from for your room.
6. ____________ any dirty dishes? I want to run the dishwasher.
7. ____________ a very comfortable couch that I want to buy on sale.
8. ____________ a shower in the bathroom downstairs?
1-26 SECTION 2
1
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
Look at the rooms and household items. Listen to the questions and answer with
Yes, there is/there are or No, there isn’t/there aren’t using complete sentences.
For example: You hear: Is there a cat on the refrigerator?
You say: Yes, there is a cat on the refrigerator.
1. Are there books on the bookshelf? Yes...
2. Is there a clock in the bedroom? No...
3. Are there two bathrooms? No...
4. Are there cupboards in the kitchen? Yes...
5. Is there a sink next to the bathtub? Yes...
6. Is there a dresser in the bedroom? Yes...
7. Is there a couch in the living room? No...
8. Is there a dining room in this picture? No...
9. Are there pictures on the wall? Yes...
10. Are there windows in this house? No...

MAD Open Recording
Say at least five sentences that describe what there is or there are in the bathroom.
SECTION 2 1-27
1
CONVERSATION
ACTIVITIES
ACTIVITY 1.2.20 - SPEAK: Which box is it in?
Your family just moved to a new home, and you are helping unpack. Each family member has
a box to unpack. Ask your partner about an item and put an X under the name of the person
who is unpacking it. Use is there or are there in your questions.
For example: Partner A asks, “Is there a blanket in Ben’s box?”

Partner B looks on his/her sheet and says, “No, there is a blanket in Sarah’s box.”
Partner A’s Worksheet
HOUSEHOLD ITEM Ben Sarah Ryan
Ex: the blanket X

the rug X
the dresser X
the curtains X
the pillows X
the clock X
the pictures
the bed
the bookshelf
the lamp
the desk
the posters
1-28 SECTION 2
1
CONVERSATION
ACTIVITIES
Partner B’s Worksheet
HOUSEHOLD ITEM Ben Sarah Ryan
Ex: the blanket X

the rug
the dresser
the curtains
the pillows
the clock
the pictures X
the bed X
the bookshelf X
the lamp X
the desk X
the posters X
ACTIVITY 1.2.21 - SPEAK: Describe a Room

Choose one of the nine rooms to describe to your partner. Do not tell your partner which
room it is. You must say at least six sentences to your partner about different items that
are in the room: the colors, locations of items in the room, etc. Your partner will listen to
all your sentences and then guess which room you described.
Bedroom 1 Bedroom 2 Bedroom 3 Dining Room 1 Dining Room 2 Dining Room 3
Living Room 1 Living Room 2 Living Room 3 SECTION 2 1-29

1
READING
FURNITURE STORE AD
1-30 SECTION 2
1
READING
ACTIVITIES
MAD Multiple Choice
Choose the best answer based on the furniture advertisement.
1. How many chairs come with the dining room table?
A. 1 B. 3 C. 6
2. Which set includes a free TV?
A. kitchen B. living room C. dining room
3. How many sofas come with the living room set?
A. 6 B. 3 C. 2
4. How much does a rug cost if you buy a dining room table and chairs?
A. $300 B. $199 C. $400
5. Which set includes nightstands?
A. kitchen B. bedroom C. living room
6. What does NOT come with a living room set?
A. bookshelf B. armchair C. sofa
7. Which items are NOT on sale?
A. bookshelves B. sofas C. pillows
8. How much does a bedroom set cost?
A. $300 B. $599 C. $899

MAD Open Recording
You are shopping for furniture for your new home. Answer the following questions using the
furniture store ad.
1. Which furniture set do you want to buy?
2. Why do you want to buy this furniture?
3. In which room of your home are you going to put this furniture?
4. What pieces of furniture come with the set?
5. How much does it cost?
SECTION 2 1-31
1
VOCABULARY
CHORES AND FREQUENCY

MAD Open Recording
What words or phrases do you know? What do you see? What is happening in the picture?
TEACHER NOTE: After students complete the activity in the MAD, discuss the image as a class
using the LAD Presentation Mode.

1-32 SECTION 3
1
VOCABULARY
ACTIVITIES
MAD Pronunciation
1. My mom usually cooks dinner. 6. The bowl is in the cupboard.

2. I have to feed our cat. 7. I rarely clean the basement.
3. Do you make your bed daily? 8. I like to water the plants.
4. I clear my plate. 9. She doesn’t like to take out the garbage.
5. Do you wash and dry your clothes? 10. Who does the laundry?

MAD Letter Jumble
1. to cook dinner 5. yearly
2. the napkin 6. the glass
3. sometimes 7. the fork
4. the knife 8. to vacuum

MAD Image Match
Match the vocabulary word with the correct image.
to feed the dog to wash the the fork to do the the cup
windows laundry
to vacuum to water the the spoon to wash the to take out the
flowers dishes garbage
SECTION 3 1-33
1
VOCABULARY
ACTIVITIES
Fill in the blanks with the correct missing words.
For numbers 1-4, fill in the missing verb. For example: [to do] the laundry
1. [to clean] the room
2. [to feed] the dog
3. [to water] the plants
4. [to cook] the dinner
For numbers 5-8, fill in the missing noun. For example: to do [the laundry]
5. to clear [the table]
6. to make [the bed]
7. to mow [the lawn]
8. to take out [the garbage]

Type the correct vocabulary word for each utensil. D
Item A - the [napkin]
A
Item B - the [fork]
Item C - the [plate]
C
Item D - the [glass]
Item E - the [knife] B E F
Item F - the [spoon]
GAME - CHAPTER 1 VOCABULARY REVIEW

Class activity
GAME: Bingo and/or Marker War (Find the explanation and playing sheet in
the A2 Resources Google Doc Folder, or download the A2StudentGames.pdf.)
1-34 SECTION 3
1
VOCABULARY
ACTIVITIES
CULTURAL NOTE
Setting the table in the U.S.A is a chore that children often have to do. Each family may have
their own rules when it comes to setting the table, however, there is a traditional way to set
the table with the normal, everyday utensils. At a dinner table at home, you will see a plate,
a fork, a spoon and a knife. Then, a napkin and a glass are often put on the table for each
person as well. At restaurants more utensils are set at the table. For formal dining events,
there are even more utensils used.
Also, instead of the word utensil, you will hear people also call it ‘‘silverware.’’ Silverware refers
to knives, forks and spoons that are made out of the precious silver metal. Utensils used to
be made out of silver and were expensive to buy. Passed on from generation to generation,
silverware is often an heirloom for a family since it is worth quite a lot of money. Now in
the US people usually buy stainless steel utensils for everyday use instead. Stainless steel
is easier to maintain and does not need to be polished or buffed.

MAD Text Match
Listen to the sentences. Then, match the room with the sentence number.
1. In this room you set the table for dinner. the dining room
2. In this room you cook dinner. the kitchen
3. In this room you wash your clothes. the laundry room
4. In this room you make your bed. the bedroom
5. In this room you watch TV. the living room
6. You mow the lawn here. the yard
7. You wash your face here. the bathroom
8. Your car is in here. the garage
SECTION 3 1-35
1
VOCABULARY
ACTIVITIES
MAD Sentence Jumble
Pretend you are John. Your mom left you a note about the chores you need to do before
you can go to the movies tonight. Put the sentences in the correct order.
Dear John,
Before you go to the movies tonight, you need to do your chores.
First, take out the garbage.
Next, clean your room.
After cleaning your room, you need to vacuum it.
When you are done with your room, do your laundry.
Wash your clothes in warm water and dry them at low heat.
Lastly, feed Fido his dinner.
Love you, Mom

MAD Open Recording
Look at the picture and describe who has to do each chore.
For example: You see: You say: Dave has to vacuum the living room.
1. Megan has to do the 4. Mike has to clear the

laundry. table.
2. Rob has to mow the 5. Jake has to water the

lawn. plants.
3. Ann has to make the bed. 6. Kristi has to cook dinner.
1-36 SECTION 3
1
GRAMMAR
ADVERBS OF FREQUENCY
Adverbs can tell you where, when, how, why and to what extent something happens.
There are many different types of adverbs. For this chapter, we are going to focus on adverbs of
frequency.
Adverbs of frequency describe how often something is done.
*Here are some commonly used adverbs of frequency in order of frequency.

Most Frequent Least Frequent
always usually often sometimes rarely never
These adverbs appear after the subject but before the verb in a sentence.
For example: Subject + Adverb + Verb + Other Information
Paul never takes out the garbage.
My sister rarely sets the table.
Adverbs of frequency appear after a form of the verb to be.
For example: Subject + Verb + Adverb + Other Information
I am often late.
My parents are always happy.
These adverbs go between an auxiliary verb and the main verb.

For example: Subject + Auxiliary Verb + Adverb + Main Verb + Other Information
I don’t usually wash the dishes.
The adverbs of frequency often, usually, sometimes can also go at the beginning of a sentence.
For example: Adverb + Subject + Verb + Other Information
Usually I wash the dishes.
Sometimes we clean the windows.
When something happens regularly at a fixed time, the adverb is at the end.
every day → daily I make my bed daily.
every week → weekly Jack takes out the garbage weekly.
every month → monthly I have a baseball competition monthly.
every year → yearly We go on vacation yearly.
SECTION 3 1-37
1
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
MAD Pronunciation
Pronounce sentences that use adverbs of frequency.
1. I never make my bed. 4. My parents are usually happy.
2. My mom always does the laundry. 5. We water the plants daily.
3. Sometimes my sister feeds the dog. 6. My dad rarely cooks dinner.

MAD Word Jumble
1. My sister always sets the table. 5. My mom feeds the dog daily.
2. My brother doesn’t usually feed the cat. 6. Do you take out the garbage every week?
3. Does your dad sometimes cook dinner? 7. We do not vacuum the floors monthly.
4. I never wash the clothes. 8. How often do you do your laundry?

MAD Question and Answer
Type sentences that describe how often each person does the chore. Be careful with the
placement of the adverb of frequency.
For example: You see: weekly / I / to do the laundry You type: I do the laundry weekly.
1. always / Natalie / to clean her room Natalie always cleans her room.
2. weekly / I / to mow the lawn I mow the lawn weekly.
3. never / Christopher / to water the plants Christopher never waters the plants.
4. daily / my mom / to wash the dishes My mom washes the dishes daily.
5. sometimes / we / vacuum the dining room Sometimes we vacuum the dining room.
OR We sometimes vacuum the dining room.
6. every day / we / to feed the dog We feed the dog every day.
7. rarely / my parents / to wash the windows My parents rarely wash the windows.
8. usually / you and I / to set the table Usually you and I set the table.
OR You and I usually set the table.
1-38 SECTION 3
1
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
MAD Category Match
Listen as Joe describes the chores that he and each of his family members completes.
Then, drag the chore under the name of the person that does that chore.
“My family and I work together to complete the chores in our home. We all make our beds in
the morning. My brother, Derek, takes out the garbage and waters the plants. My sister, Beth,
vacuums and feeds our cat. My mom does the laundry and washes the dishes. My dad cooks
and sets the table. Usually my brother mows the lawn, but sometimes I have to when he is not
home. I also wash the windows and set the table.”
Joe Mom Derek Dad Beth

washes the takes out the
does the laundry cooks vacuums
windows garbage
clears the table washes the dishes waters the plants sets the table feeds the cat
mows the lawn mows the lawn
SECTION 3 1-39
1
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
MAD Text Match
Look at Samantha’s calendar. Match two parts to form a correct sentence.
SUNDAY MONDAY TUESDAY WEDNESDAY THURSDAY FRIDAY SATURDAY

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
feed dog feed dog feed dog feed dog feed dog feed dog feed dog
clean my room piano lessons clean my room garbage mow lawn
garbage sleepover at
Debbie’s
8 9 10 11 12 13 14
piano lessons vacuum the clean my room garbage mow lawn
garbage house go out with
Gabi
15 16 17 18 19 20 21
clean my room piano lessons clean my room garbage mow lawn
garbage cook dinner go to concert
22 23 24 25 26 27 28
piano lessons vacuum the clean my room garbage mow lawn
garbage house go to the
movies
29 30 31
feed dog feed dog feed dog
clean my room piano lessons
garbage
1. Samantha has to feed the dog every day.

2. Two times a week Samantha has to take out the garbage.
3. Every weekend Samantha mows the lawn.
4. Samantha cleans her room on Thursdays.
5. She vacuums the house on Wednesdays.
6. Once a week she has piano lessons.
7. She has to cook rarely.
8. She has fun on the weekends.
1-40 SECTION 3
1
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
Luka’s family has a chore chart so everyone knows what they need to do to help around the
house. Answer the following questions in complete sentences.
PERSON CHORE HOW OFTEN
take out the garbage

wash the dishes
do the laundry
clear the table

mow the lawn
feed the dog
set the table
sometimes
vacuum
usually
always
rarely
never
often
cook
x x x
Me
x x
x x x
Mom
x x
x x
Dad
x x
x x
Kira
x x x
1. Who usually mows the lawn? Dad usually mows the lawn.
2. How often does Kira wash the dishes? Kira rarely washes the dishes.
3. Who does the laundry? Mom does the laundry.
4. How often does Luka feed the dog? Luka always feeds the dog.
5. Who never cooks? Dad never cooks.
6. How often does mom vacuum? Mom always vacuums.
7. What chores does Kira do? Kira washes the dishes, sets the table and clears
the table.
8. Who always takes out the garbage? Luka always takes out the garbage.
SECTION 3 1-41
1
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
Listen to the questions about chores that you and your family members do. Please answer
each one in a complete sentence. If you or your family does not do the chore, either make up
a response, or say you do not do that at home.
1. Who washes the dishes in your family? 5. Who cooks dinner?
2. How often does your family mow the lawn? 6. Who sets and clears the table?
3. Who does the laundry? 7. How often do you feed your pet?
4. How often does your family do laundry? 8. How often do you make your bed?

PRESENT CONTINUOUS OF IRREGULAR VERBS
The present continuous tense talks about actions that are happening at the present moment.
In the continuous tense, verbs are formed with the auxiliary verb to be and the present participle of the
action verb.
For example:
run → running sit → sitting
1. If a one syllable verb ends in consonant + vowel +
jog → jogging beg → begging
consonant, double the final consonant and add -ing.
*Exception: For words that end w, x and y, do not

mow → mowing box → boxing
double the last consonant; just add -ing.
play → playing
For example:
2. When a verb ends in silent ‘-e’, the silent ‘-e’ is take → taking make → making
dropped and -ing is added.
*Exception: When a verb ends in an ‘-e’ which is not be → being see → seeing
silent, the final ‘-e’ is not dropped before the ending
-ing is added.
1-42 SECTION 3
1
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
MAD Multiple Choice
Choose the correct form of the irregular present participle for each action verb.
1. to live A. live B. liveing C. living
2. to stay A. staying B. staing C. stayying
3. to run A. running B. run C. runing
4. to take A. take B. taking C. takeing
5. to get A. geting B. get C. getting
6. to see A. see B. seeing C. seing
7. to mow A. mow B. mowing C. mowwing
8. to buy A. buying B. buyying C. buy

Write a present continuous sentence that describes what chore each person is doing at
their home right now.
For example: You see: I / to do the laundry You type: [I am doing the laundry.]
1. Tiffany / to make the bed [Tiffany is making the bed.]
2. John and I / to set the table [John and I are setting the table.]
3. Rachel / to clear the table [Rachel is clearing the table.]
4. Steve and Tom / to mow the lawn [Steve and Tom are mowing the lawn.]
5. You / to wash the clothes [You are washing the clothes.]
6. My mom / to water the plants [My mom is watering the plants.]
7. My parents / to cook dinner [My parents are cooking dinner.]
8. Melody / to clean her room [Melody is cleaning her room.]
SECTION 3 1-43
1
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
MAD Category Match
Listen to the people describe their chores. Move the chores below the correct person’s name.
My name is Eric. I have three chores to do today. I am feeding the dog first. Then, I am taking
out the garbage. Finally, I am washing the dog.
My name is Stephanie. Today, I am making my bed. Next, I am vacuuming the living room.
Lastly, I am washing the living room windows.
My name is Emma. Tonight, I am cooking dinner, setting the table and washing the dishes.
My name is Owen. This morning, I am cleaning my room and then I am vacuuming it. Once I am
done, I am washing my dirty clothes.
My name is Jenny. Today I have to do a lot of chores outside. I am watering the plants and
flowers. Then, I am mowing the lawn. Finally, I am washing all the windows.
Eric Stephanie Emma Owen Jenny

watering the plants
feeding the dog making the bed cooking dinner cleaning the room
and flowers
taking out the vacuuming the vacuuming the
setting the table mowing the lawn
garbage living room room
washing the living washing all the
washing the dog washing the dishes washing the clothes
room windows windows

MAD Open Recording
Use the name of the person and the picture of the chore to say what each person is doing.
Use the present continuous.
1. Morgan is watering the flowers. 4. You are taking out the

garbage.
2. Peter is mowing the lawn. 5. I am making the bed.
3. My brother and I are setting 6. My mom and sister are

the table. vacuuming.
1-44 SECTION 3
1
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
MAD Open Recording
Look at the picture. First, say what wrong chore the man is doing.
Then, say the correct 2 chores that the man has to do.
For example: You see: You say: He is washing the garbage.
He has to do the laundry.
He has to take out the garbage.
He is vacuuming the window.

1. He has to vacuum the house.
He has to clean the window.
He is washing the flowers.

2. He has to water the flowers.
He has to clean the bathroom.
He is mowing the bed.

3. He has to make the bed.
He has to mow the lawn.
He is watering the dog.

4. He has to wash the dog.
He has to water the flowers.
He is drying the food.

5. He has to dry the clothes.
He has to make dinner.
SECTION 3 1-45
1
CONVERSATION
ACTIVITIES
ACTIVITY 1.3.23 - SPEAK: Let’s Build Sentences
LAD Pairing or Group Activity
Look at the words on your worksheet. Make as many sentence combinations as possible
with your partner or group. The verbs should be conjugated in the present continuous
tense. Listen carefully to your partner(s) and when it is your turn, try not to repeat any of the
sentences.
Subject Infinitive Verb Object
I to make the dishes
You to clean the room
Jeff to take out the clothes
She to wash the bed
Bob and I to do the garbage
Lizzy and Todd the windows
ACTIVITY 1.3.24 - SPEAK: How often?

Ask your partner how often each person does each chore. Teachers, you will have to print this
worksheet for the students.
Partner Activity Explanation: Partner 1 and Partner 2 have different questions and answers.
Partner 1 asks a question to Partner 2 and Partner 2 then answers the question.
For example: On your worksheet you will see:
Partner 1 Worksheet
Partner 1 - Questions to ask Partner 2 Partner 1 - Answers to Partner 2’s Questions

1. Chloe / to take out the garbage 1. Grace (daily)
Partner 2 Worksheet
Partner 2 - Answers to Partner 1’s Questions Partner 2 - Questions to ask Partner 1
1. Chloe (never) 1. Grace / to cook dinner
1-46 SECTION 3
1
CONVERSATION
ACTIVITIES
ACTIVITY 1.3.24 - SPEAK: How often? (Continued)
Partner 1 Asks: How often does Chloe take out the garbage?
Partner 2 Answers: Chloe never takes out the garbage.
Partner 2 Asks: How often does Grace cook dinner?
Partner 1 Answers: Grace cooks dinner daily.
Partner 1 Worksheet
Partner 1 - Questions to ask Partner 2 Partner 1 - Answers to Partner 2’s Questions
1. Dave / to dry the clothes in a dryer 1. Kate and Owen (monthly)

2. the girls / to water the flowers 2. Brooke (often)
3. you / to make your bed 3. I (daily)
4. your parents / to do the laundry 4. my sister / (never)
5. Travis / to vacuum 5. Jason / (always)
Partner 2 Worksheet
Partner 2 - Answers to Partner 1’s Questions Partner 2 - Questions to ask Partner 1
1. Dave (never) 1. Kate and Owen / to wash the windows

2. the girls (always) 2. Brooke / to mow the lawn
3. I (sometimes) 3. you / to clear the table
4. my parents (every day) 4. your sister / to clean her room
5. Travis (rarely) 5. Jason / to feed the dog
SECTION 3 1-47
1
CONVERSATION
ACTIVITIES
ACTIVITY 1.3.25 - SPEAK: Chores at Home
Partner 1 asks Partner 2 a question. Partner 2 answers. Partner 1 writes the person’s name
and his/her answer in the question box. Sometimes they are closed questions and sometimes
they are open-ended questions. Answer accordingly.
For example: Partner 1: Do you do your own laundry?

Partner 1: No, my mom does my laundry.
Partner 1: What is your name?
Partner 1: My name is Becky.
In the box that asks: ‘‘Do you do your own laundry?’’ Partner 1 writes: “No, Becky doesn’t do her
own laundry.’’ OR ‘‘No, Becky’s mom does her laundry.” Answers will vary!
Now repeat, but Partner 2 asks a question.

Then, the teacher switches the LAD partners so the students can talk with another partner.
Do you do your own How often do you Who usually cooks How often do you
laundry? clean your room? dinner at your house? wash your clothes?
How often do you Do you feed a pet? Who sets the table? How often do you
vacuum? water your plants?
When do you feed Do you make your When do you take out Who washes the
your pet? bed every morning? the garbage? dishes?
Who usually clears Do you often help at How often do you When do you wash
the table? home? mow the lawn? the windows?
1-48 SECTION 3
1
READING
FAMILY CHORES

MAD Category Match
Read the email from Isabella. Fill in the chart to show who has to do which chores in her family.
Isabella Mom Dad Brother
washes the dishes cooks dinner mows the lawn feeds the dog dinner
does the laundry washes the dishes waters the plants clears the table
cleans her bedroom vacuums the house waters the flowers does the laundry
feeds the dog in the morning shops for food takes out the garbage cleans his room
cleans her bedroom

MAD Open Text
Respond to Isabella’s email. Answer her questions about your family and household chores.

MAD Simultaneous Recording
Listen to the questions related to the chores and say your answers in complete sentences.
1. Who washes the dishes in your home? 4. Who vacuums in your home?
2. What chores do you have to do? 5. How often does your family do the laundry?
3. How often do you have to do each chore? 6. Who takes out the garbage?
SECTION 3 1-49
1
LET’S TALK!
VIDEO - LET’S DO SOME CHORES!
LT 1.1 - LISTEN (Available with or without captions)

MAD Viewing
Watch the chapter video.
Teachers, you can also launch this as a LAD activity and have your students all watch it at the
same time.
Connor: Hey Jack, wait up.
Jack: Hey.
Connor: Grace, Skylar and I are goin’ swimmin’* after school today. You in?
Jack: Wait. When and where?
Connor: My house, in about an hour.
Jack: Uh, I can’t. I have to do some chores at my house. I didn’t do ‘em* this week, and my mom’s
going to be mad if I don’t.
Connor: What chores do you have to do?
Jack: Well, first, I have to clean my room. Then, I have to vacuum and lastly, I have to do my
laundry. Laundry is not fun.
Connor: You do your own laundry?
Jack: Yeah, don’t you?
Connor: No! I tried doing it once, and I shrunk my mom’s shirt, and she was not so happy with me,
so I am not allowed to touch that anymore.
*goin’ swimmin’* - When using -ing verbs amongst friends, it is common for people to drop the -g.
‘em* - ‘Em can be used in informal spoken language to shorten them.
ya* - Ya can be used in informal spoken language to replace you.
1-50 LET’S TALK!

1
LET’S TALK!
VIDEO - LET’S DO SOME CHORES!
LT 1.1 - LISTEN (Continued) (Available with or without captions)
MAD Viewing
Jack: Yeah, I mean I only have to do my laundry, not my family’s.

Connor: Is that it or do you have to do anything else?
Jack: No, lastly I have to do the dishes.
Connor: Okay, well that’s not too bad. If you start as soon as you get home, you could probably be
done in an hour and come over and go swimming.
Jack: Are you crazy? There’s no way I can get it done in an hour.
Connor: Whatever you say, man. Sorry you can’t come with us. Maybe next time. I’ll catch ya* later.
Jack: Alright, see you around.
Connor: See ya.
Jack: Hey, what are you guys doing here? Come on in.
Connor: I called for backup.
Skylar: We’re here to help. What can we do for ya?
Jack: Well, I have to do the dishes, do my laundry, vacuum and clean my room.
Grace: I can do the dishes.
Skylar: I can vacuum.
Jack: And what are you going to do, Connor?
Connor: I am here to make sure you clean your room, so we can all go swimming!
Jack: Thanks! I appreciate the help, man. Alright, well come on.
Jack: Okay, Grace. Here’s the dishes. Here’s the soap. And here is how you turn on the water.
Grace: Oh really?!
Jack: Hey!
Jack: Ok, Skylar. Here is the vacuum.

Skylar: So, how do you turn it on?
Jack: The red button turns it on and the gray one reclines it back.
Skylar: Got it.
Jack: You can start by helping me pick up some clothes, Connor. Thanks.
LET’S TALK! 1-51

1
LET’S TALK!
ACTIVITIES
LT 1.2 - LISTEN
MAD Multiple Choice
Respond with True or False based on what you heard.
1. Connor invites Jack to go swimming.
A. True B. False
2. Jack says that he can go swimming.
A. True B. False
3. Jack has to do the dishes, vacuum, wash the windows and do the laundry.
A. True B. False
4. Jack’s friends help him with his chores.
A. True B. False
5. Grace vacuums.
A. True B. False
6. Jack does the dishes.
A. True B. False
LT 1.3 - LISTEN
MAD Text Match
Match the chore with the person who completed it.
1. Grace - does the dishes
2. Skylar - vacuums
3. Connor - helps clean Jack’s room
4. Jack - does the laundry
1-52 LET’S TALK!

1
LET’S TALK!
INTERVIEWS - LET’S TALK ABOUT YOUR HOME!
LT 1.4 - LISTEN
MAD Viewing
Listen to the following students talk about themselves.
Note: The interview answers are unscripted responses to a question. You may notice some
grammatical errors, so please keep in mind that these are authentic responses.
Ashley Carl Jason

LT 1.5 - LISTEN & WRITE
Listen to the following students talk about themselves. Fill in the blanks with words that
are missing in their interview. The blanks may have more than one word. Use capitalization
when needed.
Ashley: “My [house] is pretty big. It has three floors: two stories and a [basement]. I have a bed,
obviously, that has a gray bed sheet and I have a gray [chair] in the corner. Everything is gray.
For [chores], we pretty much all work together. I [clean] my room. My parents kind of help out
throughout the rest of the house. We all kind of [vacuum] together especially because [there]
is a lot of cat hair everywhere. We clean the [bathrooms] every other weekend. We take the bed
sheets off the bed and do those pretty much [every weekend].”
Carl: “My house is pretty big. It’s three stories. We’ve got our [living] room and all that with the
TV and family room on the main floor. Then [upstairs] we’ve got our bathrooms, bedrooms, all
that stuff and then the basement we’ve got a ping pong table, kind of just an area to hang out.
So, my room is completely blue and orange. On one side I have all of my [dressers] and all that
stuff. [On] my dressers I’ve just got kind of like memories from places I’ve been. On the other
side of my room I have my bed with a desk with my [computer] on it. And then for chores I
usually have to [mow the lawn] and then vacuum. It’s kind of just something that we’ve always
done. So, we do that every single [Saturday]. Our family all just does our chores. My mom does
the bathrooms. My dad mops and does the [kitchen].”
LET’S TALK! 1-53
1
LET’S TALK!
ACTIVITIES
LT 1.5 - LISTEN & WRITE (Continued)
Jason: My [house] has three stories. It has a [basement], a middle level, and a top level. On the
top level is where all of our [bedrooms] are. The middle level has the [kitchen] and across from
the kitchen is the [living room] and beside the living room is the sunroom. In the basement we
have a movie room. That’s my favorite room. And several guest rooms around the movie room.
My [room] has a big writing desk where I do all of my homework, and [above] that desk I have a
lot of different [posters] from the bands that I like. I have a reading [chair] that’s beside the desk
and my bed is on the other side of the room. The chores that I have are I have to walk my [dog]
just about every day. I do the [dishes] occasionally and put the dishes back in the cabinets, and I
don’t do a whole lot to be honest.
LT 1.6 - LISTEN
MAD Category Match
After watching the interviews, match the sentences with the students who used them.
Ashley Carl Jason
My room is all gray. The living room has a TV. We have a sunroom.
I clean my room. We hang out in the basement. I love the movie room.
We have cats. I have a computer. I walk my dog.
I mow the lawn. I do not help a lot at home.
1-54 LET’S TALK!

1
REVIEW & ASSESSMENT

REVIEW: SELF-EVALUATION
How well do I
understand the topic?
Additional
Refer to...
I CAN... Practice
(Page = P.)
Review (R)
1. describe rooms in a house and Section 1
R. 2, 5, 7, 8
household items. Section 2
2. use prepositions of place. R. 2, 4, 7, 8 P. 1-8
3. describe what there is in a room. R. 4, 7, 8 P. 1-25
4. use the present continuous. R. 6 P. 1-22
5. use adverbs of frequency. R. 1, 3, 8 P. 1-37
R1 - LISTENING 1
MAD Multiple Choice
Listen to the description of the chores that Bella and her family do and how often. Then, answer
the questions based on what you heard.
“Hi. My name is Bella, and I live in Washington, D.C. My sister and I do chores daily. We make our
beds every morning. In the morning, my mom always cooks for us. After we eat, my sister often
washes the dishes. My dad sometimes waters the plants before he goes to work. In the evening,
I usually cook dinner for my family because I love to cook. My sister sets the table, and my dad
usually clears the table. Finally, my dad often takes out the garbage after dinner.”
CHAPTER 1 1-55
1
REVIEW & ASSESSMENT

REVIEW ACTIVITIES
R1 - LISTENING 1 (Continued)
MAD Multiple Choice
1. What do Bella and her sister do every morning?
A. cook dinner B. set the table C. take out the garbage D. make their beds
2. How often does Bella’s dad water the plants?
A. always B. often C. sometimes D. usually
3. Who washes the dishes after breakfast?
A. Bella’s sister B. Bella C. Bella’s mom D. Bella’s dad
4. How often does Bella’s dad take out the garbage?
A. always B. often C. sometimes D. never
5. Why does Bella cook dinner for her family?
A. because she has to B. because her mom tells her to C. because she loves to cook
R2 - LISTENING 2
Listen to the following student talk about herself and the chapter topic. Fill in the blanks
with words that are missing in her interview. The blanks may have more than one word.
Taylor: “My [house] has three levels to it. The bottom [basement]
has the office and [the garage]. And then up the stairs is the kitchen
and [living room]. Up the stairs is my room, [the laundry room],
and then my mom’s room and the [bathrooms]. My room has my
[bed] right when you walk in and the closet right [next to] the bed
and the dresser is right next to my bed. It’s a small [dresser], and
then across [from] my bed there is a keyboard and my [window]
and my TV. I [clean] my room and my bathroom for chores, and I
also [take out] the trash, and I do this about [every Sunday].”
1-56 CHAPTER 1
1
REVIEW & ASSESSMENT

REVIEW ACTIVITIES
R3 - GRAMMAR 1
Type sentences that describe how often each person does the chore. Be careful with the
placement of the adverb of frequency.
For example: You see: monthly / you / to wash the windows
You type: You wash the windows monthly.
1. sometimes / Tom / to vacuum Tom sometimes vacuums. OR Sometimes Tom vacuums.
2. never / I / to set the table I never set the table.
3. weekly / you / to do the laundry You do the laundry weekly.
4. often / my dad / to cook dinner My dad often cooks dinner. OR Often my dad cooks dinner.
5. daily / we / to dry the dishes We dry the dishes daily.
6. always / she / to water the plants She always waters the plants.
7. rarely / Tiffany / to cook dinner Tiffany rarely cooks dinner.
R4 - GRAMMAR 2
MAD Open Text
Look at the picture of the bedroom. For each set of furniture items write a sentence that
describes where the first item is located in relation to the second item. Start your sentence
with there is or there are.
1. rug / bed
There is a rug in front of the bed.
2. books / bookshelf
There are books on the bookshelf.
3. pillow / bed
There is a pillow on the bed.
4. desk / clock
There is a desk under the clock.
5. curtains / window
There are curtains in front of the window.
6. computer / small table
There is a computer far from the small table.
CHAPTER 1 1-57
1
REVIEW & ASSESSMENT

REVIEW ACTIVITIES
R5 - READING
Read Rebecca’s description of her house. Answer the questions based upon what you read.
“Hi, my name is Rebecca. Welcome to my home! My parents and I live in a small home in the
city. I am an only child. In our home we have a big living room where we host a lot of parties.
My mom has two siblings, and my dad has three siblings. We like to have them all over for
holidays. We have a small kitchen, which is okay because my parents do not like to cook very
much. We do not have a dining room, but do have a table in the kitchen. We rarely eat dinner
together because my mom works late. There are three bedrooms, but we only need two. The
third bedroom has a bed for family or friends when they stay at our house. There are one
and a half bathrooms in our house.”
1. Why does the family rarely eat together?

2. What does Rebecca and her family like to do in the living room?
3. How many bedrooms does the family need?
4. Where is the dinner table located?
5. What is the third bedroom used for?
Possible answers:
1. Rebecca’s mom works late.
2. They like to host a lot of parties.
3. Her family needs two bedrooms.
4. The dinner table is located in the kitchen.
5. The third bedroom is used for family.
1-58 CHAPTER 1
1
REVIEW & ASSESSMENT

REVIEW ACTIVITIES
R6 - WRITING
Look at the picture and type a sentence describing what each person is doing.
Use the present continuous.
For example: You see: You type: [Michael is making his bed.]
1. [My parents and I are 5. [The girls are feeding

cooking dinner.] the dog.]
2. [Sam is setting the table.] 6. [I am cleaning the

bedroom.]
3. [Matt is washing the 7. [Susan is taking out

windows.] the garbage.]
4. [You are watering the plants.] 8. [Jack is vacuuming.]
R7 - SPEAKING 1
MAD Open Recording
Describe your kitchen in detail. Talk about the color and the furniture, and use prepositions
of place to help describe where items are located in the kitchen.
R8 - SPEAKING 2
MAD Open Recording
Look at the vocabulary images from the beginning of each section. Describe each picture
using new vocabulary that you learned from this chapter.
CHAPTER 1 1-59
1
REVIEW & ASSESSMENT

ASSESSMENT
PROJECT 1 (Optional: Refer to the Rubric Section.)
DRAW YOUR DREAM ROOM
With a partner, dream up the best bedroom you can think of. First, design your room on a
piece of paper. Then, label each item with the correct English vocabulary word. Lastly, write
sentences describing your room. You should aim to have 20 objects in your room that can
be labeled. Write at least 15 sentences together with your partner. Turn in your drawing and
sentences to your teacher.
Teacher Note: Have the students present their rooms to the class if you would like to add a
speaking portion to this project.

DESIGN YOUR DREAM ROOM ON A BUDGET
With a partner, design a room on the computer with pictures and prices. Look at different
sites and online stores to find furniture you would like to have in your room. Make sure you
keep track of the prices. Your goal is to have a nice room and stay under budget. You are
given $ _______ to spend. Turn in your final picture and your budget checklist to your teacher.
For example: Budget Checklist - Budget $2,000
Furniture Item Cost Website Total Money Left to Spend

Bed $759.00 www.bedsrus.com $2,000-$759 = $1,241
Desk $382.00 www.desksdesks.com $1,241-$382 = $859
Teacher Note: Have the students present their rooms to the class if you would like to add a
speaking portion to this project. Decide if you want the students to print off the room picture
or if you will show it on the computer.
Make it interactive! Have students vote for which room they like best, which is the most
creative, which is the best room for the best price, etc.
1-60 CHAPTER 1
1
REVIEW & ASSESSMENT

ASSESSMENT
LISTENING 1
MAD Multiple Choice
Listen to the description of the chores that Alex and his siblings do and how often. Then, answer
the questions based on what you heard.
“Hi. My name is Alex, and I live in New York City. I have two siblings, a brother and a sister.
We do chores to help our family. We make our beds every morning. I clean my bedroom often, but
my siblings rarely clean their rooms. My brother and I wash the windows monthly. My sister never
washes the windows. She walks our dog, Max. I never walk him, but I feed him daily.
My parents cook dinner nightly. I always set the table. After dinner, my brother clears the table, and
my sister loads the dishwasher. Sometimes my mom washes the dishes. Finally, my brother takes
out the garbage.”
1. Which chore does Alex NOT do?

A. make the bed B. wash the windows C. walk the dog D. set the table
2. Which chore does Alex’s sister do after dinner?
A. sets the table B. loads the dishwasher C. takes out the garbage D.clears the table
3. Who walks Max, the dog?
A. Alex B. his parents C. his brother D. his sister
4. How often do Alex’s siblings clean their rooms?
A. every morning B. often C. never D. rarely
5. Who does NOT wash the windows?
A. Alex’s sister B. Alex C. Alex’s brother
6. How often do Alex’s parents cook dinner?
A. never B. rarely C. every night D. sometimes
7. Who washes the dishes?
A. Alex B. Alex’s mom C. Alex’s sister D. Alex’s brother
CHAPTER 1 1-61
1
REVIEW & ASSESSMENT

ASSESSMENT
LISTENING 2
Emily: “My [home] has three levels. I have an unfinished [basement]

where we have some workout stuff, and then on my middle level we
have our [kitchen] and our living room. On the top level is where
everyone’s [bedrooms] are. My room is usually a mess. I have my [bed]
in my far corner, and I have a nightstand [next to] it, and I have [a desk]
next to my nightstand. [Chores] around the house that I do: I take my
dog out for walks, and I let my dog out, and I [clean the dishes], and
occasionally I [mow the lawn], and I do this [every day].”
GRAMMAR 1
Type sentences that describe how often each person has to do the chore.
Be careful with the placement of the adverb of frequency.
1. rarely / Andrew / to clear the table
Andrew rarely clears the table.
2. sometimes / you / to cook
You sometimes cook. OR Sometimes you cook.
3. monthly / Paul and I / to wash the windows
Paul and I wash the windows monthly.
4. always / I / to mow the lawn
I always mow the lawn.
5. weekly / Andy and Keith / to take out the garbage
Andy and Keith take out the garbage weekly.
6. usually / my dad / to feed the dog
My dad usually feeds the dog. OR Usually my dad feeds the dog.
7. daily / we / to make our beds
We make our beds daily.
1-62 CHAPTER 1
1
REVIEW & ASSESSMENT

ASSESSMENT
GRAMMAR 2
MAD Open Text
Look at the picture of the living room. For each set of furniture items write a sentence that
describes where the first item is located in relation to the second item. Start your sentence
with There is or There are.
1. couch / lamps
There is a couch between the lamps.
2. rug / armchair
There is a rug in front of the armchair.
3. windows / curtains
There are windows behind the curtains.
4. pillows / couch
There are pillows on the couch.
5. TV / door
There is a TV far from the door.
READING
Read Adam’s description of his house. Answer the questions based upon what you read.
Hello, my name is Adam. Welcome to my home! My house is big because we have a big family.
I live with my parents and my three siblings. In my house there are nine rooms. First, we have a
living room. My family and I like to watch TV and movies there. Next, we have a dining room. We
always eat dinner together. Then, we have a large kitchen because my mom loves to cook. There
are also two bathrooms in our house. One bathroom is upstairs, and the other is downstairs.
Lastly, there are four bedrooms in our house that are upstairs. In my bedroom, I like to listen to
music, do my homework and read.
1. Why does Adam’s family have a big house? ... because he has a big family.
2. What does Adam and his family like to do in the living room? ... like to watch TV and movies.
3. What does Adam’s mom like to do in the kitchen? ... likes to cook.
4. How many bathrooms are in Adam’s home? There are two bathrooms in Adam’s house.
5. Where are the bedrooms located? The bedrooms are upstairs.
6. What is one thing that Adam likes to do in his room? ... listen to music, do his homework or read.
CHAPTER 1 1-63
1
REVIEW & ASSESSMENT

ASSESSMENT
WRITING
Look at the picture and type a sentence describing what each person is doing. Use the
present continuous.
1. [Ashley is doing laundry.] 5. [My parents are watering

the flowers.]
2. [My little brother is mowing 6. [You are washing the

the lawn.] dishes.]
3. [I am making the bed.] 7. [Victoria is setting the

table.]
4. [My sister and I are feeding 8. [Noah is cooking dinner.]

the cat.]
SPEAKING 1
MAD Open Recording
Describe your room in detail. Talk about the color, the furniture and use prepositions of
place to help describe where items are located in your room.
SPEAKING 2
MAD Open Recording
Look at the vocabulary images from the beginning of each section. Describe one image
1-64 CHAPTER 1
1
2 CHAPTER TWO
FOOD & DRINK
VOCABULARY
Food and Meals ........................................................... 2-4
Grocery Shopping ....................................................... 2-17
In a Restaurant ............................................................ 2-31
GRAMMAR
Some vs. Any ............................................................... 2-7
Basic Intensifiers (enough, so, too) ......................... 2-11
Verbs of Preference + Gerund ................................. 2-22
Countable vs. Uncountable Nouns ......................... 2-25
Polite Requests Using could .................................... 2-35
Review of would like .................................................. 2-36
CONVERSATION
What does each person eat? .................................... 2-14
I Am Hungry .................................................................. 2-15
What do you eat? ........................................................ 2-2 2-28
Let’s Build Sentences ................................................. 2-28
May I take your order? ............................................... 2-39
New York Restaurant ................................................. 2-40
READING
Pen Pal Letter ............................................................... 2-16
Greenmarkets in New York City ............................... 2-29
Cafe Menu ..................................................................... 2-41
LET’S TALK!
Video - Let’s go to a Restaurant! .......................... 2-42
LEARNING OBJECTIVES Interviews - Let’s talk about food! ............................ 2-45
• discuss food and drink using some and any. REVIEW & ASSESSMENT
• use basic intensifiers to describe food. Review ............................................................................ 2-47
Projects .......................................................................... 2-52
• discuss groceries using countable and uncountable nouns. Assessment ................................................................... 2-52
• order in a restaurant.
• use polite requests with could.
INTRODUCTION 2-1
1
2

NEW YORK
NY
Abbreviation: NY Known For: Niagara Falls Pizza

Nickname: The Empire State Statue of Liberty Cheesecake
Capital City: Albany Ellis Island Shopping
Other Major Cities: New York City, Buffalo, Rochester, Broadway Musicals Rangers
Yonkers, Siracuse Central Park Islanders
Population: 19.75 million (2016) United Nations Yankees
Area: 54,556 mi² (square miles) Coney Island Mets
Flag: Skyscrapers Chinatown
Freedom Towers
Baseball Hall of Fame
New York Stock Exchange
State Song: I love New York
State Bird: Eastern Bluebird
State Flower: Rose

1. Over 12 million immigrants entered the United States through Ellis Island.
Research Ellis Island and share at least 5 interesting facts that you learned.
2. New York is known for Broadway Musicals. Research current shows on
Broadway and choose one that you would like to see. Answer the following
questions about the musical: a) What is it called? b) What is it about?
c) Why would you like to see it?
2-2 INTRODUCTION
SECTION 1 VOCABULARY: Food and Meals
Meals For Breakfast For Lunch or Dinner Other Words and Phrases
the breakfast the biscuit the chili the pizza to drink
the dinner; the bread; the chip the rice to eat
the supper the toast the hamburger (the burger) the salad to have a picnic
the lunch the cereal the french fries (the fries) the sandwich hungry
the meal the egg the meat the seafood thirsty
the snack the fruit the beef the fish
the omelette the chicken the lobster
the yogurt the pork the shrimp
the sausage the soup
the pasta the vegetable
SECTION 2 VOCABULARY: Grocery Shopping

Fruit Vegetables Miscellaneous Food Items Other Words and Phrases
the apple the broccoli the butter the bag
the banana the carrot the cheese fresh
the berry (berries) the cucumber the slice of cheese to go grocery shopping
the grape the lettuce the honey the groceries
the lemon the mushroom the jam; the jelly the grocery store
the orange the onion the pepper
the pear the potato the salt
the tomato
SECTION 3 VOCABULARY: In a Restaurant

In a Restaurant Ordering from a Menu Drinks Other Words and Phrases
the bill the appetizer the coffee How does _______ taste?
to recommend the dessert the juice bland
the restaurant the cake (piece of cake) the lemonade delicious
the restroom the chocolate the milk spicy
to serve the ice cream the soda sweet
to taste the main course the tea the ice
to tip the menu the water to be full
to try to order
the waiter
the waitress
INTRODUCTION 2-3
1
2
VOCABULARY
FOOD AND MEALS
BREAKFAST LUNCH DINNER

MAD Open Recording
What words or phrases do you know? What do you see? What is happening in the pictures?


MAD Pronunciation
Pronounce phrases and sentences using Section 1 Vocabulary.
1. I am making an omelette. 6. Vegetables are good for you.
2. My dad is hungry for a big meal. 7. My family likes chicken and rice.
3. We eat lunch at twelve o’clock. 8. I am going to make a fruit salad.
4. What do you want to drink? 9. Would you like a beef or pork sandwich?
5. Are you thirsty? 10. Soup with warm bread is a great supper.
MAD Letter Jumble
Spell the vocabulary words from Section 1.
1. to eat lunch 2. the sausage 3. the cereal 4. the yogurt
5. the biscuit 6. the lobster 7. the seafood 8. hungry
2-4 SECTION 1
ACTIVITIES
MAD Multiple Choice
Choose the vocabulary word that is NOT related to the others in the group.
1. Which vocabulary word is NOT related to the others?
A. the chicken B. the grapes C. the beef D. the sausage
A. breakfast B. dinner C. hungry D. lunch
A. the chips B. the yogurt C. the egg D. the cereal
A. the rice B. the shrimp C. the fish D. the lobster
A. to cook B. to eat C. to drink D. grilled
A. the vegetable B. the chili C. the omelette D. the salad
A. the pasta B. the snack C. the pizza D. the sandwich
A. the rice B. the sandwich C. the soup D. the toast
ACTIVITY 2.1.6 - READ & WRITE

Fill in the blanks with vocabulary words based on the pictures given. *Do not include a
definite or indefinite article with the answer.
2. 3. 4.
For breakfast, I usually eat a bowl of 1.
with . Sometimes I eat an with .
For lunch, I like to eat a with . Often I eat and . For supper, I love to eat
any type of seafood. My favorite seafood is . I also cook and .
1. [cereal] 2. [fruit] 3. [omelette] 4. [yogurt] 5. [sandwich] 6. [chips]

7. [soup] 8. [salad] 9. [lobster] 10. [vegetables] 11. [rice]
SECTION 1 2-5
1
2
VOCABULARY
ACTIVITIES
MAD Text Match
Listen to the people talk about their lunches. Match the description with the correct lunch.
My name is Amy. Hi. I’m Dan.

I am eating pasta for lunch. I have a couple sausages today in my
lunch.
Hello. I am Scott. Hey there. I’m Sue.

Today I am eating a burger I am making my own salad at the salad
and fries. bar today.
Tim here. Good afternoon. My name is Cindy.

I am ordering pizza for lunch I am eating soup for my lunch.
today.
Hi. I am Tony. My name is Brittany.

For lunch, I am ordering seafood My lunch is a sandwich and some chips.
with vegetables.

Listen to the questions and answer them in complete sentences.
1. What do you like to eat for breakfast? 3. Do you prefer meat or seafood?
2. What do you like to eat for lunch? 4. What kind of meat or seafood do you like?
CULTURAL NOTE
Brunch is a term that combines the words breakfast and lunch. It is a meal that is eaten in the late
morning or early afternoon. It takes the place of breakfast and lunch.
Restaurants serve both breakfast and lunch foods like eggs,
pancakes, bread or toast with jam, breakfast sausage, bacon, cereal,
muffins, meats, pastas, salads etc.
People love to find a place that has a brunch buffet where they can
pick what they would like to eat and go back for as much food as
they want. This is called an ‘all-you-can-eat’ buffet.
2-6 SECTION 1
SOME versus ANY
Some and any are used when an amount is unknown or an exact amount is not important.
They can be used with both countable and uncountable nouns.
They appear before a noun.
Some is used: For example:

in affirmative statements Here are some fries.
in questions:
when making an offer Would you like some bread?
when making a request Could I have some rice, please?
Any is used: For example:

in negative statements I don’t have any vegetables.
in questions Do you have any soup?

MAD Pronunciation
Pronounce sentences using some or any.
1. Could I have some cereal? 5. There are some snacks on the table for them.
2. There aren’t any more fries. 6. There isn’t any chicken salad.
3. Is there any yogurt? 7. Do you have any lobster?
4. Would she like some pasta? 8. There is some fruit in the fridge.

Decide whether to complete the sentence with some or any.
1. Would you like [some] juice?
2. There aren’t [any] more apples.
3. Could I have [some] lemonade, please?
4. There are [some] glasses for water.
5. Do you have [any] steak?
6. Would the kids like [some] fruit?
7. The restaurant doesn’t have [any] open tables.
SECTION 1 2-7
21
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
MAD Word Jumble
1. Would you like some bread?
2. Is there any shrimp for my salad?
3. There are some biscuits for dinner.
4. Does he have any yogurt?
5. Would you like some toast with your omelette?
6. She doesn’t want any soup.
7. Do you want some fish for lunch?
8. There is some chili in the fridge.

MAD Multiple Choice
Listen to the man placing an order at the cafe. Then answer the questions with true or false
based on what you hear.
Customer: Hello. Are you still serving breakfast food?
Waiter: Yes, you can order breakfast, lunch or dinner at any time.
Customer: Great. I am so hungry.
Waiter: Can I first bring you something to drink?
Customer: I would like some lemonade and also an ice water, please.
Waiter: I am sorry. We do not have any lemonade. We have iced tea or soda.
Customer: What is iced tea?
Waiter: It is basically tea with some ice in it. So, cold tea!
Customer: I would like to try the iced tea. Thanks.
Waiter: Are you also ready to order your food?
Customer: I need some more time.
Waiter: I am going to get your drinks and then I can take your order.
(A little later)
Waiter: Here is your drink. Would you like to order your food now?
Customer: Yes. Could I please have some eggs and sausage? Oh, some yogurt, too.
2-8 SECTION 1
ACTIVITIES
MAD Multiple Choice
Waiter: We do not have any yogurt today. The eggs come with bread, toast or biscuits.
Customer: I do not need any bread. Could I have fruit instead?
Waiter: Yes, fruit instead of bread. Got it. I will be right back with your food.
Customer: Thank you.
Waiter: Here are your eggs, sausage and fruit. Do you need anything else?
Customer: Could I please have some salt and pepper?
(A little later)
Waiter: I have your salt and pepper. How is everything tasting?
Customer: The sausage is delicious. The eggs are a little bland. Thank you for the salt and pepper.
Just what the eggs need.
Waiter: Do you like the iced tea?
Customer: It is too sweet for me to drink every day, but for this hot summer day it is perfect!
Waiter: Glad you like it. Here is the bill. I can take that for you whenever you are ready to pay.
1. The restaurant is not serving any breakfast.

A. True B. False
2. The customer drinks lemonade.
A. True B. False
3. The customer orders eggs and sausage.
A. True B. False
4. The customer cannot have yogurt.
A. True B. False
5. The customer orders fruit instead of bread.
A. True B. False
6. The customer needs salt and jam.
A. True B. False
7. The sausage is a little bland.
A. True B. False
8. The customer likes the iced tea.
A. True B. False
SECTION 1 2-9
21
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
MAD Open Recording
Look at what is in the refrigerator. Use some or any to talk about the food items you do
and do not have. Say at least 6 sentences.

Use the grocery bags to answer the questions using some or any. Make sure you answer
with a complete statement.
Possible Answers:
1. Are there any onions? No, there aren’t any onions.
2. Is there any broccoli? No, there isn’t any broccoli.
3. Are there any grapes? Yes, there are some grapes.
4. Are there any carrots? Yes, there are some carrots.
5. Is there any cereal? No, there isn’t any cereal.
6. Is there any pasta? Yes, there is some pasta.
7. Is there any juice? Yes, there is some juice.
8. Are there any cucumbers? No, there aren’t any cucumbers.
9. Is there any yogurt? No, there isn’t any yogurt.
10. Are there any peppers? Yes, there are some peppers.
2-10 SECTION 1
BASIC INTENSIFIERS (enough, so, too)
INTENSIFIER MEANING FORM EXAMPLE
Enough comes after an Is the soup hot enough?
adjective.
enough You have what you need.
Enough comes before a Do we have enough fish?
noun.
So comes before an The sausage is so

so very; really
adjective. delicious!
There is a lot of something.

Too comes before an
too It also shows a negative The soup is too spicy.
adjective.
opinion.

MAD Multiple Choice
Choose the intensifier that best completes each sentence.
1. I am _________ thirsty! A. so B. enough C. too
2. Is there _________ soup? A. so B. enough C. too
3. The chili is _________ hot to eat. A. so B. enough C. too
4. Do we have _________ bread? A. so B. enough C. too
5. This meal is _________ good. A. so B. enough C. too
6. My omelette is _________ cold to enjoy. A. so B. enough C. too
7. There is _________ food for everyone. A. so B. enough C. too
8. We have _________ sandwiches. A. so B. enough C. too
SECTION 1 2-11
21
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
MAD Word Jumble
1. There is enough fruit for everyone. 5. Do we have enough chicken?
2. The soup is too hot. 6. These french fries are so delicious!
3. I am so hungry. 7. There are not enough vegetables.
4. Are there enough eggs? 8. This sandwich is too big.

Complete each sentence with enough, so, or too.
1. Do you all have [enough] napkins?
2. The french fries taste [so] good.
3. Is there [enough] food for the picnic or do we have to buy more?
4. The soup is [too] hot to eat.
5. I am [so] thirsty!
6. Are there [enough] pizzas for everyone?
7. These hamburgers are [too] big. I can’t eat it all.
8. Can you make [enough] rice for three people, please?
9. The lobster is [so] good.
10. The pork is [too] pink. We have to cook it longer.

Write a complete statement or question for each noun. Use one of the following
intensifiers in each sentence: enough, so, or too.
1. the beef 5. the snacks
2. the biscuits 6. the eggs
3. the bread 7. the meal
4. the shrimp 8. the omelette
2-12 SECTION 1
ACTIVITIES
Listen to husband and wife as they talk about dinner plans for the week. Fill in the blanks with
the correct word based on what they say. There can be one or two words in each blank.
Wife: Dan, I am going grocery shopping tomorrow to buy what we need for some dinners this
week. Are there [any] dinners you want me to make?
Husband: Monday I have to work late and will get home [too] late for dinner. You and the
kids can eat without me.
Wife: You work [too] much! Thanks for telling me. Let’s see. You don’t like to eat chicken.
I can make chicken and rice since you are not eating with us.
Husband: Sounds good. Can we have pizza one day this week?
Wife: Pizza is quick and easy. Let’s have [some] pizza and salad on Thursday. Jim has a
basketball game at 7:00 p.m. That will be [so] fast to make.
Husband: Don’t buy [too] many pizzas. We only need two. Jim has to be at school for the
game at 5:00. He is not eating dinner with us then.
Wife: Right. Two pizzas are [enough] for you, me and Maggie.
Husband: Can we go to a fish fry on Friday?
Wife: Fish on Friday it is. Happy I do not have to cook dinner one day this week. That leaves
Tuesday and Wednesday.
Husband: Do we have [any] soup or chili to make?
Wife: Chili is always [too] spicy for Maggie. She likes soup though. Let’s have tomato soup
and grilled cheese sandwiches on Wednesday. So, I still need to buy slices of cheese.
Husband: Could we do hamburgers?
Wife: The kids don’t eat [enough] vegetables. I am going to cook pasta with vegetables on
Tuesday. We can have hamburgers a different night.
Husband: Great. Maybe I can grill [some] hamburgers on the weekend. Do we have [any]
hamburger meat in the refrigerator?
Wife: We need to buy the meat later in the week so that it is fresh! It can’t be in the fridge
[too] many days. Now let’s go grocery shopping!

MAD Category Match
Listen again to the husband and wife talk about dinner plans for the week. Fill in the chart
based on what they plan on cooking for each meal. (Use the script from 2.1.19)
Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday

chicken pasta soup pizza fish
rice vegetables sandwich salad chips
SECTION 1 2-13
ACTIVITIES
ACTIVITY 2.1.21 - SPEAK: What does each person eat?
Ask your partner what each person eats for that meal. Teachers, you will have to print this
worksheet out for your students.
recorder at the beginning of this activity and hit record.
Print the worksheet from the A2 Resources Google Doc Folder or download the
A2StudentWorksheet.pdf
Partner Activity Explanation: Partner 1 and Partner 2 have different questions and answers.
Partner 1 asks a question to Partner 2 and Partner 2 then answers the question.
For example:
On your worksheet you will see
Partner 1 Worksheet
Partner 1 - Questions to ask Partner 2 Partner 1 - Answers to Questions of Partner 2
1. Max / breakfast 1. Sally
Partner 2 Worksheet
Partner 2 - Answers to Questions of Partner 1 Partner 2 - Questions to ask Partner 1
1. Max 1. Sally / dinner
Partner 1 Asks: What does Max eat for breakfast?

Partner 2 Answers: Max eats eggs for breakfast.
Partner 2 Asks: What does Sally eat for dinner?
Partner 1 Answers: Sally eats fish for dinner.
2-14 SECTION 1
1
2
CONVERSATION
ACTIVITIES
ACTIVITY 2.1.22 - SPEAK: I Am Hungry
You and your partner are having lunch together. Look over the menu and ask each other
questions about what you are going to order. Discuss what food you like and dislike on the
menu.
SECTION 1 2-15
21
READING
PEN PAL LETTER
Hi Julie,
How are you doing? I really enjoy reading your letters and am glad that we are pen pals. In the last letter, you asked
me about what Americans enjoy eating. Well, people like to eat different meals depending on the season. During
the winter, men and women enjoy cooking food that makes them feel warm. For example, families can make
homemade chili with beans, meat, and tomatoes. It often has a spicy taste to make you feel warm. If you do not
like spicy food, soup is another great option. Some classic soups are chicken noodle soup or tomato soup.
When it is summer and a good time to be outside, many families are not cooking in the kitchen. Picnicking for lunch
or grilling for dinner are very common in warmer months. Chicken and shrimp are a quick and easy meal that tastes
great on the grill! You can also add many spices to make each piece taste different. On the other hand, no matter
what season, people like cooking eggs and omelettes for breakfast. It is very healthy and can be made with different
ingredients each time. Toast and eggs are the perfect pair for any breakfast, too!
What do you make for breakfast, lunch and dinner with your family? What foods are people eating where you are
from? I look forward to reading your response.
Sincerely,
Ashley

MAD Chart Match
Read the pen pal letter to Julie from Ashley. Drag each food item under the meal category.
Breakfast Lunch Dinner

eggs soup shrimp
omelette chili chicken
toast picnicking grilling

MAD Open Text
Respond to the letter as if you are Julie. Make sure you answer the two questions that
Ashley asks at the end of her letter. Write your response in letter format.
2-16 SECTION 1
1
2
VOCABULARY
GROCERY SHOPPING

MAD Open Recording

SECTION 2 2-17
ACTIVITIES
MAD Pronunciation
1. Salt and pepper 6. My mom likes to cook with onions.
2. Do you like honey in your tea? 7. She does not like mushrooms on her pizza.
3. Can I please have some lemon water? 8. My brothers like jam on toast.
4. Lettuce is a vegetable. 9. Grapes are my favorite fruit.
5. I need some more butter. 10. I like to eat dessert after my meal.

MAD Letter Jumble
1. the mushroom 2. the banana 3. the groceries 4. the orange
5. the broccoli 6. the cheese 7. the tomato 8. the cucumber

MAD Image Match
Match the image with the correct vocabulary word based on what you hear.
1. the apple 7. the pear
2. the jelly 8. the broccoli
3. the carrot 9. the lettuce
4. the orange 10. the tomato
5. the honey 11. the potato
6. the mushroom 12. the lemon
2-18 SECTION 2
1
2
VOCABULARY
ACTIVITIES
MAD Multiple Choice
One of Marie’s weekly chores is to go grocery shopping for her Aunt Anna and her Grandma
Betty. Listen as they tell Marie what they each need from the grocery store. Answer the
questions based on what you hear.
Mom: Today is your grocery shopping day. You have to call grandma and Aunt Anna to ask for
their lists.
Marie: I know, Mom. I am doing that right now.
(Phone rings )
Grandma: Hello?
Marie: Hello, Grandma Betty. It is Marie.
Grandma: Hi, Marie. How are you?
Marie: I am great, thanks for asking. I am calling to ask what groceries you need for this week.
Grandma: Oh, yes! Can you buy me bread and bananas? Also one tomato, pasta, mushrooms
and cheese for the chili I want to make tomorrow for lunch.
Marie: Is that all, Grandma?
Grandma: Yes, that is it. Oh wait, I need eggs, broccoli and an apple, too.
Marie: Okay. I have it all on my list. I am shopping at 2:30 and can bring it to you at 4:00 this
afternoon. See you soon.
(Hang up phone)
(Phone rings)
Aunt: Hello?
Marie: Hi, Aunt Anna.
Aunt: Hello, Marie. Are you calling about the grocery shopping?
Marie: Yes, I am.
Aunt: Thank you so much. I have my shopping list right here. I need pasta, lettuce, a cucumber
and a potato.
Aunt: I also would like some fish for dinner this week. Please buy any fish you see on sale.
Let’s see, how about something to drink as well. Juice. Can you buy some orange juice please?
Lastly, fruit. I would like grapes, an orange and bananas please.
Marie: Yes, I have all of your items on the grocery list. I am shopping at half past 2 and can bring
the groceries to you at 4:30 p.m.
Aunt: That is great. Would you like to eat dinner with me at 5 p.m.? I am cooking your favorite
meal. Pork chops with mushrooms and rice.
Marie: Thanks! I would like that very much! See you then.
(Hang up phone) SECTION 2 2-19
ACTIVITIES
MAD Multiple Choice
Marie: Okay, Mom. I have the list from Aunt Anna and Grandma Betty. I am going grocery
shopping now. I am eating dinner by Aunt Anna’s at 5. I am coming home after dinner.
Mom: Sounds good! Marie, can you buy a couple groceries for me? Bring them home before
you drop off the groceries by grandma.
Marie: Okay. I can do that. What do you need from the store?
Mom: We are out of bananas and bread. I would like an apple, as well as some broccoli,
carrots and pasta.
Marie: Have it on my list. See you later. Bye, Mom.
Mom: Bye.
1. Which grocery bag is Grandma Betty’s?

A. Bag 1 B. Bag 2 C. Bag 3
2. Which grocery bag is Aunt Anna’s?
3. Which grocery bag is her mom’s?
4. Who does not need bread?
A. Grandma Betty B. Aunt Anna C. Mom
5. What items do grandma, Aunt Anna and mom all need?
A. bananas and bread B. bananas and pasta C. bread and pasta
6. Which bag does not have meat?
7. Which bag has more than fruit and vegetables?
8. What time is she going to grandma’s with the groceries?
A. 4:00 p.m. B. 4:30 p.m. C. 5:00 p.m.
9. What time is she eating by Aunt Anna’s?
A. 4:00 p.m. B. 4:30 p.m. C. 5:00 p.m.
10. What time is she going grocery shopping?
A. 1:30 p.m. B. 2:30 p.m. C. 3:30 p.m.
2-20 SECTION 2
1
2
VOCABULARY
ACTIVITIES
MAD Sentence Jumble
Ryan and Mike are talking at lunch about their food preferences. Put the conversation in the
correct order.
Mike: Ryan, what do you have in your lunch today?
Ryan: I have a sandwich with an apple, carrots and chips. What about you?
Mike: I have a sandwich, too. I also have a pear and yogurt.
Ryan: I do not like pears. Apples are my favorite, but I also really like bananas.
What is your favorite fruit?
Mike: I also love apples, but my favorite is pears. What is your favorite vegetable?
Ryan: I really like carrots. What about you?
Mike: I do like carrots, but tomatoes are my favorite.
Ryan: I need to go to class. Talk to you later, Mike.
Mike: Bye.
CULTURAL NOTE
Grocery Bags
There are different types of bags that someone can use to take their groceries home. At a
grocery store it is common for the cashier to ask you, “Would you like paper or plastic?” That way
the customer can decide which they prefer. However, it has become popular for customers to bring
their own bags to the store. These bags are called reusable bags. They are often made out of cloth
or recycled plastic. Some stores will give you money back for each reusable bag you bring. A nickel
is a typical reimbursement per reusable bag.
Paper Plastic Reusable
SECTION 2 2-21
VERBS OF PREFERENCE + GERUND
Use a verb of preference and the -ing form of the verb that follows in order to express a preference
(things you like and dislike) toward a specific activity.
How to form a sentence with a verb of preference + gerund:

subject + verb of preference + gerund + other
My mom doesn’t like mowing the lawn.
I love eating vegetables.
Here are some common words and phrases in English to express preferences:
Verb Preference Example Sentence
can’t stand My brother can’t stand setting the table.
My mom dislikes doing the dishes.
dislike (don’t like)
My mom doesn’t like doing the dishes.
don’t mind I don’t mind eating vegetables.
enjoy My family enjoys having a picnic during lunch.
like I like having fruit for a snack.
love My dad loves cooking.

MAD Multiple Choice
Choose the correct conjugation of the verb of preference + gerund to best complete each
sentence.
1. I __________ the dishes.
A. can’t stand to wash B. can’t stand wash C. can’t stand washing
2. Do you __________ jelly on toast?
A. like eating B. likes eating C. like eat
3. My mom __________ for a snack.
A. love to eat B. love eating C. loves eating
4. I __________ dinner for my family.
A. enjoy to cook B. enjoy cooking C. enjoys cooking
5. Which foods does he __________ ?
A. dislikes eating B. dislike eating C. dislikes to eat
2-22 SECTION 2
1
2
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
MAD Multiple Choice
6. My sister and I __________ the table.
A. doesn’t mind setting B. don’t mind to set C. don’t mind setting
7. My brother __________ onions on a sandwich.
A. doesn’t like eating B. don’t like eating C. doesn’t like eat
8. I __________ milk with my breakfast.
A. loves to drink B. love drinking C. loves drinking

MAD Sentence Jumble
Read the sentences about food preferences. Put these sentences in order based on the verb of
preference used. Start with what the person likes the most and end with the least favorite.
I absolutely love any food that is grilled.
I like a big sandwich with a side salad.
I enjoy most vegetables in my soup.
I don’t mind mushrooms.
I dislike seafood.
I can’t stand food that is bland.

Type a sentence using the subject, the verb of preference and the infinitive to show each
person’s preferences.
For example: You see: David / to play / don’t like / tennis
You type: [David doesn’t like playing tennis.]
1. I / chicken / don’t mind / to cook [I don’t mind cooking chicken.]
2. She / like / to eat / cucumbers [She likes eating cucumbers.]
3. Sam and I / to have / enjoy / a picnic [Sam and I enjoy having a picnic.]
4. My mom / can’t stand / to drink / coffee [My mom can’t stand drinking coffee.]
5. You / pears / love / to eat [You love eating pears.]
6. to buy / Tim and Jack / dislike / groceries [Tim and Jack dislike buying groceries.]
SECTION 2 2-23
ACTIVITIES
MAD Category Match
Listen as three people describe their food preferences. Then match each phrase with the
person it describes.
Hi. My name is Mandy. I love cooking for my family. My favorite meal to cook is chili.
I dislike eating many vegetables, but I don’t mind drinking vegetable juice. I really like
eating fruit at all meals. My favorite fruit to eat is an orange.
Hello. My name is Jake. I love eating food, but I dislike cooking it. I don’t mind cooking
eggs because those are easy to make. I like eating meat and seafood the most. My favorite
type of meat is sausage and my favorite seafood is fish.
Good afternoon. My name is Elizabeth. I really dislike grocery shopping because I think it
is boring. I do love eating most foods! I often do not eat breakfast because I can’t stand
breakfast foods. My favorite meal of the day is dinner. I love eating pasta and pizza! Italian
food is my favorite.
Mandy Jake Elizabeth

loves cooking chili loves eating food loves eating Italian food
dislikes eating vegetables dislikes cooking food dislikes grocery shopping
doesn’t mind drinking can’t stand eating breakfast

doesn’t mind cooking eggs
vegetable juice foods
likes eating oranges likes eating sausage and fish likes eating dinner foods

MAD Open Recording
Use each of the verbs of preference with a gerund in a sentence to describe your personal
food preferences.
1. can’t stand 2. like 3. enjoy 4. don’t mind 5. dislike 6. love
2-24 SECTION 2
1
2
GRAMMAR
COUNTABLE versus UNCOUNTABLE NOUNS
There are two groups of nouns: countable and uncountable nouns.
Some is used:
Countable nouns are nouns that we can count. For
For example:
example:
in affirmative statements Here are some fries.
in questions:
They answer the question how many. SINGULAR PLURAL
when making an offer Would you like some bread?
These nounswhen
havemaking a request
a singular form that can take appleI have some rice, please?
Could apples
an indefinite article (a or an). carrot carrots
vegetable vegetables
They also have a plural form.
The plural of most countable nouns is with -s: pear → pears snack → snacks
There are irregular plural forms with some countable nouns: man → men loaf → loaves
Some is used: nouns are nouns that we cannot

Uncountable For example:
These are the uncountable nouns in this chapter:
in affirmative statements
count. Here are some fries.
in questions: beef fruit
pork
They answerwhen making an
the question offer
how much. breadyou like some
Would bread?
honey
when making a request Could I have some rice, please? rice
broccoli ice cream
These nouns only have one form. salt
butter jam
seafood
cereal jelly
shrimp
cheese lettuce
soup
chicken meat
tea
chili milk
toast
coffee pasta
water
fish pepper
Examples of how many and how much:

How many apples do you have? I have six apples. (countable)
How much fruit do we have? We have a lot of fruit. (uncountable)
*When you learn a new noun, you do not know if it is countable or uncountable by simply looking at it.
For each new noun you learn, you need to see if there is a plural form.
SECTION 2 2-25
ACTIVITIES
MAD Multiple Choice
Look at the picture and indicate whether the item is a countable noun or an uncountable
noun.
1. A. countable B. uncountable 6. A. countable B. uncountable

MAD Multiple Choice
Answer each question about countable and uncountable nouns.
1. Which noun is uncountable? A. the banana B. the orange C. the honey
2. Which noun is countable? A. the fruit B. the egg C. the bread
3. Which noun is uncountable? A. the pasta B. the sandwich C. the pizza
4. Which noun is countable? A. the vegetable B. the lettuce C. the rice
5. Which noun is uncountable? A. the potato B. the fish C. the grape
6. Which noun is countable? A. the toast B. the omelette C. the rice
7. Which noun is uncountable? A. the lettuce B. the tomato C. the pear
8. Which noun is countable? A. the cucumber B. the honey C. the fish

MAD Continuous Recording
Listen to the person say each noun. In the blank provided, say the plural form of the noun.
The words are also written for you to read.
1. apples 2. oranges 3. potatoes 4. lettuce 5. fish
6. vegetables 7. carrots 8. broccoli 9. cucumbers 10. tomatoes
2-26 SECTION 2
1
2
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
Complete the question with how much or how many.
1. [How many] eggs do you need? 5. [How much] does the chicken cost?
2. [How much] soup do you want? 6. [How much] lettuce do you want for your salad?
3. [How many] pizzas do we have? 7. [How many] burgers do we need to order?
4. [How many] sandwiches should I make? 8. [How much] broccoli do you want?
ACTIVITY 2.2.17 - READ & LISTEN

MAD Word Jumble
Look at the grocery store advertisement and listen to the questions. Then, put the answers in
the correct word order.
1. How much does the broccoli cost?
It costs one dollar and ninety-nine cents.
2. How many pizzas can you buy for six dollars?
You can buy two pizzas.
3. How much does the mozzarella cheese cost?
It costs five dollars and ninety-nine cents.
4. How much does the beef steak cost?
It costs six dollars and ninety-nine cents.
5. How many slices of cheddar cheese are there?
There are twelve slices of cheese.
6. How many packs of pork sausages cost three dollars and ninety-nine cents?
Two packs cost three dollars and ninety-nine cents.
ACTIVITY 2.2.18 - READ & LISTEN & SPEAK

Look at the grocery store advertisement. Answer the questions in complete sentences.
1. How much does a 2-pack of sausage cost?
2. What costs $1.49?
3. How many pizzas can you buy with $12?
4. How much does a bag of potatoes cost?
5. How many slices of cheddar cheese do you get for $2.99?
6. What would you like to buy?
SECTION 2 2-27
21
CONVERSATION
ACTIVITIES
ACTIVITY 2.2.19 - SPEAK: What do you eat?
Find out your partner’s eating habits. Ask your partner the following questions and write
his/her answers.
A2 Resources Google Doc Folder or download the A2StudentWorksheet.pdf
Questions Answers
1. What do you eat for breakfast? 1.
2. What do you eat for lunch? 2.
3. What fruit and vegetable do you really like? 3.
4. Are there any foods you don’t like? 4.
5. What type of meat or seafood do you prefer? 5.
6. What is your favorite meal of the day? 6.

MAD Open Recording
Use the answers your partner gave you in the previous activity and talk about his/her eating
habits.
ACTIVITY 2.2.21 - SPEAK: Let’s Build Sentences
Look at the words given and make as many sentence combinations as possible as a class.
Listen carefully to your classmates and when it is your turn, try not to repeat any of the
sentences.
TEACHER NOTE: You can record the answers on a sheet of paper or on the board. OR You can
give this in groups of 3 or 4 in the LAD.
I can’t stand to eat fruit chores

You don’t like to drink vegetables food
Susan don’t mind to do homework coffee
Mark and John enjoy to cook the dishes soda
My sister and I like pork cheese
Steven love
2-28 SECTION 2
GREENMARKETS IN NEW YORK CITY
Where do fruits and vegetables come from? When we go to the grocery store, there are
carrots, lettuce, and apples to buy. All of these vegetables and fruits come from farms.
Sometimes food comes from farms in different countries. Many of the grapes people buy in
the grocery store in the United States come from South America or the cheese can come from
Italy.
Of course there are also farms in the United States. People like to buy food that is local and
fresh, but it is hard when you live in the city or in a state with cold weather. Farmers, or people
who work on farms, can bring their vegetables, like onions and peppers, and their fruit, like
pears and berries, to the city and sell them. People who live in New York City like to call the
place where farmers sell their food “Farmers’ Markets” or “Greenmarkets” because you can
buy many fresh fruit and vegetables from farmers. Farmers also sell meat, bread, yogurt, eggs,
milk, plants, flowers and desserts.
Food at a Greenmarket is often more fresh because the food did not have to be transported
from a different city or country. It is picked at the farm and the farmers bring it that day
or within days to the people. For that reason, it is often cheaper to also buy food at a
Greenmarket. It costs money to ship or drive a product from one country to the next.
Farm: a large place where people grow vegetables and fruit
SECTION 2 2-29
21
READING
ACTIVITIES
MAD Multiple Choice
Decide if each statement is True or False based on the reading.
1. A pear is an example of a vegetable.
A. True B. False
2. At a farmers’ market, you can buy vegetables, fruit, meat, bread and more.
A. True B. False
3. Another name for a farmers’ market is a “Vegetable Market”.
A. True B. False
4. All of the food in the grocery stores comes from local farms in the United States.
A. True B. False
5. Grapes sold in grocery stores in the United States can come from South America.
A. True B. False
6. Farmers bring their vegetables and fruit to the city.
A. True B. False
7. Food is cheaper in a grocery store.
A. True B. False
8. Food is often fresher at a Greenmarket.
A. True B. False

MAD Open Recording
Answer the following questions about markets in your country and city.
1. Where do you usually buy your fruits and vegetables?
2. Are there farms near your city?
3. Do you have Farmers’ Markets or Greenmarkets near you?
4. Does your country get fruit or vegetables from other countries?
2-30 SECTION 2
1
2
VOCABULARY
IN A RESTAURANT

MAD Open Recording


MAD Pronunciation
1. There is a new Mexican restaurant. 6. My family is going to order dessert.
2. Are you full? 7. I would like a soda and a water, please.
3. How does the hamburger taste? 8. The pork tastes bland.
4. The waitress serves us the main course. 9. Would you like a piece of cake?
5. My sister enjoys chocolate ice cream. 10. Do you drink coffee?
SECTION 3 2-31
21
VOCABULARY
ACTIVITIES
CULTURAL NOTE
Ice or No Ice?
When you order a drink in a restaurant, the waiter or waitress brings it to you in a glass. Water,
soda, lemonade, etc. come with ice cubes. If you do not like your drink very cold, then ask for
“no ice!” If you want more to drink, you can usually ask for a refill at no extra cost.

MAD Letter Jumble
1. the waitress 2. the lemonade 3. the restroom 4. to wash up
5. delicious 6. to serve 7. the juice 8. to recommend

MAD Image Match
Read about Danielle’s favorite foods for each meal. Then, match each image with the
correct vocabulary word.
I love to eat! For breakfast, I enjoy eating , , and drinking . For lunch, I like
eating or a . I love drinking . For dinner, I love eating or
with a . I usually drink . I enjoy eating for dessert.
eggs hamburger salad
bread orange juice milk
coffee lobster cake
pizza fish
2-32 SECTION 3
1
2
VOCABULARY
ACTIVITIES
MAD Multiple Choice
Choose the vocabulary word that best completes the sentence.
1. I love a warm cup of __________ in the morning.
A. juice B. coffee C. eggs D. toast
2. The __________ is really good. She is friendly and my order is perfect.
A. waiter B. dessert C. tea D. waitress
3. How does __________ taste?
A. the hamburger B. the bill C. the bag D. the restaurant
4. The waiter serves __________ before the main course.
A. the dessert B. the appetizer C. the snack D. the meal
5. I need to go to __________ to wash up.
A. the menu B. coffee C. eggs D. the restroom
6. __________ is NOT a dessert.
A. Cake B. Ice cream C. Cheese D. Chocolate
7. I __________ this restaurant because the food is delicious!
A. taste B. serve C. recommend D. try
8. My mom likes __________ in her water to make it cold.
A. ice B. milk C. coffee D. lemonade
CULTURAL NOTE
Pop vs Soda
In the United States there are different names for a soft drink depending on where you live.
The southern states typically use the term “coke” or “cola” as it is short for Coca-Cola®. The word
“pop” is more common in the midwest states as well as the Pacific Northwest and Mountain West.
Lastly, “soda” is common on the east and west coasts. However, Hawaii, Missouri and Wisconsin
also use the term “soda”. Then places like Minnesota may even mix the two and call it “soda pop.”
If you look up soda vs. pop, you will see countless websites with opinions about these terms. There
is even one website http://popvssoda.com that is trying to help solve the “who uses which word?”
question and is surveying people on what word they use.
Can you think of a word that you use but other parts of your country use a different word?
SECTION 3 2-33
21
VOCABULARY
ACTIVITIES
Listen to the conversation between a waiter and his customer. Fill in the blanks with the
vocabulary words that you hear.
Waiter: Good evening. How are you doing tonight?
Customer: I’m doing well, thank you.
Waiter: What would you like [to drink]?
Customer: I would like a glass of [water], please.
(A little later)
Waiter: Here is your glass of water. Are you ready [to order]?
Customer: What do you [recommend] to eat?
Waiter: I recommend [the lobster]. It [tastes] delicious.
Customer: That sounds great. That will be my [main course] and for my [appetizer] I would
like [the bread] with dip.
(A little later)
Waiter: [How does] the lobster taste?
Customer: It is [delicious].
Waiter: Would you like [a dessert]?
Customer: No, thank you. I’m [full]. I would like [the bill].
Waiter: Here you go. Enjoy the rest of your evening.

MAD Text Match
Match the answer with the appropriate question.
1. What would you like to drink? I would like lemonade, please.
2. Do you want to order a dessert? No, I’m not hungry. I’m full.
3. How does the hamburger taste? It tastes really bland.
4. Would you like ice in your water? No, I don’t like it really cold.
5. What dessert do you recommend? I recommend the chocolate cake.
6. How do you usually pay for dinner? I like to pay with cash.
7. Where is the restroom? It is in the front of the restaurant.
8. Are we going to order a pizza? Yes, let’s order a large one.
Class activity
the A2 Resources Google Doc Folder or download the A2StudentGames.pdf.)
2-34 SECTION 3
1
2
GRAMMAR
POLITE REQUESTS “COULD”
Could is used to make polite requests.
There is always a verb after could and it is always For example:

in the infinitive form (without ‘to‘). Could I have a menu, please?
For example:
Do not use could/couldn’t in a reply for
Could you pass me the salt?
requests. Instead you use can/can’t.
Yes, I can. OR No, I can’t.
Note: All subjects use the same conjugation of could.

Rewrite the informal request as a polite request.
For example: You see: Can I have a glass of water?
You type: [Could I have a glass of water?]
1. Can we have menus, please? [Could we have menus, please?]
2. Can you wash up before dinner? [Could you wash up before dinner?]
3. Can you bring me another menu? [Could you bring me another menu?]
4. Can you make sandwiches for lunch? [Could you make sandwiches for lunch?]
5. Can you cook an omelette this morning? [Could you cook an omelette this morning?]
6. Can I have ice for my water? [Could I have ice for my water?]

Read common questions and answers between a waiter and customer. Figure out what is
wrong in each sentence and rewrite it to make it correct. It could be a wrong verb conjugation
or incorrect word order. Remember polite request rules. Be careful with capitalization and
punctuation.
Customer: Could I to have a cup of coffee? [Could I have a cup of coffee?]
Waiter: Yes, you could. [Yes, you can.]
Customer: Can you bring another napkin? [Could you bring another napkin?]
Waiter: Yes, I more napkins have. [Yes, I have more napkins.]
Waiter: Would like you to order dessert? [Would you like to order dessert?]
Customer: No. Could I to get the bill, please? [No. Could I get the bill, please?]
SECTION 3 2-35
21
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
MAD Word Jumble
Look at the answer given and put the question in the correct word order.
1. Yes, I can bring it to you. Could I get the bill, please?
2. Yes, which one would you like? Could we order an appetizer?
3. Fish is a great choice! Could I get the fish, please?
4. Yes, I can bring you one. Could we get one more menu?
5. I’m sorry, we only have hot tea. Could I have sweet tea?
6. It is next to the kitchen. Could you tell me where the restroom is?

MAD Open Recording
Pretend you are in a restaurant and ask five polite requests of the waitress.

REVIEW OF ‘would like’ AND THE CONTRACTION ‘d
Would like is used to ask or say politely (in a more formal way) what a person wants or to make
requests/offers. It can be used with a noun or a verb.
For example:
It can be used with a noun. Would you like an apple?
No. I’d like an orange.
For example:
It can be used with a verb. Would you like to have a picnic?
Yes, I would!
It can also be used as a contraction in a positive statement.
To form a contraction you simply combine the subject pronoun and the -d from would. You place an
apostrophe after the subject pronoun.
For example:
I would like a hamburger. → I’d like a hamburger.
She would like to drink milk. → She’d like to drink milk.
Type the contraction for each subject pronoun and the verb would.
1. you would [you’d] 2. he would [he’d] 3. I would [I’d]
4. they would [they’d] 5. she would [she’d]
2-36 SECTION 3
1
2
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
MAD Multiple Choices
You are going to hear a question from a waiter and spoken responses from three different
customers. Choose the best response to the question.
1. Waiter: What would he like to drink?
Customer Response 2: He’d like a glass of lemonade.
2. Waiter: Would you all like to order an appetizer?
Customer Response 1: No, thank you. We aren’t very hungry.
3. Waiter: Would you like chicken or beef?
Customer Response 3: I’d like chicken, please.
4. Waiter: Would you like to taste the chili?
Customer Response 1: No, thank you. It is too spicy.
5. Waiter: What would you like for breakfast?
Customer Response 3: I’d like cereal with a banana.
6. Waiter: Would you like something for your tea?
Customer Response 2: Yes, I’d love some honey.

Read the conversation and fill in the missing words. Use the words given in the word bank.
For every blank there is only one word. *If it is at the beginning of the sentence, capitalize it!
Word Bank: full, water, bring, drink, chicken, no, could, dessert, take, ice, appetizer,
vegetables, delicious, getting, order, would, is, thirsty
Waiter: Good afternoon. Could I [bring] you something to [drink]?
Customer: Yes, please. I am really [thirsty]. Could I have a glass of water with [ice]?
Waiter: Absolutely. Would you like an [appetizer] today?
Customer: No, thank you. I [would] like to only order something for dinner.
Waiter: I am [getting] your water and then I can [take] your order.
Waiter: Okay. Here is the ice [water]. Are you ready to [order]?
Customer: Yes. [Could] I please have the [chicken] with vegetables?
Waiter: That [is] an excellent choice!
Waiter: How does the chicken and [vegetables] taste?
Customer: They are [delicious]!
Waiter: Would you like [dessert] today?
Customer: [No], thank you. I am [full].
SECTION 3 2-37
21
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
Read the answers and write the question a waiter asks in order to get that response.
Answers may vary.
1. I would like a lemonade. What would you like to drink?
2. Yes, I would like an appetizer. Would you like an appetizer?
3. Yes, I would like to try the fish. Would you like to try the fish?
4. I would like chocolate cake. What would you like for dessert?
5. No, thank you. I am full. Would you like anything else to eat or drink?

You and your friend are making plans for tonight. Answer your friend’s questions using
complete sentences. You can answer in the affirmative or you can answer in the negative.
If you answer in the negative, you need to say a recommendation for something else.
Try to answer at least 3 questions in the negative.
For example: You hear: Would you like to eat pasta tonight?
You say: (affirmative example) Yes, I would love to eat pasta!
(negative example) No, I would like to eat seafood.
1. Would you like to go to a restaurant tonight?
2. Would you like to eat at a seafood restaurant?
3. Or would you like to try the new pizza restaurant?
4. Would you like to go out for ice cream after dinner?
5. Would you like to see a movie after dinner?
2-38 SECTION 3
1
2
CONVERSATION
ACTIVITIES
ACTIVITY 2.3.18 - SPEAK: May I take your order?
1. First, decide who is going to be the waiter or waitress and who is going
salads
to be the customer.
Tomato and Mozzarella Salad $7
Shrimp Salad $9
Chicken Salad $8
soups
2. Then, use the menu to role play a conversation.
dinner menu
French Onion Soup $6

Mushroom Soup $5
Tomato Soup $5
specialties
Beef with Rice and Vegetables $14
3. When the conversation is complete, switch roles and have the
Cheeseburger with Fries $12
conversation again.
Pasta with Lobster $15
Sausage Pizza $10
dessert
Piece of Chocolate Cake
Bowl of Ice Cream
$4
$3 * When you are the waiter or waitress you need to write down what the
customer orders because you are going to share this information in
drinks
Coffee $3
Tea $2
Lemonade $2
$2
the MAD.
Soda

MAD Open Recording
Use the information from the ‘May I take your order?’ activity to describe what your partner
orders.
CULTURAL NOTE
Finding Restaurants Online
When going out to dinner, people in America usually look online for restaurant recommendations
and menus. They can even make reservations online. You can order meals “to go” at some
restaurants as well. Going online to do this is common, but many restaurants now have an App
for their restaurant. People also like to look up opinions about restaurants. Many people write
reviews about the food and service they had at a restaurant. Websites such as restaurants.com
or tripadvisor.com have restaurant recommendations for you. It tells you the name, address, and
phone number of the restaurant. It also tells you what type of food the restaurant serves.
Then, it gives a price rating of $, $ $, $ $ $ or
$ $ $ $. The more expensive a restaurant is,
the more $ it has. Then it has stars for overall
rating of the restaurant. 5 stars is the best
and 1 star is the worst rating. Lastly, you can
read reviews that other people wrote. That
way you can decide ahead of time if you want
to try the restaurant or not.
SECTION 3 2-39
21
CONVERSATION
ACTIVITIES
ACTIVITY 2.3.20 - SPEAK: New York Restaurant
1. Take home the following worksheet and fill out the top part with your restaurant
information. Use tripadvisor.com.
2. The next day you will exchange information with a group of 4. Fill out each person’s
restaurant information in the bottom part of the chart as he/she says the information.
YOUR RESTAURANT INFORMATION

Restaurant Phone Type of Specialties/ Price What would he/she
Name Number Food Known For ($, $$, $$$) like to order to eat?
PARTNER’S RESTAURANT INFORMATION

Restaurant Phone Type of Specialties/ Price What would he/she
Name Number Food Known For ($, $$, $$$) like to order to eat?
1.
2.
3.
2-40 SECTION 3
1
2
READING
CAFE MENU
Read the menu and fill in the blanks based on what you read.
*Write all numbers in numeric form - 8, 13, etc.
1. [3] eggs cost $8.
2. The yogurt parfait comes with granola and [berries].
3. Cheese or [onions] can be added in your American fries.
4. This cafe serves [breakfast] food only.
5. Today is Thursday. I can eat at this cafe from 6 - [11] AM.
6. [Biscuits] and gravy is a delicious breakfast meal.
7. The meat omelette has ham, [pork sausage], and cheddar cheese.
8. The VG omelette has mushroom, onion, cheese, broccoli and [tomato].
9. The [coffee] is from Columbia.
10. Butter, [jam], and honey all come with the toast.
11. They serve [brunch] from 7AM-1PM on the weekend.
12. There are [6] different main course breakfast options.
ACTIVITY 2.3.22 - READ, LISTEN & SPEAK

Looking at the menu on the left, respond to the questions that the waitress is asking you.
1. Waiter: Welcome to Good Eats Cafe. Can I bring you something to drink?
2. Waiter: What would you like to order for your meal?
3. Waiter: Would you like a side of toast, seasonal fruit or american fries with your meal?
4. Waiter: How does your food taste?
5. Waiter: Are you ready for the bill?
SECTION 3 2-41
21
LET’S TALK!
VIDEO - LET’S GO TO A RESTAURANT!

MAD Listening & Viewing
same time.
Waiter: Hi, how are you guys doing?
All: Good, how about you?
Waiter: Good, thanks. What can I bring for you to drink?
Skylar: Um, I’m good with just water.
Grace: I’ll have water, also.
Waiter: 2 waters
Jack: Can I have a water too, please?
Waiter: 3
Connor: 4
Waiter: And are you guys interested in food as well?
All: Uh, yeah!
Waiter: Menus. Perfect! Today’s special: we have a mushroom swiss burger. Comes with your
choice of side: chips, fries, or onion rings for $9. And he* also has homemade chili today. I’ll be
right back with your drinks.
All: Okay, thank you!
Waiter: You’re welcome!
Jack: What are you going to get?
Grace: No idea.
2-42 LET’S TALK!
1
2
LET’S TALK!
VIDEO - LET’S GO TO A RESTAURANT!
Skylar: I’m kind of thinking wings?
Jack: Yeah, well the buffalo chicken BLT wrap looks - sounds good anyway.
Skylar: They have good burgers, too.
Grace: Thank you!
Waiter: You’re welcome. Pass it down, thank you.
Skylar: Thank you very much.
Waiter: You are very welcome. Alright, what can I get for ya*?
Skylar: Um, can I get the 10 house wings? Can I get buffalo sauce with ranch? And then can I also
get a side of fries?
Grace: Um, I’m gonna* do the sourdough cheddar melt, and can I get that without the pickle?
Waiter: Sure, and how would you like your burger cooked?
Grace: Um, no pink, so...
Waiter: No pink, medium well? And you said no pickle.
Jack: Can I get the 10 house wings with ½ buffalo, ½ bbq? And then just an order of fries too, please.
Waiter: Do you care for ranch or bleu cheese?
Jack: I’ll take ranch, please.
Waiter: Ranch.
Connor: Can I get the house burger? Just medium well, and chips are fine.
Waiter: Perfect, thank you, I’ll get that in for ya*.
Jack: Do you guys know where the bathroom is?
Grace & Skylar: I think it’s right around the corner.
Waiter: Buffalo wings, pardon my reach, I’ve got a cheddar melt with no pickles.
Skylar: This looks so good!
Jack: I’m excited! That looks very good.
Waiter: I’ve got 1 house burger.
Connor: Thank you!
Waiter: You’re welcome, and the wings.
Jack: Thank you.
Waiter: Extra napkins. Do you guys care for anything else right away?
Skylar: Um, can I just get a refill on my water?
Waiter: Sure.
Connor: Me too.
Waiter: 2 water. Is that it? 2 water, perfect. (brings the waters) You’re welcome, enjoy!
Jack: Alright, let’s eat!
he* - the waiter is referring to the chef and what he has made for the special today.
gonna* - Gonna can be used in informal spoken language in place of going to. LET’S TALK! 2-43
21
LET’S TALK!
ACTIVITIES
LT 2.2 - LISTEN
MAD Multiple Choice
Watch the video and answer the questions below.
1. Where are the students?
A. They are at a park to have a picnic.
B. They are at the grocery store.
C. They are seeing a movie.
D. They are at a restaurant for lunch.
2. What does everyone order to drink?
A. soda B. water C. tea D. milk
3. What is the special of the day?
A. Buffalo Chicken Wrap
B. Sourdough Cheddar Melt
C. House Burger
D. Mushroom Swiss Burger
4. How much does the lunch special cost?
A. $9.00 B. $12.00 C. $17.50 D. $10.75
5. Who does NOT order fries?
A. Skylar B. Jack C. Connor D. Grace
6. What does the waiter NOT bring to the table for the students?
A. ranch B. water C. extra napkins D. lemonade

Fill in the blanks with the missing information you hear in the video.
1. When the waiter asks “What can I bring for you to [drink]?”, everyone says “water”.
2. There is also homemade [chili] today.
3. Skylar says, “They have good [burgers], too.”
4. Skylar orders a side of [fries] to go with her wings, buffalo sauce, and ranch.
5. Grace would like her burger cooked with no [pink].
6. Connor orders [chips] with his house burger.
7. The [bathroom] is right around the corner.
8. Skylar would like a refill on her [water].
2-44 LET’S TALK!

1
2
LET’S TALK!
INTERVIEWS - LET’S TALK ABOUT FOOD!
LT 2.4 - LISTEN
Taylor Ashley Carl

are missing in their interview. The blanks may have more than one word, so listen carefully.
Watch spelling and capitalization if it is the beginning of a sentence.
Taylor: “My favorite [food] is mac ‘n cheese. My favorite [fruit] would probably be pineapple
or strawberry, and my favorite vegetable is [carrots]. Foods that I [don’t like] are celery,
mayonnaise, [tomatoes], and cauliflower. My [mother] cooks at home, but I do not like to
cook. And me and my mom [shop] for our food at local grocery stores.”
Ashley: “My favorite food is [pizza]. Stereotypical, but it is. My favorite fruit is strawberries
and my favorite [vegetable], carrots probably. Food I don’t like, unpopular, but I do not like
watermelon. I don’t like [cucumber]. My mom [cooks] at [home] and she’s kind of helping
me out: helping me learn how to a little bit more now and no, I don’t necessarily like to cook.
We shop for food at the [grocery store] pretty much [every week] unless we need a specific
food at a specific time.”
LET’S TALK! 2-45

21
LET’S TALK!
ACTIVITIES
Carl: “My [favorite] food is actually from when I lived in Germany which is Döner. I ate that
probably once or twice a week whenever I was there. For fruit, I like [to eat apples]. I actually eat
my apples with peanut butter a lot of times. For vegetables, I don’t really like a ton of [vegetables].
I don’t know I would rather eat [fruit]. So foods that I don’t like [would] be like pizza. Pizza - I’ve
eaten way too much [pizza] in my life and I’m just sick of it at this point. And then I also don’t like
strawberries or any berries, so like blackberries, blueberries. My mom is the one who cooks at
home. My [dad], if we’re grilling out, he’ll do that but other than that my mom’s always [cooking].
I don’t like to cook personally. I’d rather just [eat] whatever’s there even if it’s not that great. And
shop for food at a grocery store. We go there about every week. So, then we will just go off those
[groceries] for the week.”
LT 2.6 - LISTEN & SPEAK

MAD Category Match
Listen to the interviews of the students. Drag the correct information in the chart for each
student.
Taylor Ashley Carl

favorite food is Mac n’ Cheese favorite food is pizza likes apples best
likes pineapple and carrots likes strawberries and carrots doesn’t like vegetables
doesn’t like to cook doesn’t like cucumbers doesn’t like pizza or berries
shops at local grocery stores is learning more about cooking mom cooks and dad grills out
2-46 LET’S TALK!

1
2
REVIEW & ASSESSMENT

How well do I
Additional
Refer to...
I CAN... Practice
(Page = P.)
Review (R)
Section
1. discuss food and drink using
R. 1, 5, 6, 8 1, 2, 3
some and any.
P. 2-7
2. use basic intensifiers to describe food. R. 3, 5, 6, 8 P. 2-11
3. discuss groceries using countable and Section 2

R. 4, 5, 7, 8
uncountable nouns. P. 2-25
4. order in a restaurant. R. 6, 8 Section 3
5. use polite requests with could. R. 6, 8 P. 2-35
R1 - LISTENING 1
MAD Multple Choice
Listen to the conversation between the waitress and the customers. Pick the best answer for
each question.
Waitress: Welcome to King Burger. Would you like to order something to drink first?
Mom: Yes, please. We do not have a lot of time. My son has a baseball game. Could we order the
drinks and the food at the same time?
Waitress: Absolutely. Are you ready to order now?
Mom: Yes. Could I please have a lemonade and the fish sandwich?
Waitress: Of course. Would you like fries or chips with that?
Mom: Chips, please. Alex, are you ready to order?
Alex: Yes. I would like an apple juice and a fish sandwich, too.
Waitress: Okay. Would you like fries or chips with that?
Alex: I would like fries. Thanks.
Waitress: And for you young lady?
Jasmine: I would like the grilled cheese sandwich with tomato soup.
Waitress: And would you like anything to drink?
Jasmine: Just water for me, thanks. No ice, please.
Waitress: Got it. I will be back shortly with your drinks and will bring your food as soon as it is ready.
CHAPTER 2 2-47
1
2
REVIEW & ASSESSMENT

REVIEW ACTIVITIES
MAD Multiple Choice
(A little later)
Waitress: How is everything tasting?
Jasmine: Delicious, thanks.
Mom: Good. The lemonade is sweet.
Alex: The sandwich is a little bland. Could I have more ketchup?
Waitress: Yes. Be right back.
(A little later)
Waitress: Would anyone like to order a dessert?
Alex: No, thanks. I don’t want to be too full for my game.
Jasmine: Mom, can I have chocolate ice cream?
Mom: Yes, as long as we can pay the bill and leave as soon as you get your ice cream. We can’t
be late for Alex’s game!
Waitress: The bill and one chocolate ice cream to go.
Waitress: Here is your ice cream and here is your bill. The total is $34.26.
1. How many people are eating?
A.1 B. 2 C. 3
2. Who ordered a fish sandwich?
A. Jasmine B. Alex C. mom D. mom and Alex
3. Who ordered the chips and not fries?
A. Jasmine B. Alex C. mom D. mom and Alex
4. How does Alex’s food taste?
A. bland B. salty C. good D. delicious
5. Which word does NOT describe the food they ate?
A. bland B. sweet C. delicious D. spicy
6. Who orders dessert?
A. mom B. Jasmine C. Alex D. no one
7. What is the total cost of the dinner?
A. $26.34 B. $62.43 C. $34.26 D. $36.24
8. Why do they have to eat fast and do NOT have a lot of time?
A. Jasmine has a baseball game. B. Alex has a basketball game.
C. Alex has a baseball
2-48 CHAPTER 2
1
2
REVIEW & ASSESSMENT

REVIEW ACTIVITIES
R2 - LISTENING 2
Listen to the following student talk about herself and the chapter topic. Fill in the blanks with
words that are missing in her interview. The blanks may have more than one word, so listen
carefully.
Emily: “My favorite food is [grapes]. So, that’s also my [favorite fruit] and my
favorite [vegetable] is corn. Food I don’t like: I don’t like [soup] because I like
to [eat] my food, not slurp my food. My mom [cooks] at home, occasionally
my dad if we have [burgers]. I do not like to cook, I [cannot] cook. And we
[shop] for food at our local [grocery store] every week.”
R3 - GRAMMAR 1
Use the word bank to fill in the blanks with the correct intensifier to complete each sentence.
enough so so too
so enough too enough
1. The chocolate cake is [too] sweet for me. I can’t eat it.
2. Are you hungry [enough] to eat dessert?
3. This pizza is [so] good!
4. The lobster pasta is [so] delicious.
5. Is one grocery bag big [enough] for all these groceries?
6. Do you have [enough] honey for your tea or do you need more?
7. The meal is [so] delicious.
8. The toast is [too] bland. It needs some butter.
R4 - GRAMMAR 2
MAD Category Match
Place each noun in the correct category.
Countable Nouns Uncountable Nouns
the vegetable the water
the pizza the fish
the menu the tea
the snack the cereal
the grape the butter
CHAPTER 2 2-49
1
2
REVIEW & ASSESSMENT

REVIEW ACTIVITIES
R5 - READING
MAD Multiple Choice
Read Mike’s paragraph about his family and his grocery list. Then choose whether the
statement is True or False.
My mom wants me to go grocery shopping for her today. We go shopping every Sunday,
but she is busy today. She has a list that has many foods I like, but also ones that I dislike.
I like eating apples and pears, but I dislike bananas. I enjoy eating lettuce in salads, but I can’t
stand mushrooms. My favorite food is on the list: chocolate! We only have a little coffee left,
so she needs me to get more. My mom needs enough rice to make dinner tonight and tomor-
row, so I need 2 boxes. She cooks dinner most nights for our family. She makes food
that is so delicious! I like cooking too, but I am not as good as my mom.
1. The shopping list has seafood, chicken, rice, and cake.

A. True B. False
2. Mike’s family goes grocery shopping every Sunday.
A. True B. False
3. Mike likes eating apples and pears. apples milk lettuce
bananas broccoli yogurt
A. True B. False
pears mushrooms eggs
4. Mike dislikes eating lettuce. bread lettuce chips
A. True B. False chicken pork butter
cheese coffee chocolate
5. Mike’s favorite food is chocolate.
cereal pasta rice
A. True B. False salt & pepper
6. Mike’s dad cooks dinner every night.
A. True B. False
7. Mike doesn’t like cooking dinner.
A. True B. False
8. Mike’s family does not have enough rice and they need to buy more.
A. True B. False
2-50 CHAPTER 2
1
2
REVIEW & ASSESSMENT

REVIEW ACTIVITIES
R6 - WRITING
MAD Open Text
Based on the image, write a dialogue between the
waitress and the customers. Include polite requests.
You must write a minimum of 10 sentences.
R7 - SPEAKING 1
Answer the questions about yourself as if you were being interviewed.
1. What is your least favorite food?
2. Which fruits do you dislike?
3. Which vegetables do you like?
4. Do you like to cook?
5. What is your favorite restaurant?
6. How often does your family go grocery shopping?
R8 - SPEAKING 2
MAD Open Recording
Look at the vocabulary images from the beginning of each section. Describe each picture using
new vocabulary that you learned from this chapter.
CHAPTER 2 2-51
1
2
REVIEW & ASSESSMENT

ASSESSMENT
CREATE A MENU
Create an American menu for a restaurant or cafe. Name your restaurant or cafe. On your
menu include 4 of the six categories: appetizers, soups, salads, main courses, desserts, and
drinks. Students can present to the class or record in the MAD.

RESTAURANT SKIT
You and your partner(s) are going to role-play a scene in a restaurant. One of you will be the
waiter/waitress and the other will be the customer(s). Role-play what the conversation would
be like from start to finish. Use greetings, order politely, order from different parts of the
menu and pay the bill.
Teacher Note: You can have the students use the menus they created for Project 1 during
this skit or you can find a menu online for the students to use. Use play money, if you have
any, so that the students can pay the bill.
LISTENING 1
MAD Multiple Choice
Listen to the conversation between the waitress and the customers. Pick the best answer for
each question.
Waitress: Welcome to Marco’s Italian Garden. Can I bring you something to drink first?
Dad: Yes, please. I would like a Coca-Cola®.
Waitress: Okay, and for you ma’am.
Mom: Could I please have water?
Waitress: Of course. From the tap or a bottle?
Mom: A bottle. Can I have a glass with ice, too?
Brittany: Me, too. I would like a bottled water and a glass. No ice for me though.
Waitress: Okay, two water bottles and one coke. Do you need another minute with the menu?
Dad: No, thank you. We are ready to order.
Waitress: What would you like to eat, sir?
Dad: I would like the chicken rigatoni pasta. I see it comes with soup or salad. What soup do
you have?
Waitress: Our soup of the day is creamy potato. We also have homemade chili.
Dad: I will have the chili, please.
Waitress: And for you, ma’am?
Mom: I would like the mushroom and spinach pizza.
2-52 CHAPTER 2
1
2
REVIEW & ASSESSMENT

ASSESSMENT
LISTENING 1 (Continued)
MAD Multiple Choice
Waitress: Sounds good. What would you like to order, miss?
Brittany: Could I please have the shrimp scampi pasta?
Waitress: Of course. Would you like soup or salad?
Brittany: I would like the potato soup. Oh, could I have some bread, too?
Waitress: Of course. I will be right back with your drinks and then your food.
(A little later)
Waitress: How is everything tasting so far?
Mom: My pizza is great.
Dad: The chili is spicy, just the way I like it! Thanks!
Brittany: My shrimp scampi is delicious. The soup is a little bland.
Waitress: Sorry to hear that. Would you like some salt and pepper?
Brittany: Pepper would be great, thanks.
(A little later)
Waitress: Would anyone like to order a dessert or anything else?
Mom: No, thanks. The pizza was more than enough for me.
Dad: I would like a piece of the cheesecake, please.
Waitress: Strawberry or blueberry?
Dad: Blueberry, please.
Brittany: Could I have a piece of the chocolate cake, please?
Dad: Could we also have the bill?
Waitress: Be right back with that for you. (A little later) Here is the bill and the desserts.
Dad: Thank you. $68.57. Not too bad for all the delicious food we had.
1. What type of restaurant is it? A. American B. Italian C. Chinese D. Mexican

2. Who did NOT order water? A. dad B. mom C. Brittany D. mom and Brittany
3. Who does NOT want ice? A. dad B. mom C. Brittany D. mom and Brittany
4. How does dad’s food taste? A. bland B. salty C. great D. spicy
5. Which word does NOT describe the food they ate?
A. sweet B. bland C. delicious D. spicy
6. What is the total cost of the dinner?
A. $57.86 B. $75.65 C. $56.75 D. $65.57
7. What does Brittany want for the bland soup?
A. salt B. pepper C. nothing D. salt and peper
8. Who orders dessert?
A. dad B. Brittany C. Brittany and mom D. dad and Brittany
CHAPTER 2 2-53
1
2
REVIEW & ASSESSMENT

ASSESSMENT
LISTENING 2
Listen to the following student talk about himself and the chapter topic. Fill in the blanks
with words that are missing in his interview. The blanks may have more than one word, so
listen carefully.
Jason: “My [favorite food] is probably salmon. I [like] grilled salmon.
My favorite [fruit] is, perhaps, strawberries and my favorite [vegetable] is
corn. Food that I don’t like, probably [broccoli] and brussel sprouts and all
that green stuff. My mom [cooks] at home most of the time, but my dad
cooks occasionally and he’s [usually] very proud of it when he does.
I [don’t] really like to cook myself because I am not very [good] at it.
And I shop at the local [grocery] store about [once a week].”
GRAMMAR 1
Use the word bank to fill in the blanks with the correct intensifier to complete each sentence.
enough so enough too
so enough too enough
1. The chicken is a little bland. There isn’t [enough] salt.
2. The soup is [too] spicy. I don’t like it.
3. The sandwich tastes [so] delicious.
4. Is there [enough] lettuce for the salad or do we need more?
5. Are there [enough] menus for the table?
6. The ice makes the water [so] cold.
7. The vegetables taste [too] bland. I don’t like them.
8. Is there [enough] cereal in this bowl for you?
GRAMMAR 2
MAD Category Match
Place each noun in the correct category.
Countable Nouns Uncountable Nouns
the bill the honey
the onion the salt
the grape the coffee
the meal the broccoli
2-54 CHAPTER 2 the biscuit the cheese
1
2
REVIEW & ASSESSMENT

ASSESSMENT
READING
MAD Multiple Choice
Read about Food Trucks in America. Then, choose whether each statement is True or False.
Food trucks are very popular in America and there are some in almost every city across the
United States. You can get any type of food you want! There are food trucks that serve
breakfast. You could ask the chef to make an omelette with sausage, cheese, tomatoes, and
onion. If that is not enough, you can add more vegetables or meat! Then there are trucks for
lunch and dinner. Each food truck specializes in a different type of food. For example, one
truck could serve Italian dishes like pasta or pizza. If you don’t like eating Italian, you can walk
to another truck to choose a different dish. A popular choice is a truck that serves traditional
American foods like a hamburger and french fries. Make sure to order a lemonade, soda, or
water to go with your meal. If you enjoy eating dessert, there are even food trucks that make
cakes and ice cream! All you have to do is wait in line, order your food, pay your bill, and enjoy
your food! What type of food truck would you like to visit?
1. The main topic of the reading is how to order food in a restaurant.

A. True B. False
2. You can order breakfast from a food truck.
A. True B. False
3. You can only order food at a food truck.
A. True B. False
4. Cakes and ice cream are common desserts at a food truck.
A. True B. False
5. At a food truck, you eat your food and then pay your bill.
A. True B. False
6. Food trucks are only popular in Europe.
A. True B. False
CHAPTER 2 2-55
1
2
REVIEW & ASSESSMENT

ASSESSMENT
WRITING
MAD Open Text
Based on the image, write a dialogue between the waitress and the customers. Include
polite requests. You must write a minimum of 10 sentences.
SPEAKING 1
1. What is your favorite food?
2. Which vegetables do you dislike?
3. Which fruits do you like?
4. Who cooks in your family?
5. Do you like to drink coffee?
6. How often does your family eat at a restaurant?
SPEAKING 2
MAD Open Recording
Look at the vocabulary images from the beginning of each section. Describe one image using
2-56 CHAPTER 2
1
3 CHAPTER THREE
TRAVEL
VOCABULARY
Outdoor Activities ....................................................... 3-4
Travel .............................................................................. 3-15
Natural World ............................................................... 3-31
GRAMMAR
Past Simple of to be ................................................... 3-7
Questions in Past Simple of to be .......................... 3-9
Past Simple ................................................................... 3-19
Questions in Past Simple .......................................... 3-26
Past Simple of Irregular Verbs ................................. 3-35
Past Simple of More Irregular Verbs ...................... 3-37
CONVERSATION
Complete the Sentences ........................................... 3-12
Find a classmate who... ........................................... 3-13
What did you do...? ...................................................... 3-2 3-29
In an Airport .................................................................. 3-29
Travel Agent .................................................................. 3-40
Interview ........................................................................ 3-41
READING
Let’s go camping! ......................................................... 3-14
Boarding Pass .............................................................. 3-30
Travel the World .......................................................... 3-42
LET’S TALK!
Video - Let’s go on vacation! ..................................... 3-44
LEARNING OBJECTIVES Interviews - Let’s talk about vacations! ................... 3-47
• discuss outdoor activities using the past simple.

REVIEW & ASSESSMENT
• discuss travel.
Review ............................................................................ 3-49
• ask and answer questions using the past simple. Projects .......................................................................... 3-54
Assessment ................................................................... 3-54
• discuss the natural world.
INTRODUCTION 3-1
1
3

FLORIDA
FL
Abbreviation: FL Known For: Beaches

Nickname: The Sunshine State Everglades
Capital City: Tallahassee Disney World
Other Major Cities: Miami, Orlando, Jacksonville, Daytona 500
Tampa, Fort Lauderdale Kennedy Space Center
Population: 20.61 million (2016) Cypress Gardens
Area: 65,755 mi² (square miles) oranges, grapefruit
Flag: hurricanes
warm weather
Cape Canaveral
State Song: Old Folks at Home

State Bird: Northern Mockingbird
State Flower: Orange Blossom

1. Florida is known for having beautiful weather. Choose a city in Florida and look
up the 3 day weather forecast. Report on what the weather is going to be like.
2. People from all around the world visit Florida. There are many attractions
throughout the state. Pretend you are going to Florida for a vacation.
What places would you visit? What would you like to do at each place?
3-2 INTRODUCTION
1
3
VOCABULARY
SECTION 1 VOCABULARY: Outdoor Activities
Verbs Other Words and Phrases
to barbecue to go on a hike the beach to find the sleeping bag

to be on vacation to go sightseeing the bicycle (the bike) to follow the tent
to camp to ride the boat the hobby the trail
to go camping to take a trip the camera outside to use
to climb a mountain to take pictures the campfire (the fire) the outdoors
to go fishing the campsite to pack
to fish the campground to unpack
SECTION 2 VOCABULARY: Travel

In the Airport Other Words and Phrases Time Expressions
the airplane to delay to go through to come (along, with) ____ ago
(the plane) to be delayed customs to prefer five days ago
the airport the delay security the seat one year ago
to arrive to depart; to take off to leave to stop the day before yesterday
the arrival the departure the suitcase last ____
to be the identification (I.D.) the ticket last month
early the driver’s license one-way last week
late the passport round-trip yesterday
on time the flight to travel
the boarding pass to fly to visit
to board the gate the world
SECTION 3 VOCABULARY: The Natural World

In the Sky In Nature Other Words and Phrases
the moon the countryside the ocean; the sea the air
the sky the field the tree calm
the star the flower clear
the sun the forest the desert
the grass to grow
the hill the island
the lake
the river
INTRODUCTION 3-3
1
3
VOCABULARY
OUTDOOR ACTIVITIES

MAD Open Recording
What words or phrases do you know? What do you see? What is happening in the pictures?


MAD Pronunciation
1. My favorite hobby is taking pictures. 6. My family is going to be on vacation in June.
2. Do you want to sightsee today? 7. We need to follow him to the campsite.
3. Do you have the camera? 8. What is the name of the campground?
4. This is a tall mountain to climb. 9. Would you like to have a picnic?
5. We are going to barbecue tonight. 10. My little brother loves to ride his bike.
MAD Letter Jumble
1. the picture 2. the bicycle 3. to go camping 4. to go fishing
5. the beach 6. to take a trip 7. the campsite 8. to pack
3-4 SECTION 1
1
3
VOCABULARY
ACTIVITIES
Complete the story with the missing vocabulary words that are provided for you in the word
bank.
tent to take a trip campsite to ride

pictures to go camping to have a picnic on a hike
My friends and I want [to go camping] this weekend. We love to be outside! I know the perfect
[campsite] for our [tent]. My friends and I love to do a variety of outdoor activities. Ryan and
David like [to ride] their bikes. Sarah enjoys going [on a hike] to take [pictures]. At night, we like
[to have a picnic]. It is really fun to eat underneath the stars. For us, camping is a great way
[to take a trip] because it does not cost a lot of money.

MAD Image Match
Listen to each person describe an activity that they enjoy doing. Then, match the description
with the image.
1. to go camping 2. to barbecue
3. to take pictures 4. to take a trip to the beach
5. to climb a mountain 6. to hike
SECTION 1 3-5
1
3
VOCABULARY
ACTIVITIES
MAD Image Match
7. to ride a bike 8. to fish
9. to ski 10. to swim

Listen to the questions and then say your answers in complete sentences.
1. Would you like to go camping in the summer or fall?
2. Do you prefer to go on a hike or ride a bike?
3. What do you like to take pictures of?
4. Do you like to go to the beach?
5. Where do you enjoy taking vacations?
CULTURAL NOTE
Roasting Mashmallows
One of Americans’ favorite ways to travel is to go camping. A common food and cultural activity
at a campsite is to roast marshmallows. We place a marshmallow (a soft, chewy treat made with
sugar and gelatin) on a stick and hold it over a fire until it is browned. As if that isn’t delicious
enough, you can roast a marshmallow and make a tasty treat called a S’more. It stands for “some”
more. You make a s’more by putting a warm roasted marshmallow between two graham crackers.
You have to add a piece of chocolate in between the graham crackers as well. We like this activity
because it involves a delicious treat and spending time together around a campfire.
3-6 SECTION 1
1
3
GRAMMAR
PAST SIMPLE TENSE OF THE VERB TO BE
The past simple tense is used to talk about completed events in the past.
In the past simple tense, the verb to be has two forms: was and were.
I, he, she, it was

you, we, they were

subject + was/were + other information
I was happy.
They were at the beach.
To make a negative statement with the verb to be the word not is placed after was or were.

subject + was/were + not + other information
I was not happy.
They were not at the beach.
*You are able to create a contraction for was not and were not:
For example: I wasn’t happy. They weren’t at the beach.

MAD Multiple Choice
Complete the sentence with was or were.
1. Sam and his friends _____ at the beach yesterday. A. was B. were
2. I _____ sad because I was unable to go camping this spring. A. was B. were
3. My family and I _____ at a campground all weekend. A. was B. were
4. You _____ warm in the sleeping bag. A. was B. were
5. Susan _____ happy to take pictures during the trip. A. was B. were
6. The bike didn’t cost a lot. It _____ cheap! A. was B. were
7. The pictures _____ beautiful! A. was B. were
8. Susan _____ on vacation with her family. A. was B. were
SECTION 1 3-7
1
3
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
Fill in the blanks with either was or were for blanks 1-5 and wasn’t or weren’t for blanks
6-10.
1. you [were] 6. Olivia [wasn’t]
2. Ethan and I [were] 7. you and Charlie [weren’t]
3. I [was] 8. Becky and Alex [weren’t]
4. Molly [was] 9. I [wasn’t]
5. Sam and Rachel [were] 10. Matt [wasn’t]

Type the statement that you hear. *Be careful with capitalization, spelling, and punctuation.
1. [She wasn’t on vacation for two weeks.]
2. [My mom was happy on her birthday.]
3. [My family and I weren’t at the campground all weekend.]
4. [The pictures of the beach were pretty.]
5. [That hike wasn’t difficult.]
6. [The tent was easy to find.]
7. [Our picnic was on top of a mountain.]
8. [The campfire was hot.]
9. [His sleeping bag was in the tent.]
10. [That campsite was my favorite.]

Listen to the subject and then say wasn’t or weren’t according to who the subject is.
For example: You hear: I You say: wasn’t
1. Mark wasn’t 5. Emma and I weren’t
2. Peter and Owen weren’t 6. I wasn’t
3. you weren’t 7. Travis wasn’t
4. Jennifer wasn’t 8. you and Molly weren’t
3-8 SECTION 1
1
3
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
MAD Open Recording
Complete these sentence starters. Fill in the first blank with was or were and fill in the
second blank with true information.
1. When I was a child, my favorite foods were ________________.
2. My breakfast this morning was ________________.
3. When I was a child, my best friends were ________________.
4. The weather yesterday was ________________.
5. My great-grandparents’ names were ________________.
6. The last movie I saw was ________________.
7. My last vacation was to ________________.

QUESTIONS WITH THE PAST SIMPLE TENSE OF THE VERB TO BE
To form a question with was or were, you need to start the question with was or were.
The subject (noun or pronoun) follows the word was or were.
Question Order:
Was/Were + subject + other information
Was the vacation expensive?
Were they on vacation?
To answer a question with the past simple tense of to be:

First, decide if the question is a yes/no question or an open question.
If it is a yes/no question, then answer as follows:
Question Full Answer Short Answer
Wasn’t she at the Yes, she was at the campground. Yes, she was.
campground? No, she was not (wasn’t) at the campground. No, she was not (wasn’t).
If it is an open question, then answer as follows:
Question Answer
How much was the bicycle? It was fifty dollars.
SECTION 1 3-9
1
3
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
MAD Word Jumble
Put the questions in the correct word order.
1. Were you on vacation last month? 5. Where was the campsite?
2. How was the bike ride? 6. Were you going sightseeing this afternoon?
3. Were the pictures beautiful? 7. Was she on a hike?
4. Was the tent big enough for 8. What was the weather like?
everyone?

MAD Text Match
Select the best ending to each question.
1. How long were you on vacation? 6. How many people were with you?
2. Where was the start of the trail? 7. Where were you fishing?
3. Was he on vacation for one or two weeks? 8. What do you like to barbecue?
4. What was your favorite vacation? 9. Which mountain was she on in Alaska?
5. Where were you and your family? 10. Was the trail long or short?

Type the question that led to the response.
1. [How many people were in the tent?]
There were four people in the tent.
2. [Was the food in the backpack?]
Yes, the food was in the backpack.
3. [How long was the camping trip?]
The camping trip was three days.
4. [What was her hobby?]
Her hobby was taking pictures of the outdoors.
5. [Were they tired after fishing all afternoon?]
Yes, they were tired after fishing all afternoon.
6. [Were you going to ride your bike to the campground?]
Yes, I was going to ride my bike to the campground.
3-10 SECTION 1
1
3
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
Use the information in parenthesis to answer each question in a complete sentence.
1. How long was the hike? (one hour)
2. Were they on vacation last week? (No; at home)
3. Was it hot at the beach? (Yes; 85 degrees)
4. What was your favorite hobby as a child? (taking pictures)
5. Was the campground big? (No; small)
6. Was there a campfire at your campsite? (Yes)
Possible Answers:
1. The hike was one hour.
2. No, they were at home.
3. Yes, it was eighty-five degrees.
4. My favorite hobby was taking pictures.
5. No, it was small.
6. Yes, there was a campfire.
CULTURAL NOTE
How to plan your trip
With so many places to visit, it can feel overwhelming to plan a trip. There are several ways to
research places you want to visit. Many cities have websites, apps, TV shows and social media
pages which show the popular tourist destinations. Or, you can search for places using the
internet. Use a phrase such as, “best campsites in Florida” or “plan a weekend in Florida” to find
information. You can explore locally, too. Some cities have visitor centers with staff who can
answer questions and make recommendations of what activities to do.
SECTION 1 3-11
1
3
CONVERSATION
ACTIVITIES
ACTIVITY 3.1.17 - SPEAK: Complete the sentences!
First, decide who will be Student A and who will be Student B.

Next, fill in the blanks with was or were if it shows (yes) to complete the sentences. Fill in the
blanks with wasn’t or weren’t if it shows (no). (Check your answers with someone else who
has the same worksheet.)
Then, Student A will read his/her sentences in order for Student B to complete his/her
worksheet.
For example: Student A says: “I blank outside today.” (no)
Student B says: “I wasn’t outside today.”
Student A will then let Student B know if he/she completed the sentence correctly. If it
isn’t correct, ask Student B to try again, so that he/she says the correct complete sentence.
After Student A reads all 8 statements, Student B will read all of his/her 8 statements in the
same manner as Student A did.
STUDENT A WORKSHEET
1. You weren’t at the campsite yesterday. (no) 5. My family and I were on vacation. (yes)
2. It was 8:00 in the evening. (yes) 6. My camera was broken. (yes)
3. The pictures were beautiful. (yes) 7. The tents weren’t very big. (no)
4. The campground wasn’t on the beach. (no) 8. His hobby wasn’t to go fishing. (no)
STUDENT B WORKSHEET
1. The food was for the barbecue. (yes) 5. The outdoors were quiet at night. (yes)
2. My friends and I weren’t at the beach for 6. The hike wasn’t too difficult. (no)
a picnic. (no) 7. The mountains weren’t very tall. (no)
3. His favorite activity as a child was to ride 8. Her hobby was to take pictures. (yes)
his bike. (yes)
4. The bicycles weren’t too small for them. (no)
3-12 SECTION 1
1
3
CONVERSATION
ACTIVITIES
ACTIVITY 3.1.18 - SPEAK: Find a classmate!
Speak with classmates to find out who does each activity. Write their names on the chart.
Then, ask them a question to learn more about that topic.
A2 Resources Google Doc Folder or download the A2StudentWorksheet.pdf.
For example: You ask a classmate: “Do you go fishing?“

He/she answers: “No, I don’t.“
So, you ask another question: “Do you like to sleep in a tent?“
He/she answers: “Yes, I love to sleep in a tent!”
Find a classmate who... Classmate’s Name More Information
takes a trip in the summer
goes on a hike
has a hobby
likes to take pictures
goes camping
rides a bike to school
wants to climb a mountain

MAD Open Recording
Use the information from the chart to share who does each activity.
For example: You say: “Sarah takes a trip in the summer. She goes with her family for two
weeks to visit her grandma.”
SECTION 1 3-13
1
3
READING
LET’S GO CAMPING!
Jackie and her family were on vacation, and they hiked the trails through the Appalachian Mountains.
She wants to tell you about the rules for hiking and her trip.
1. Plan your trip.
We decided to go hiking and camping in the Appalachian Mountains. We looked at the dates we wanted
to camp. We used the online registration to see which campsites were open on those days. We planned
to stay for 5 days.
2. Protect the outdoors.
When we were picnicking, we did not leave any food or garbage in the woods. We walked on the trails
and did not take anything. Also, we were careful to not make big fires or bother the animals.
3. Plan where you are going to stay.
The campgrounds were very big and there were a lot of people there! We were happy we had two tents:
one for me and my brother and one for my mom and dad.
4. Pack a bag with important items
We were sure to pack a map, water, food, tents, a first aid kit, and a camera. I like to take pictures on
vacation. I was excited when I looked at all of my pictures of my family and the Appalachian Mountains
after we were home. It was the best vacation!

MAD Category Match
Place the rules in the appropriate category based on the reading.
Rule 1 Rule 2 Rule 3 Rule 4

pack important items like
decide where to go clean up your garbage stay at a campground
water and food
many people camp at

register online make small fires take pictures of your trip
campgrounds
have enough tents for share pictures with your

5 day trip do not take flowers
your group family and friends

MAD Open Recording
Imagine you are planning a hiking trip. Explain how you can follow the four rules below that
Jackie and her family followed during their trip.
1. Plan your trip. 2. Protect the outdoors.
3. Plan where you are going to stay. 4. Pack a bag with important items.
3-14 SECTION 1
1
3
VOCABULARY
TRAVEL

MAD Open Recording

SECTION 2 3-15
1
3
VOCABULARY
ACTIVITIES
MAD Pronunciation
1. We have to go through security. 6. From which airport are you departing?
2. Is the plane leaving on time? 7. Do you enjoy flying?
3. Who are you going to visit? 8. How much does a one-way ticket cost?
4. The flight lasted five and a half hours. 9. Is our gate far?
5. Could I please see your driver’s license? 10. I prefer a window seat.

MAD Letter Jumble
1. the airplane 2. identification 3. boarding pass 4. the arrival
5. delayed 6. the passport 7. the suitcase 8. to depart

MAD Image Match
Match each vocabulary word with the correct image.
1. the airplane 7. to arrive
2. the driver’s license 8. to be late
3. the gate 9. the airport
4. to go through security 10. the seat
5. the suitcase 11. to take off
6. the world 12. to stop
3-16 SECTION 2
1
3
VOCABULARY
ACTIVITIES
MAD Multiple Choice
Choose the vocabulary word that best completes each sentence.
1. When you go through customs, you need to show __________.
A. an airport B. your suitcase C. your passport
2. Our flight leaves at 1:20 p.m. We need to get to the airport two hours __________.
A. late B. early C. on time
3. We need a __________ to board the plane.
A. boarding pass B. suitcase C. world
4. When the flight can’t leave on time, the flight is __________.
A. arrived B. departed C. delayed
5. When a person plans to travel to and from the same city, they buy a __________.
A. one-way ticket B. seat C. round-trip ticket
6. Do you want __________ with me on vacation?
A. to come B. to visit C. to arrive
7. Do you prefer a window or an aisle __________?
A. world B. seat C. trip
8. My grandparents are __________ to Florida to visit my family for the holidays.
A. traveling B. visiting C. to travel
9. The destination is not too __________.
A. flight B. far C. ticket
10. How many __________ do you usually pack for a long trip?
A. flights B. seats C. suitcases
11. You sit and wait at the __________ before you board the plane.
A. gate B. arrival C. security
12. You can see the time of your __________ on your boarding pass.
A. check-in B. seats C. departure
SECTION 2 3-17
1
3
VOCABULARY
ACTIVITIES
MAD Sentence Jumble
Misty is trying to plan a vacation. She doesn’t know the correct order and is having a
difficult time planning the vacation. Help her know which order is best to plan her
vacation.
First, I have to look at my calendar and decide when I want to travel.
Next, I have to decide the country, state or city that I would like to visit.
After that, I need to find a round-trip flight.
Then, I have to reserve my seats on the flight.
A week or a couple days before, I need to start packing.
On the day I travel, I need to arrive early at the airport.
I need to check-in and show my I.D.
Then, I get my boarding pass and need to go through security.
After security, I follow the signs to find my gate for departure.
Lastly, I board the plane and can’t wait to take off!
CULTURAL NOTE
Your suitcase at the airport
In the United States, there are several things to consider involving your suitcase when you
get to the airport. Some airlines allow you to check one bag and have one carry-on (a smaller
item or suitcase piece with you on the plane). Other airlines charge for each piece of luggage.
Remember to contact your airline to find these rules and weigh your suitcase ahead of time
to avoid extra fees. After you land, you go to the baggage claim area to get your suitcase.
We recommend having a suitcase tag and unique feature (a strap or ribbon) to easily find
your suitcase.
3-18 SECTION 2
1
3
GRAMMAR
PAST SIMPLE TENSE (REGULAR VERBS)
The past simple tense is used to talk about completed events in the past.
The past simple tense for all subjects is formed by taking the verb and adding -ed or -d to the end
of it.
If a verb ends in a vowel, you add -d.

For example: arrive → arrived barbecue → barbecued use → used
If a verb ends in a consonant, you add -ed.

For example: delay → delayed depart → departed travel → traveled
Statement Order:
subject + past tense verb + other information
I camped with my family.
They traveled to the beach.
He arrived in Spain yesterday.
Additional Rules Examples

If a verb ends in a consonant + y, change the -y to -i and then to dry → dried
add -ed. to try → tried
Exception: if the verb ends in vowel + y, just add -ed. to delay → delayed
to stay → stayed
If the verb is a one-syllable verb that ends in consonant + to shop → shopped
vowel + consonant, you must double the final consonant. to star → starred
Exception: if the verb ends in -w, -x, or -y, do not double the to snow → snowed
letters, just add -ed. to play → played
If the verb is a two-syllable verb that ends in consonant +

to occur → occurred
vowel + consonant with the stress on the second syllable,
to permit → permitted
then you double the final consonant.
to happen → happened
Exception: if the verb has the stress on the first syllable, just
to listen → listened
add -ed.
SECTION 2 3-19
ACTIVITIES
MAD Multiple Choice
Choose the correct past simple conjugation of each infinitive verb.
1. to travel
A. you travel B. you traveld C. you traveled
2. to arrive
A. Andy and I arriveded B. Andy and I arrived C. Andy and I arrive
3. to play
A. I played B. I playyed C. I play
4. to climb
A. Joe and Aaron climb B. Joe and Aaron climbbed C. Joe and Aaron climbed
5. to visit
A. Anna visits B. Anna visitted C. Anna visited
6. to clear
A. Peter and Kelly cleard B. Peter and Kelly cleared C. Peter and Kelly clear
7. to live
A. I live B. I lived C. I liveed
8. to pack
A. Sally packed B. Sally packked C. Sally packs
9. to serve
A. the waiter serves B. the waiter serveded C. the waiter served
10. to water
A. my mom watered B. my mom waters C. my mom waterred

Change the verb from the present simple tense to the past simple tense.
For example: You see: you make You type: [you made]
1. the clothes dry [the clothes dried] 6. it delays [it delayed]
2. they start [they started] 7. my dad mows [my dad mowed]
3. we try [we tried] 8. the plane stops [the plane stopped]
4. Mark cooks [Mark cooked] 9. my family follows [my family followed]
5. Sarah and I taste [Sarah and I tasted] 10. I arrive [I arrived]
3-20 SECTION 2
1
3
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
MAD Text Match
Listen to the sentences. Match the sentences that are related.
Sarah: It snowed, and our flight departed Our flight was delayed.
two hours later.
Haley: The weather was hot in Mexico. I packed shorts, T-shirts and sandals.
Jackson: In the airport I stopped at customs. I showed my passport.
Derek: I was in Kansas City for only one night. I packed a small suitcase.
Maggie: I don’t like flying unless I can see outside. I needed a window seat.
Mike: I planned a trip to Spain, then Italy and I needed a one-way ticket to Spain.
then back home.

Listen to Mark’s story as he describes his family’s recent trip. Fill in the blanks with the
missing vocabulary words. The blanks may have more than one word.
My family and I went to Florida [to visit] our relatives. First, we bought [round-trip] tickets.
We [departed] from Los Angeles, California and [arrived] in Miami, Florida. Our [airplane]
had [to stop] in Denver, Colorado before we continued to Miami. Thankfully [the flight] was
not [delayed], and we left [on time]. It [was] a long day, but I love [to fly]. I also love
[to travel] because I am able to see [the world]. Next year our family is going to take a
[trip] to another country. I am so [excited]!

MAD Open Recording
Look at the pictures and say what each person did on vacation. Use the subject and verb
given to create a complete sentence.
Possible Answers:
1. John and Morgan arrived at the airport. 5. Jake followed the trail.
2. My dad barbecued. 6. Corrie climbed a mountain.
3. The plane departed on time. 7. My family and I packed our suitcases.
4. My family used a tent at our campsite. 8. I preferred a window seat.
SECTION 2 3-21
PAST SIMPLE TENSE IN THE NEGATIVE
To make a statement negative in the past simple tense, you must put did not (didn’t) before the
base verb. The base verb will not include -ed because you are using the word did.
For example: The family wanted to go camping → The family did not want to go camping.
Affirmative Statement Negative Statement

We arrived at the beach yesterday. We did not arrive at the beach yesterday.
The plane stopped in Ireland last night. The plane did not stop in Ireland last night.
I climbed the mountain one year ago. I didn’t climb the mountain one year ago.
Some common time expressions that are used with the past simple tense include yesterday,
last _____ (night, week, month), the day before yesterday, and ______ ago (one year ago, 5 days ago).
These time expressions can be placed at the beginning or end of the sentence.

Negate these sentences. Do not use contractions for this section. Be careful with capitalization
and punctuation.
For example: You see: I stayed at the campground.
You type: [I did not stay at the campground.]
1. The weather delayed the flight. [The weather did not delay the flight.]
2. Jeff and Sam wanted to travel the world. [Jeff and Sam did not want to travel the world.]
3. We followed the trail on our hike. [We did not follow the trail on our hike.]
4. My family and I arrived at the airport. [My family and I did not arrive at the airport.]
5. The plane departed on time. [The plane did not depart on time.]
6. Allison packed for the trip. [Allison did not pack for the trip.]
7. He asked to see my identification. [He did not ask to see my identification.]
8. I needed to order a passport. [I did not need to order a passport.]
3-22 SECTION 2
1
3
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
MAD Multiple Choice
Listen to people describe what they did on vacation. Then, choose the answer that says what
they did NOT do.
1. My name is Stacy. On vacation I played volleyball on the beach and barbecued at night.
A. did not play a sport B. did not cook outside C. did not go swimming
2. My name is Thomas. I traveled to Arizona in an airplane and hiked the many beautiful trails.
A. did not travel in a plane B. did not ride a bike C. did not go on a hike
3. My name is Frank. I camped with my family and I learned how to fish.
A. did not go to the beach B. did not go camping C. did not go fishing
4. My name is Laura. My flight was delayed and we stayed at the airport for another two hours.
A. did not leave on time B. did not leave late C. did not stay at airport
5. My name is Justin. I traveled by plane and had a window seat.
A. did not fly B. did not travel by boat C. did not sit in the aisle seat
6. My name is Nicole. I visited another country and showed my passport to go through customs.
A. did not go through customs B. did not fly C. did not travel outside the country

Listen to each sentence. Then, type the affirmative or negative verb in the blank.
1. My brother [didn’t want] to go on a hike.
2. I [shopped] for a new suitcase.
3. My grandparents [visited] my family for a week.
4. Last year my family [didn’t go] on vacation.
5. It [was] too expensive.
6. He [answered] questions at customs.
7. My sister [didn’t buy] a one-way ticket.
8. Natalie [didn’t find] her camera.
9. Megan [didn’t pack] enough clothing for the trip.
10. We [barbecued] on the beach.
SECTION 2 3-23
ACTIVITIES
MAD Text Match
Look at today’s date on Michelle’s calendar. Then, match the time expression with what
she did on that day.
JULY
Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Pack for Camp with
camping trip friends
8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Pick up
grandparents
from airport
15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Barbecue with Hike with
TODAY
family Lindsey
22 23 24 25 26 27 28
On vacation On vacation On vacation On vacation On vacation On vacation
29 30 31
On vacation On vacation
1. Two weeks ago Michelle packed for the camping trip.

2. Ten days ago she camped with friends.
3. Yesterday she hiked with Lindsey.
4. Six days ago she picked up her grandparents from the airport.
5. The day before yesterday Michelle barbecued with her family.
6. Next week she is going on vacation.
3-24 SECTION 2
1
3
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
MAD Open Recording
Use the subject, verb and expression of time to say a negative sentence.
*For 1-3, use the contraction. For 4-6, do not use the contraction.
For example: You see: I / to not climb the mountain / yesterday
(For 1-3) You type: I didn’t climb the mountain yesterday.
(For 4-6) You type: I did not climb the mountain yesterday.
1. Tyler / to not fly to Florida / last summer
Tyler didn’t fly to Florida last summer.
2. Peter and Kelly / to not board the plane / the day before yesterday
Peter and Kelly didn’t board the plane the day before yesterday.
3. My friend and I / to not go sightseeing / yesterday
My friend and I didn’t go sightseeing yesterday.
4. Megan / to not ride on the boat / one week ago
Megan did not ride on the boat one week ago.
5. You / to not barbecue with us / last weekend
You did not barbecue with us last weekend.
6. I / to not have my new driver’s license / nine days ago
I did not have my new driver’s license nine days ago.
SECTION 2 3-25
QUESTIONS WITH THE PAST SIMPLE TENSE
In order to create a question with a past tense verb, you need to start the question with did.
It is then followed by the subject, the base form of the verb and ends with the other information.
Question Order:
Did + subject + base form of verb + other information
Did you go through security?
Did they buy round-trip tickets?
To answer a question with the past simple tense:

First, decide if the question is a yes/no question or an open question.
If it is a yes/no question, then answer as follows:
Did she pack her Yes, she packed her suitcase. Yes, she did.
suitcase? No, she did not (didn’t) pack her suitcase. No, she did not (didn’t).
If it is an open-ended question, then answer as follows:
Question Answer
What did you do yesterday? I visited my aunt.
When were you on vacation? I was on vacation last week.

MAD Word Jumble
Put the questions in the correct word order.
1. Did you pack your suitcase?
2. What did you and your family do on vacation?
3. Did Sarah go on a hike?
4. Did they travel to an island?
5. What time did your flight arrive?
6. Did you go camping?
7. Did they go through security?
8. With whom did you travel?
3-26 SECTION 2
1
3
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
MAD Text Match
Match each answer with the correct question based on the pictures.
1. What did Nick and Jackie do? They fished in the lake for two hours.
2. What did Ron do? He packed his suitcase.
3. What did Jake and Aubrey do? They followed signs to customs.
4. What did Ann do? She climbed the tallest mountain.
5. What did you do? My dog and I walked on the beach.
6. What did the plane do? The plane departed the airport.

MAD Category Match
Listen to the people describe their vacations. Put the verbs under the person that did
those activities.
Carey: Hi, Andrea. Hi, Jill. So happy to see you after break. When did you get home, Andrea?
Andrea: We arrived yesterday evening.
Carey: What about you, Jill?
Jill: We arrived the day before yesterday.
Carey: What did you do on vacation, Andrea?
Andrea: I did a lot. We were in Florida for two weeks! It was so fun.
Jill: I had a lot of fun too, but I was in Montana instead. It was cold and snowy, much different
than a Florida vacation! What did you do, Carey?
Carey: I didn’t go on vacation. However, I went ice skating and shopping. Oh, and I went out to
eat at a restaurant one day, too. Did you go out to eat at all, Jill?
Jill: No, we didn’t. My grandma lives in Montana, so we did a lot of home cooked meals with the
family instead of going to restaurants.
Andrea: We did eat at different restaurants every day. It was way too much food. Happy to be
home and able to cook my own food again.
SECTION 2 3-27
ACTIVITIES
MAD Category Match
Carey: Did you go sightseeing in Florida, Andrea?
Andrea: Yes, of course. There were lots of things to see there. We were at a few theme parks
like Disney World and Animal Kingdom. Did you go sightseeing, Jill?
Jill: No, we did not sightsee this time. We skied and snowboarded. The snow and weather
were perfect. I can’t wait to show you the pictures! The mountains with the sun and snow were
beautiful.
Carey: Did you take any pictures, Andrea?
Andrea: No, our camera was at home on the kitchen table. My dad did not pack it. My mom
was sad!
Carey: Okay, talk to you guys later. Have to get to class now. See you at lunch!
Carey Andrea Jill

didn’t travel was in Florida was in Montana
ice skated went sightseeing skied and snowboarded
shopped didn’t pack camera photographed the trip
1 restaurant restaurants every day home cooked meals

MAD Sentence Jumble
You asked your friend what he did the past couple of months on summer vacation.
His text messages got mixed up. Put the events in the appropriate order. The event
furthest in the past is the event you put first in the list.
Last month, I was in Oregon. I hiked a lot and visited my friend.
We stayed in Oregon for two weeks.
From Oregon, we traveled to California.
The day before yesterday, we departed California to come home.
This morning, we arrived home from vacation.
This afternoon, I unpacked my suitcase.
Later this evening, I am going out to eat with friends.
3-28 SECTION 2
1
3
CONVERSATION
ACTIVITIES
ACTIVITY 3.2.22 - SPEAK: What did you do...?
Ask two different classmates questions to find out what he/she did last night, yesterday
morning, yesterday afternoon, the day before yesterday and last weekend. Write down what
your partner says.
recorder at the beginning of this activity and hit record. You will have to save and then do
another recording when they talk to the second partner. *You can decide if you want to collect
the worksheet or have the students share the answers in the MAD as an Open Recording.
WORKSHEET
What did you do... Partner 1 Partner 2
last night?
yesterday morning?
yesterday afternoon?
the day before yesterday?
last weekend?
ACTIVITY 3.2.23 - SPEAK: In an Airport

Look at this infographic of an airport.
Discuss the different parts of the airport and what
people do in each area of the airport. Each person
needs to say 1 or 2 sentences about each area.
TEACHER NOTE: If you want to be able to listen to

these conversations later, launch the recorder at
the beginning of this activity and hit record. Print
the worksheet from the A2 Resources Google Doc
Folder or download the A2StudentWorksheet.pdf.
SECTION 2 3-29
31
READING
BOARDING PASS

MAD Multiple Choice
Read the boarding pass and decide if each statement is true or false.
1. Pierre traveled with American Airlines. A. True B. False
2. The flight number of Pierre’s plane was B 29. A. True B. False
3. Pierre departed from Paris, France at the JFK International Airport. A. True B. False
4. Mr. Fromage purchased a one-way ticket. A. True B. False
5. Pierre traveled to New York and arrived at JFK International Airport. A. True B. False
6. He carried two pieces of luggage on the plane. A. True B. False
7. Mr. Fromage’s seat was 19C. A. True B. False

MAD Open Recording
Describe a time when you traveled by plane. Use the questions below to guide your
response.
1. When was a time you traveled by airplane?
2. Which airport did you depart from and where did you arrive?
3. Was your ticket round-trip or one-way?
4. What was the airport like?
5. How was the flight?
3-30 SECTION 2
1
3
VOCABULARY
THE NATURAL WORLD

MAD Open Recording


MAD Pronunciation
1. The island is not that big. 6. Look how bright the moon is tonight!
2. We hiked up that small hill. 7. This forest has many tall trees.
3. The desert is hot and dry. 8. The ocean is calm today.
4. Russia is the largest country in the world. 9. There are a lot of stars in the sky.
5. The field is full of beautiful flowers. 10. The biggest lakes in the United States are
called the Great Lakes.
SECTION 3 3-31
1
3
VOCABULARY
ACTIVITIES
MAD Letter Jumble
1. the countryside 2. the flower 3. the mountain 4. the island
5. the grass 6. the sky 7. the sea 8. the fire

MAD Image Match
Match each vocabulary word with the correct image.
1. the star 6. the moon
2. the fire 7. the field
3. the flower 8. the hill
4. the ocean 9. the river
5. the ice 10. the desert

MAD Multiple Choice
Choose the vocabulary word that best answers each question. Which of the following...
1. does NOT grow? A. the tree B. the grass C. the flower D. the star
2. is NOT in the sky? A. the moon B. the river C. the sun D. the star
3. is NOT a body of water? A. the lake B. the ocean C. the desert D. the river
4. does NOT have trees? A. the ocean B. the island C. the forest D. the field
5. is NOT hot? A. the sun B. the beach C. the ice D. the desert
6. is NOT in the night’s sky? A. the sun B. the moon C. the star D. the cloud
7. is NOT on an island? A. the tree B. the cloud C. the beach D. the grass
8. is NOT in the countryside? A. the grass B. the field C. the hill D. the city
3-32 SECTION 3
1
3
VOCABULARY
ACTIVITIES
MAD Multiple Choice
Listen to each description and choose the correct vocabulary word that it is describing.
1. This is very tall, and you are able to climb it. The view from the top is absolutely beautiful!
A. the forest B. the ocean C. the island D. the mountain
2. You are able to see this at night. It is round and lights up the sky.
A. the hill B. the moon C. the air D. the sun
3. This grows on the ground. It is green, and you have to mow it.
A. the desert B. the countryside C. the grass D. the tree
4. These grow in fields. You can also plant these. There are many different kinds of these that
come in many different colors.
A. flowers B. stars C. grass D. desert
5. Many animals live here. There are many trees and flowers that grow here.
A. the ice B. the forest C. the moon D. the sky
6. There are lots of these in the night sky. You can see them shine brightly when the sky is clear.
A. the sun B. the moon C. the stars D. the air
7. Covered in grass, flowers and trees, these things are smaller than mountains, but can also be
fun to climb.
A. the forest B. the hills C. the trees D. the mountains
8. Full of grass and flowers, this is a fun place to run and play.
A. the forest B. the field C. the trees D. the desert
SECTION 3 3-33
1
3
VOCABULARY
ACTIVITIES
MAD Open Recording
Look at this picture. Pretend you went on vacation here. Describe what the weather was
like, what you wore, and two activities that you did there.
CULTURAL NOTE
The Great Lakes
The Great Lakes are a series of freshwater
lakes located in eastern North America.
Their names are: Huron, Ontario,
Michigan, Erie and Superior. In fact, they
contain the largest supply of freshwater
on Earth. They are a popular spot for
boating, fishing, and other activities.

Class activity
3-34 SECTION 3
1
3
GRAMMAR
IRREGULAR VERBS
Some verbs have spelling changes in the past simple tense. Below is a list of present tense verbs and
their spelling changes in the past tense.
PRESENT PAST
bring brought
come came
find found
fly flew
go went
have had
leave left
ride rode
see saw
swim swam
take took
think thought
Statement Order: Subject + verb + other information

I went to the Eiffel Tower in Paris.
They flew in an airplane.
We had three suitcases.

MAD Multiple Choice
Choose the present simple or the past simple conjugation to complete each sentence.
Look for clue words with time to indicate the past simple.
1. We __________ to Miami, Florida last summer to visit my grandparents. A. fly B. flew
2. My little sister __________ her bike when we go for a walk. A. rides B. rode
3. My friend __________ a trip to Hawaii two weeks ago. A. takes B. took
4. The sky was so clear last night. I __________ so many stars! A. see B. saw
5. I __________ a new sleeping bag for our camping trip next week. A. have B. had
6. She __________ that the trail is difficult to hike. A. thinks B. thought
7. My family __________ last weekend for vacation. A. leaves B. left
8. When I hike, I __________ lots of different animals in the forest. A. find B. found
9. My friend __________ through customs last summer at the airport. A. goes B. went
10. We __________ a picnic lunch to the beach the day before yesterday. A. bring B. brought
SECTION 3 3-35
1
3
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
MAD Sentence Jumble
Put the events in the correct order.
Last summer, my family and I went camping.
Before we drove, we had to pack the car.
After we packed up, we rode in the car for 3 hours.
When we arrived at our campsite, we unpacked the car.
First, we took out the tent to set it up.
After our campsite was ready, we went fishing at the lake.
We brought four fish back to our campsite for dinner.
We cooked them over the campfire.
After dinner, we went for a hike in the forest.
We saw lots of animals and flowers.
Before going to bed, we looked up at the stars and the moon.
It was the perfect ending to our day.

Look at each verb in the present simple. Then, fill in the blank following each sentence
with the verb in the past simple. *Be careful with whether the verb is affirmative or negative.
For example: My family rides in the car for three hours to the campsite. [rode]
1. My friend comes with us on vacation. [came]
2. I don’t bring a lot of clothes on the camping trip. [didn’t bring]
3. They take pictures of the island. [took]
4. We see many stars in the night sky. [saw]
5. I don’t need to mow the grass every week. [didn’t need]
6. During our hike we swim in a calm river. [swam]
7. The plane flies high in the sky. [flew]
8. He doesn’t go to the ocean to swim. [didn’t go]
9. We ride our bikes on a trail through a field. [rode]
10. Aunt Julia doesn’t come with us on a hike. [didn’t come]

Type at least one sentence describing each numbered vocabulary
word in the picture. Use any of these verbs in the past simple
tense: come, find, go, have, leave, ride, see, swim, take, think.
3-36 SECTION 3
1
3
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
MAD Open Recording
Tell a story about your last vacation. Include the answers to the following questions:
1. Where did you travel on your last vacation?
2. Who went with you?
3. What did you do on your trip?
4. What was your favorite part of your trip?
5. Why was it your favorite part?

IRREGULAR VERBS
Some verbs have spelling changes in the past simple tense. Below is a list of additional present tense
verbs and their past tense spelling changes.
PRESENT PAST
buy bought
drink drank
get got
give gave
keep kept
make made
meet met
run ran
say said
sleep slept
spend spent
write wrote
Exception:
Some words you do not add -ed OR change spelling. They stay the same in the present and past tense.
cost → cost put → put read → read (Pronunciation may change.)
Statement Order: Subject + verb + other information
I bought a round-trip ticket.
They spent money on a vacation.
The hotel cost 60 dollars.
SECTION 3 3-37
1
3
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
Rewrite each sentence changing the present simple verb to the past simple. Be careful
with capitalization and punctuation.
1. I write a packing list. [I wrote a packing list.]
2. I make dinner over the campfire. [I made dinner over the campfire.]
3. We run on the trails in the forest. [We ran on the trails in the forest.]
4. Do you sleep outside or in a tent? [Did you sleep outside or in a tent?]
5. She buys new clothes for vacation. [She bought new clothes for vacation.]
6. Do you drink lots of water in the desert? [Did you drink lots of water in the desert?]

Complete the story using the verbs in the word bank.
made bought put was met

left drank went swam spent
was got slept bought went
Last summer my family and I [went] camping. Before we left we [bought] a new tent
because our other one [was] really old. We [spent] $150 on the new tent. We [left] for our
campsite on Friday and [met] my grandparents there. My dad and I [put] up the tent and my
grandparents [went] to the store. They [bought] food for dinner and items to make S’mores.
We [got] wood to make a campfire and [made] a fire to cook our food. We [drank] soda
with our dinner, and everyone enjoyed the meal. After supper, we [swam] in the lake. The
water was warm and calm. My brother and I decided to put our sleeping bags outside of the
tent. We [slept] under the stars. It [was] a beautiful, clear night.
3-38 SECTION 3
1
3
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
MAD Multiple Choice
Look at the picture as the student talks about her vacation. Decide if what she said is true or
false based on the picture.
1. We brought our boat and had it on the beach at night.
A. True B. False
2. I rode my bike every day.
A. True B. False
3. We had a campsite near the mountains.
A. True B. False
4. We camped with our friends and had four tents in total.
A. True B. False
5. The sun was so bright in the sky.
A. True B. False
6. Our campsite was in a big field with no trees.
A. True B. False
7. There were no stars in the sky because it was too cloudy.
A. True B. False
8. We made many campfires to stay warm at night.
A. True B. False

Look at the two vocabulary words and type a sentence using both words to describe what you
and your family did during a camping trip.
For example: You read: to put up / tent You type: My dad put up the tent.
1. to go / campsite
2. to buy / food
3. to sleep / stars
4. to run / trail
5. to bring / sleeping bag
6. to make / campfire
7. to spend / four days
8. to meet / friends
SECTION 3 3-39
1
3
CONVERSATION
ACTIVITIES
ACTIVITY 3.3.18 - SPEAK: Travel Agent
You and your partner will take turns being the customer or the travel agent. When Partner A
is the travel agent, he/she asks Partner B questions about vacation preferences. Once
Partner A has completed all 3 customer boxes, Partner B then becomes the travel agent.
Once you both have completed all of the boxes, look at the trips offered by the travel agent
and match each customer with the best vacation. There are 4 customers and 6 vacations.
Example: Partner A is the travel agent and Partner B is the example customer.
Partner A: (Acting as travel agent) Hello, can I help you?
Partner B: (Acting as example customer) Yes, I need a vacation!
Partner A: Great. What are some things you like and don’t like to do?
Partner B: I really like sports, taking pictures and cold weather. I don’t like the desert or really
hot weather.
Partner A: Okay. Where did you go on vacation already? (or: Where did you go before?)
Partner B: I went to Alaska and Minnesota already.
Then switch roles. Partners A will be Customer 1 and 3. Partners B will be Customer 2 and 4.
Both Partners A and B write down the information that is missing on the sheet for the
customers. Then, with your partner, use the information and fill in the “Vacation match” box
for each customer at the bottom of the chart. Lastly, write 2-3 reasons about why you picked
that vacation for that customer.
Example Customer 1 Customer 2 Customer 3 Customer 4
Vacation Copper Mountain Napili Beach in Red River Gorge Ludington State The Chicago River
match in Colorado Hawaii Kentucky Park in Michigan in Illinois
- beach - mountains - snow = too cold

- water
- ocean for a - Michigan had - Maui is on ocean
- camping
boat a boat = salt water
- sports - been to other
Why? - already was in - already went to - Mojave = too hot
- cold weather places already
California the other 2 places - Visited michigan
with mountains already
3-40 SECTION 3
ACTIVITIES
Copper Mountain Ludington State Mojave Desert Napili Beach Red River Gorge The Chicago River
Ski Resort Park in Michigan in California in Hawaii in Kentucky in Illinois
in Colorado
ACTIVITY 3.3.19 - SPEAK: Interview

Interview two classmates about their favorite vacation. Write open and closed questions to
ask this classmate about their trip. Take notes as your partner talks because you are going to
tell a story about your partner’s trip.
Questions Partner 1 Partner 2
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
ACTIVITY 3.3.20- SPEAK

MAD Open Recording
Pick one partner and tell about his/her vacation. Use the information your partner shared
and answer all of the questions you asked.
SECTION 3 3-41
1
3
READING
TRAVEL THE WORLD

MAD Multiple Choice
Choose the best answer to each question based on the reading.
1. What is the brochure mainly about?
A. How the group “Experiences Under 30” started.
B. What to pack when you travel to a different country.
C. What places the group traveled and what they did on the trip.
D. Mexico and the Mayan ruins
2. What did people see when they went to Iceland?
A. Blue beaches
B. A mountain called Machu Picchu
C. A lot of ice
D. Green fields and stars
3-42 SECTION 3
1
3
READING
ACTIVITIES
MAD Multiple Choice
3. In which country can you hike a mountain and walk through an old city?
A. Peru
B. Mexico
C. Iceland
D. Mayan
4. Who can travel with the “Experiences Under 30” group?
A. People who are 50
B. People who are 25
C. People who are 33
D. People who are 42
5. What is the present tense of the verb “went”?
A. swim
B. go
C. think
D. are
6. Which trip is best if you like to hike and walk a lot?
A. Mexico
B. Peru
C. Iceland
D. None of the above

MAD Open Recording
After reading the passage about the “Experiences Under 30” group and the places they went,
answer one of the following questions:
1. Have you traveled out of your country before?
A. If no, what other states or cities have you traveled to?
B. If yes, which country/countries did you visit?
2. What are some things you did or saw while you were in those places?
3. Have you ever traveled with a group of people?
SECTION 3 3-43
1
3
LET’S TALK!
VIDEO - LET’S GO ON VACATION!

MAD Viewing
same time.
Grace: My family and I go on a spring break trip every year. This year they said that I could bring
a friend along. Do you want to come with?
Skylar: Seriously? That would be so much fun! My parents don’t like to travel, so I never really
traveled much growing up.
Grace: Where did you go so far?
Skylar: Um, I’ve been to Myrtle Beach in South Carolina, Orlando, and Disney World in Florida.
Grace: We wanted to go to Mexico this year. My parents love the beach.
Skylar: Ugh, that would be amazing! I have never been outside the country before. When would
we leave? Would we- would we fly? How much do I need to bring? I have so many questions!
Grace: We don’t have all the details yet, but we should go online and get some ideas! Uh, my
parents want to pay for your hotel and meals.
3-44 LET’S TALK!

1
3
LET’S TALK!
VIDEO - LET’S GO ON VACATION!
MAD Viewing
Skylar: Oh my gosh! That’s so nice and so generous! So how much is it all gonna* cost? I mean,
I am supposed to be saving up for college, but I’d be happy to use some of that money for this
unforgettable trip.
Grace: Let’s look at how expensive a flight to Playa del Carmen is right now. Do you have a
passport? Can’t forget one of those.
Skylar: Not yet. And I need to get a big suitcase and a new swimsuit!
Grace: Oh look. $450, that’s not bad.
Skylar: So, what kind of activities are we gonna do while in Mexico?
Grace: Well, I want to go snorkeling for sure and maybe try surfboarding.
Skylar: I’ve never snorkeled. I did surfboard in Myrtle Beach a little bit. It’s not easy! I definitely
wanna* try sailing or windsurfing if possible.
Grace: Me too. I love boats. Let’s also look at a tour of the city. Maybe one with a tour guide so we
can learn the history of the city? My parents would wanna do that for sure.
Skylar: So do you have a nice camera? I can always bring mine. I love taking pictures.
Grace: No, I just have my phone for pictures. I am not much of a photographer. I prefer to collect
shells and sand dollars on the beach instead of taking pictures.
Skylar: That’s great. Then I can take the pictures for you and your family.
Grace: We have a lot of ideas we can research now! My parents will be so happy that we have
found some great options already!
Skylar: Ugh, I am so excited. Thank you for inviting me! I mean, I should probably ask my parents if
I can come along, but I’m sure they’ll say yes!
Grace: Happy to have you as our guest! The last time we traveled, I was pretty bored. My sister
brought a friend, and I didn’t. It was of course fun to go somewhere, but much more fun when a
friend is there.
gonna* - Gonna can be used in informal spoken language in place of going to.
wanna* - Wanna can be used in informal spoken language in place of want to.
LET’S TALK! 3-45

1
3
LET’S TALK!
ACTIVITIES
LT 3.2 - LISTEN
MAD Multiple Choice
Decide if each statement is true or false based on the chapter video.
1. Skylar’s parents like to travel. A. True B. False
2. Skylar has been to Chicago with her family. A. True B. False
3. Grace’s family does not know all of the details of their trip yet. A. True B. False
4. Skylar does NOT need a passport to go to Mexico. A. True B. False
5. The girls want to go on a tour of the city. A. True B. False
6. Skylar is excited for this vacation with Grace. A. True B. False
7. Grace likes to take pictures, and Skylar likes to collect shells on the beach. A. True B. False
LT 3.3 - LISTEN
MAD Category Match
Listen to the conversation and determine who says which sentence. Place each sentence in
the correct category.
Grace Skylar
Do you want to come with? That would be so much fun!
We wanted to go to Mexico this year. So how much is it all gonna cost?
My parents love the beach. I need to get a big suitcase.
We should go online and get some ideas! I did surfboard in Myrtle Beach a little bit.
The last time we traveled, I was pretty bored. Thank you for inviting me!
3-46 LET’S TALK!

1
3
LET’S TALK!
INTERVIEWS - LET’S TALK ABOUT VACATIONS!
LT 3.4 - LISTEN
MAD Viewing
Taylor Ashley Emily

are missing in their interview. The blanks may have more than one word, so listen carefully.
Taylor: “I like to perform. So, I like to sing and dance and act, and I also like to read and listen to
music, and [watch movies]. And when I go [on vacation] I like to do what local people do and
enjoy the culture. So, I [would] like to parasail or just [walk] around and look at the local shops.
My favorite vacation was probably when I [went] on a cruise with my mom. [Some] places I’ve
been for vacation are: Germany and the Caribbean, and Mexico. [Last week], I hung out with
friends and I went out [to eat] with friends.”
Ashley: “I’m personally really involved in [theater] at my college. I’m in a show like full-time
starting in the [fall], so it’s about four hours [every day]. Hanging out with friends, reading...
My favorite vacation [was] when we went to Disney with choir. I don’t know, it was just [going]
to Disney as a teenager, it was just everything was so surreal and so much more [fun] than it was
when I was a kid and I barely remembered it. So, [there] was just so much to do and so much to
see. It was so much fun. A few places I’ve been on vacation, well, obviously Disney, I’ve been to
Las Vegas, Nevada. I go to Siesta Key every [year] as well, which is near Sarasota. Last [weekend],
I worked a lot and I hung out with one of my best friends, Ronnie.”
LET’S TALK! 3-47

1
3
LET’S TALK!
ACTIVITIES
Emily: “Some of my [hobbies] are playing tennis and reading books. Some of the vacation
activities I like to do is lying on the [beach] or shopping. My favorite vacation was [when] I went to
California and there was a big tennis tournament with a bunch of professional tennis players and
I got to watch [them] for a few days. A few places I’ve been on vacation: I’ve been to California, I’ve
been to Germany, and I’ve been to Florida. And [last] weekend, I watched my dad play tennis and
[also] played some tennis [with] him.”
LT 3.6 - LISTEN
MAD Category Match
After watching the interviews, fill in the chart based on what each student said.
Taylor Ashley Emily

likes singing and dancing likes acting and reading likes playing tennis
enjoys the local culture went to Disney enjoys shopping on vacation
went on a cruise goes to Siesta Key every year went to California and Florida
last weekend went out to eat last weekend worked a lot last weekend watched tennis

MAD Open Recording
1. What was your favorite vacation? Why was it your favorite vacation?
2. Did you ever go with a friend on their family vacation before?
3. Did a friend come with you on your family vacation?
4. Where do you want to go on a vacation?
3-48 LET’S TALK!

1
3
REVIEW & ASSESSMENT

How well do I
Additional
Refer to...
I CAN... Practice
(Page = P.)
Review (R)
Section 1
1. discuss outdoor activities using the R. 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, P. 3-7,
past simple. 7, 8 3-19, 3-22,
3-35, 3-37
2. discuss travel. R. 1, 2, 4, 5, 8 Section 2

3. ask and answer questions using the P. 3-9
R. 1, 7, 8
past simple. P. 3-26
4. discuss the natural world. R. 1, 8 Section 3
R1 - LISTENING 1
MAD Multiple Choice
Listen to two friends discuss a trip that one of them recently took. Then, decide if each
statement is true or false based on what you heard.
Dave: Hey, Trevor! Where were you last week?
Trevor: Hi, Dave! I was on vacation with my family.
Dave: Cool! Where did you go?
Trevor: We went camping at Yosemite National Park in California for a week. It was so fun!
Dave: What did you do on your trip?
Trevor: We camped out under the stars some nights but also slept in our big tent. My family loves
to hike, so we hiked two mountains. I was tired after that!
Dave: Did you go fishing at all?
Trevor: Yes, we did. There was a big lake near our campsite. The water was crystal clear! We went
fishing every afternoon and cooked the fish for dinner over a campfire.
Dave: That sounds delicious! What else did you do?
Trevor: We enjoyed the outdoors. The lake was calm, and the sky was filled with stars. We roasted
marshmallows over our campfire and sang songs.
Dave: My family and I don’t camp, but I would like to go someday.
Trevor: Maybe you can come with my family sometime!
CHAPTER 3 3-49
1
3
REVIEW & ASSESSMENT

REVIEW ACTIVITIES
MAD Multiple Choice
1. Dave went camping last week. A. True B. False
2. Trevor slept in a tent every night. A. True B. False
3. The campsite was near a lake. A. True B. False
4. They ate fish every night. A. True B. False
5. They cooked the fish over a campsite. A. True B. False
6. There were lots of stars at night. A. True B. False
7. They don’t like roasting marshmallows. A. True B. False
8. Trevor would like Dave to come camping with his family sometime. A. True B. False
R2 - LISTENING 2
Listen to the following student talk about himself and the chapter topic. Fill in the blanks with
words that are missing in his interview.
Jason: “When I am on vacation, I love to [sightsee] and walk around a lot.
I’m usually not one for relaxing on the [beach] or anything like that, I
[usually] like to get out there and see a lot. My favorite vacation [was]
definitely, hands down, I went to Germany when I was in [fifth] grade. We
were in Obersdorf and we [went] to Neuschwanstein, and that was easily
my favorite [vacation]. A few other places I’ve been: I’ve been to Canada and
Jamaica. So, I’ve been out of the country a few different [times]. And last
week I went to the [lake] with my [friends] and we swam around.”
R3 - GRAMMAR 1
MAD Multiple Choice
Choose the correct past simple conjugation of each infinitive verb.
1. to prefer A. prefered B. preferred C. preferd
2. to visit A. visited B. visitted C. visitd
3. to be A. bed B. was C. beed
4. to dry A. dryed B. dryd C. dried
5. to stay A. stayed B. stayyed C. stayd
6. to find A. find B. found C. finded
7. to have A. haved B. havd C. had
8. to give A. gived B. gave C. givd
9. to run A. runned B. runnd C. ran
10. to spend A. spent B. spended C. spented
3-50 CHAPTER 3
1
3
REVIEW & ASSESSMENT

REVIEW ACTIVITIES
R4 - GRAMMAR 2
Read the story. Then, choose the missing verb from the word bank that best fits in each blank.
Fill in the blanks with the correct conjugated form of each infinitive verb.
to find to buy to arrive to board to be

to travel to be to get to read to come
to put to leave to stop to go to depart
Last summer my family and I [traveled] to Costa Rica. My best friend [came] along with us.
Before we [left] I [bought] a new suitcase because my other one [was] really old. We [arrived] at
the airport three hours early. We [got] our boarding passes and [stopped] at security before we
[went] to our gate. At the gate I [read] a book while I waited to board the plane. After about one
hour we [boarded] the plane. I [found] my seat and [put] my purse under the seat in front of me.
The plane [departed], and we [were] in the air.
R5 - READING
MAD Multiple Choice
Read this passage about Julie’s trip yesterday. Then, choose the best answer for each
question.
Yesterday was a long day! I started my day when I packed my suitcase and checked that I had
my I.D. and my passport. I went to the Boston Logan Airport in Massachusetts to take a flight to
Italy. I got my boarding pass and sat in seat 22B. It was morning in Italy when the plane arrived,
so I started sightseeing right away! I rode a bus around the city and took many pictures. I had
to eat a sandwich for lunch to get more energy to visit more places the rest of the day. After, I
traveled to the countryside to see open fields with small rivers. I needed to rest by a tree for an
hour because I was very tired! Then I traveled back to the city and ate dinner. I had a delicious
dinner of pasta and chicken. Italy has the best pasta and pizza! I knew it was late because the
moon was out, and the sun went down. Finally, I went to my hotel and slept all night. Did you
travel to Italy in the past? If not, you need to plan a trip soon!
CHAPTER 3 3-51
1
3
REVIEW & ASSESSMENT

REVIEW ACTIVITIES
R5 - READING (Continued)
MAD Multiple Choice
1. How did Julie start her day? 2. Where did Julie travel?
A. She sat in seat 22B on the airplane. A. Italy
B. She checked if she had her ID and B. Boston
passport. C. Boston Logan
C. She traveled to Boston Logan Airport. D. Massachusetts
D. She rode a bus around the city.
3. How did Julie travel to her destination? 4. What did Julie do when she arrived at her
A. She rode a bike. destination?
B. She walked. A. went sightseeing in the countryside
C. She slept. and city
D. She flew in an airplane. B. rode a bike through the city
5. What did Julie eat for dinner? C. sat on a bench to rest in the countryside
A. pizza D. went to the hotel
B. pasta and chicken
C. sandwich
D. She did not eat dinner.
R6 - WRITING
MAD Open Text
This is your calendar for August. Today is August 19th. Using phrases of time and this
calendar, type sentences about what you did. Make sure you include all of the activities.
AUGUST
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Pack for Leave for Come home Unpack from
vacation vacation to NY from NY vacation
8 9 10 11 12 13 14
15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Plan trip to a
beach in TODAY
December
22 23 24 25 26 27 28
BBQ and picnic
at Beth’s
29 30 31
3-52 CHAPTER 3
1
3
REVIEW & ASSESSMENT

REVIEW ACTIVITIES
R7 - SPEAKING 1
Look at the image and listen to each question. Then, respond in the pauses provided using
complete sentences.
1. Who went fishing?
2. Did Alex go hiking?
3. What did Kevin and Patty do?
4. Who made a campfire?
5. Who took pictures of flowers?
6. Did Emily ride in a boat?
R8 - SPEAKING 2
MAD Open Recording
Look at the vocabulary images from the beginning of each section. Describe each picture using
CHAPTER 3 3-53
1
3
REVIEW & ASSESSMENT

ASSESSMENT
MY VACATION
Choose a vacation that you went on and present it to the class. Make a poster or Powerpoint
slide with pictures from events on the trip. Use the past simple to describe the activities you
did, the sights you saw and the food you ate.
Teacher Note: You can have the students record themselves presenting in the MAD with a
video or use the LAD Presentation mode and have students present to the class.

VACATION BROCHURE
Either allow students to choose or assign students to a state in America. Working alone or
with a partner, make a brochure about the state. Answer the following questions:
What is the state name, population, and capital city? Include sights to see and things to do
that are special for that state.
Teacher Note: You can have the students record themselves presenting their brochure in the
MAD with a video or use the LAD Presentation mode and have students present to the class.
LISTENING 1
MAD Multiple Choice
Listen to two friends discuss a trip that one of them recently took. Then, decide if each
statement is true or false based on what you heard.
Jessica: Hi, Stacy! How are you?
Stacy: Hey, Jessica! I’m doing great. Where were you last week?
Jessica: I was in Costa Rica on vacation with my family.
Stacy: That sounds fun! How was the trip?
Jessica: Well, I flew on a plane for the first time. It was so fun!
Stacy: Oh wow! What did you think of the airport?
Jessica: It was quite the experience! When we arrived we had to check our suitcases and get our
boarding passes. Then, we went through security, which was interesting. After we passed through
security we found our gate. We ate breakfast in the airport before we boarded the plane.
Stacy: Did you have a window or an aisle seat?
Jessica: Thankfully, I had a window seat. It was fun to be able to see the trees get smaller and
smaller the higher we flew. It was so cool to fly through the clouds.
Stacy: I love window seats, too! Did you go through customs when you arrived in Costa Rica?
Jessica: Yes, it took a long time because there were a lot of people arriving at the same time as us.
Stacy: I would like to travel outside of the country someday, too! What an amazing experience!
Jessica: It sure was.
3-54 CHAPTER 3
1
3
REVIEW & ASSESSMENT

ASSESSMENT
MAD Multiple Choice
1. Stacy went to Costa Rica with her family. A. True B. False
2. Jessica flew on a plane for the first time. A. True B. False
3. Jessica went through security before getting her boarding pass. A. True B. False
4. They ate breakfast on the airplane. A. True B. False
5. Jessica and Stacy love window seats. A. True B. False
6. Customs did not take a lot of time. A. True B. False
7. Stacy did not travel outside of the United States. A. True B. False
8. Jessica did not enjoy traveling through the airport. A. True B. False
LISTENING 2
words that are missing in his interview. The blanks may have more than one word.
Carl: “For my hobbies, I am [very] involved in Robotics. So, we’ll make

robots that shoot frisbees or throw balls or do a bunch of random other
tasks. That’s where a lot of my [time] goes. When I am on vacation, I kind
of just [like to] walk around and see stuff. So, I like to not go to cities with
a plan and walk around and just - I don’t know - it’s kind of cool [not]
having a plan and just being able to go with the flow. My [favorite]
when I went to Germany, actually a [month] ago. I kind of got to - I got to see a lot of friends that
I hadn’t seen, and I got to see really old towns that I hadn’t seen [before]. And a lot of it [was] just
amazing buildings, and then I also went to a chocolate museum, and I love [chocolate], so that was
nice. I’ve gone on [vacation], my family [travels] all the time, so we go to a lot of wilderness places,
so Yellowstone, Cape Cod, just a lot of the really pretty places. I go to Wyoming in the middle of the
[mountains] every year. So, last week I [went] to a soccer game. Kind of just watched it, my little
brother was playing, and I hung out with friends. Most of the time I really [didn’t] have a plan. I was
kind of lazy, and then I [played] video games with friends.”
CHAPTER 3 3-55
1
3
REVIEW & ASSESSMENT

ASSESSMENT
GRAMMAR 1
MAD Multiple Choice
Choose the correct past simple conjugation of each verb.
1. to depart A. departted B. departed C. departd
2. to write A. writed B. writted C. wrote
3. to fly A. flied B. flew C. flyed
4. to put A. put B. putted C. putd
5. to stop A. stoped B. stoppded C. stopped
6. to unpack A. unpackd B. unpacked C. unpackked
7. to use A. used B. use C. ussed
8. to swim A. swimed B. swimmed C. swam
9. to say A. sayed B. said C. sayd
10. to sleep A. slept B. sleeped C. sleepd
GRAMMAR 2
Read the story. Then, choose the missing verb from the word bank that best fits in each blank.
Fill in the blanks with the correct conjugated form of each infinitive verb.
to board to be to meet to go to bring
to leave to take to visit to play to have
to ride to like to sleep to cook to give
My family and I [took] a vacation to enjoy the outdoors. We [went] camping and [slept] in a tent
for two weeks. I [had] a lot of fun, but I [was] so happy to sleep in my bed last night. Every day we
[rode] our bikes to the lake and [boarded] the fishing boat. We [brought] the fish home to have
a fish fry for dinner. We [cooked] so much fish. The next day we [visited] our grandparents.
My mom [gave] them some of our fish. Grandma [liked] the fish and thought it was delicious.
We [left] my grandparents and [met] with friends at the lake for a game of beach volleyball.
We [played] until the moon came out and the beach was filled with moonlight.
3-56 CHAPTER 3
1
3
REVIEW & ASSESSMENT

ASSESSMENT
READING
MAD Multiple Choice
Read about Cole’s day with his family during the 4th of July. Then, choose the best answer for
each question.
Yesterday was the 4th of July! It is a day to celebrate America. We have a barbecue at our house
every year for our family and friends. Some of my family lives in different states, so they flew here
to celebrate with us. My dad and I picked up my aunt, uncle, and cousins from the airport in the
morning. Then we went to the beach for a couple of hours and swam in the ocean. I loved riding
the waves and building sandcastles. Then we went home to clean up. Around 4:00 in the afternoon,
everyone started to arrive at our house. We have a big backyard with a lot of grass and flowers, so
I had a lot of space to play with my cousins. We also rode bikes in the driveway. My aunt loves to
take pictures with her camera, so she took photographs of us and everyone at the party. It is really
fun to look at them year after year. My mom and dad made hotdogs and hamburgers with corn on
the cob for dinner. At night, we made a fire and ate marshmallows under the stars. I never wanted
the night to end. I can’t wait for next year’s party!
1. How did Cole and his family celebrate the 4th of July?
A. They flew to to their families house in another state.
B. They went to a restaurant with friends and family.
C. They ate pizza at their house.
D. They went to the beach and had a barbeque with friends and family.
2. How did Cole’s aunt, uncle, and cousins travel to Cole’s house?
A. They drove their car.
B. They flew in an airplane.
C. They rode their bikes.
D. They walked.
3. Who liked to take photos at the barbecue?
A. Cole’s uncle
B. Cole’s father
C. Cole’s mother
D. Cole’s aunt
CHAPTER 3 3-57
1
3
REVIEW & ASSESSMENT

ASSESSMENT
READING (Continued)
MAD Multiple Choice
4. Where did Cole and his cousins play and ride bikes during the party?
A. In the driveway
B. In the backyard in the grass
C. Inside the house
D. At the beach
5. What did they do at night?
A. They made a fire under the stars.
B. They went to the beach.
C. They played in the backyard.
D. They took pictures with friends.
WRITING
MAD Open Text
This is your calendar for June. Today is June 23rd. Using phrases of time and this
calendar, type sentences about what you did. Make sure you include all of the activities.
JUNE

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Pack for Leave for
vacation Florida beach
vacation flight
@ 9:30AM
8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Swim in ocean Boat ride Come home Unpack from
vacation
15 16 17 18 19 20 21
22 23 24 25 26 27 28
Go camping
TODAY with friends
29 30
3-58 CHAPTER 3
1
3
REVIEW & ASSESSMENT

ASSESSMENT
SPEAKING 1
Look at the image and listen to each question. Then, respond in the pauses provided using
complete sentences.
1. Who played the guitar?
2. Did Ryan cook dinner over the campfire?
3. Who has a tent?
4. Did Darla eat in the chair?
5. Who took pictures?
6. Did Jack go on a hike?
SPEAKING 2
MAD Open Recording
CHAPTER 3 3-59
1
4 CHAPTER FOUR
AROUND TOWN
VOCABULARY
In the City ...................................................................... 4-4
Directions ...................................................................... 4-19
Getting Around Town ................................................. 4-35
GRAMMAR
Past Continuous .......................................................... 4-8
Coordinating Conjunctions ....................................... 4-12
Imeratives (+ , -) ........................................................... 4-24
Prepositions of Movement ....................................... 4-28
Imperatives (Let us / Let’s) ........................................ 4-40
Adverbs .......................................................................... 4-42
CONVERSATION
What were the people doing? .................................. 4-15
What was happening around town? ....................... 4-16
Which way should I go? .............................................. 4-34-32
What is your neighborhood like? ............................. 4-32
Where should I go? ..................................................... 4-45
Where is it on the map? ............................................. 4-46
READING
Flat Stanley Goes to Wisconsin ................................ 4-17
Tour of Downtown Milwakee .................................... 4-33
Different Types of Transportation in a City ........... 4-47
LET’S TALK!
Video - Let’s go downtown! ....................................... 4-48
LEARNING OBJECTIVES Interviews - Let’s go to your house! ........................ 4-52
• discuss places using the past continuous.

REVIEW & ASSESSMENT
• use coordinating conjunctions.
Review ............................................................................ 4-54
• give and follow directions using imperatives. Projects .......................................................................... 4-58
Assessment ................................................................... 4-59
• discuss getting around town using prepositions
of movement.
• use adverbs to describe verbs.
INTRODUCTION 4-1
1
4

WISCONSIN
WI
Abbreviation: WI Known For: Apostle Islands National Lakeshore

Nickname: The Badger State Capitol Square
Capital City: Madison Historic Third Ward
Other Major Cities: Milwaukee, Green Bay, Racine, Harley Davidson Museum
Wisconsin Dells Devil’s Lake State Park
Population: 5.795 million (2017) House on the Rock
Area: 65,498 mi² (square miles) Milwaukee Art Museum
Flag: Noah’s Ark Water Park
Milwaukee County Zoo
Green Bay Packers (Cheeseheads)
Cave of the Mounds
State Song: On, Wisconsin! Holy Hill National Shrine of Mary
State Bird: American Robin Summerfest
State Flower: Wood Violet Breweries (beer)
Cheese (cheese curds)

1. There are many state parks in Wisconsin. Research them and choose one.
Share five things that you can do at this state park.
2. Summerfest is the nation’s largest music festival and takes place in Milwaukee,
Wisconsin. Look up this year’s musical lineup. Talk about what types of bands/
singers are playing. Do you listen to any of them? Which concert would you like
to see?
4-2 INTRODUCTION
1
4
VOCABULARY
SECTION 1 VOCABULARY: In the City
Places in the City Other Words and Phrases

the bank the fire department; the police station busy the road;
the bookstore; the fire station the post office to close the street
the bookshop the gas station the swimming pool closed (adjective) the roundabout
the building the hospital (the pool) downtown to run
the church; the hotel the gas the sign
the cathedral the museum the map the stop sign
the college; the neighborhood noisy the street sign
the university the park; to open the stamp
the playground open (adjective)
SECTION 2 VOCABULARY: Directions

Giving and Receiving Directions Prepositions of Place
to ask for directions How do I get to...? to turn at*
to be lost left until in
the block to go left Which way should/do I go? on
the bridge to take a left
Prepositions of
the corner on the left side
Movement
to cross right across (from) *NOTE: The preposition of place
to drive (drove) to go right around at refers to a point of location.
to give directions to take a right into For example:
(to the) east on the right side over I am waiting at the bus stop.
north straight (ahead) past I am in Green Bay at the hotel.
south the traffic light; through
west the stop light to
SECTION 3 VOCABULARY: Getting Around Town
Modes of Transportation Nouns Verbs Adverbs
the bus the bus station the subway stop to break down (broke) carefully
the car the bus stop the traffic to enter quickly
the subway the entrance the train station to exit slowly
the taxi the exit the train stop to get off (got)
the train the parking garage to get on (got)
the parking lot to look out
the price to park
the subway station to walk
INTRODUCTION 4-3
1
4
VOCABULARY
IN THE CITY

MAD Open Recording


MAD Pronunciation
1. The apartment building is very quiet. 6. Where is the police station?
2. I need to stop at the gas station. 7. I went running in the park.
3. The cathedral is so beautiful. 8. The bookshop opens at 9.
4. Do you want to go to the art museum? 9. The hospital is near the post office.
5. The bank is next to the cathedral. 10. The playground is busy.
4-4 SECTION 1
1
4
VOCABULARY
ACTIVITIES
MAD Letter Jumble
1. the bookstore 2. the market 3. street sign 4. the building
5. downtown 6. the hospital 7. the church 8. the city

MAD Text Match
Match the vocabulary word with the correct description.
1. You sleep here when you are on vacation. the hotel
2. Kids play here. the playground
3. This is where your money is. the bank
4. People drive cars on this. the street
5. You use this to see the whole city. the map
6. You swim here in the summer. the pool
7. You go here if you are sick. the hospital
8. There are many houses here. the neighborhood
9. You go here to buy something to read. the bookshop
10. Many of these are in one building. the apartment
CULTURAL NOTE
Getting a Driver’s License
Look at a map of the United States and see how big the country is. People often need to travel
long distances to go to work, school, shopping, etc. While there are some local buses and trains
to use in some cities, the lack of public transportation means that many people need to drive
every day to get to where they need to go. In the U.S., you can drive a car as young as age 16.
To prepare for the driver’s test, you first need to learn the rules of the road by taking a driver’s
education class. Your instructor teaches you how to be a safe driver, then you can take a written
test to earn your learner’s permit (or driving permit). The test can cost between $30 and $100.
Each state is different. Some states allow you to take this test at age 14. Other states say 15 or
15 ½. A few states do not allow you to learn how to drive until the age of 16.
So, you passed your learner’s permit test? Great - time to start driving! You can practice driving
“behind-the-wheel” with your teacher or adult in the car. In some states, you may need between
30 and 50 hours of driving practice (including driving at night) before you can get your driver’s
license. At age 16 and with enough driving practice, you can finally take your driver’s test to get
your license!
SECTION 1 4-5
1
4
VOCABULARY
ACTIVITIES
MAD Image Match
Match the image with the correct vocabulary word.
1. the apartment 2. the museum
3. the playground 4. the church
5. the map 6. the gas station
7. busy 8. the roundabout
9. the hospital 10. the neighborhood

Answer the following questions about places in your neighborhood.
1. Which cafe is the best? Why is it the best?
2. What is the name of a nearby college or university?
3. Do you have a lot of parks?
4. Do any of the parks have a playground?
5. What is the name of a hotel in your neighborhood?
6. How many gas stations are there?
7. Is there a hospital near your home?
8. What kind of museum is in your neighborhood?
4-6 SECTION 1
1
4
VOCABULARY
ACTIVITIES
CULTURAL NOTE
Gas and Petrol Station
When your gas tank is near empty in a car, it’s time to visit a gas station (also referred to as a
petrol station in England). If you’re on a highway, there might be signs near the exits that indicate
how close a gas station is located. Otherwise, you might have to search for the nearest station
before your car runs out of fuel.
When you arrive, you can pay with a credit card at the pump, or go inside and speak to someone
at the counter to pay with cash or credit card before you fill up your vehicle. Some locations are
service stations. This means they might have people who pump gas for you, or they might have a
store connected to the gas station. At this store, you can purchase drinks, food, or other common
supplies needed when traveling. You can also use the toilets for free.
The price of gas is dependent upon the price of oil, as well as local taxes. During peak travel
seasons or holidays, gas can be more expensive. If you are trying to get the best price for gas,
there is an app that shows the prices of nearby stations in order to find the cheapest price per
gallon.

Listen to the question and answer in the space provided using a complete sentence.
Use the images that show the buildings and names to answer the questions.
For example: You hear: Where did you call for help?
You say: I called the police station.
Answers:
1. Where did you stay on your vacation? I stayed at the Holiday Hotel.
2. Where did you go for a walk? I went for a walk in Sunset Park.
3. Where did you go to get gas for your car? I went for gas at Sinclair gas station.
4. Where did you go to take out money? I took out money at Wisconsin State Bank.
5. Where did you go to eat? I went to eat at Cafe Lulu.
6. Where did you learn to read? I learned to read at Whitman School.
SECTION 1 4-7
1
4
GRAMMAR
PAST CONTINUOUS
The past continuous is often used to give background information for a story so people understand
what you are describing. For example: It was raining. I was running downtown.
You can use the past continuous to talk about events that were in progress at a certain time.
For example: At nine o’clock yesterday morning, I was driving to the bank.
POSITIVE STATEMENTS
I was
You were
verb + ing
He / She / It was
We / They were
For example: I was going to the cathedral. They were buying books at the bookshop.
NEGATIVE STATEMENTS
I was not (wasn’t)

You were not (weren’t)
verb + ing
He / She / It was not (wasn’t)
We / They were not (weren’t)
For example: It was not raining yesterday. We weren’t playing in the street.
QUESTIONS
Was I
Were you
verb + ing ?
Was he / she / it
Were we / they
For example: Where were you stopping for gas? Was she getting money from the bank?
REMINDER: Spelling Rules

1. If a verb ends in -e, then remove the -e before adding the -ing.
For example: close → closing drive → driving
2. If a verb ends in one vowel and one consonant, then you double the consonant
(except when the consonant is a w or y).
For example: get → getting mow → mowing play → playing
4-8 SECTION 1
1
4
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
MAD Multiple Choice
Look at the picture and read the statements. Decide if each statement is true or false.
1. An older woman was walking her dog. A. True B. False

2. A woman was riding her bike in the street. A. True B. False
3. One man was looking at the map. A. True B. False
4. The man in the green shirt was going into the cafe. A. True B. False
5. One car was driving on the street. A. True B. False
6. The man in the yellow shirt was talking on the phone. A. True B. False
7. The woman was shopping in the bookstore. A. True B. False
8. The man in the orange shirt was talking to the man in the dark blue shirt. A. True B. False
9. The white car was stopping at the stop sign. A. True B. False
10. The man in the purple shirt was walking in the street. A. True B. False
SECTION 1 4-9
1
4
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
CULTURAL NOTE
Drivers and pedestrians share the responsibility of keeping themselves and others safe
on the road. A crosswalk is a place for pedestrians to cross the road. On a basic level, there
are four kinds of crosswalks: marked and unmarked, controlled and uncontrolled. Marked
crosswalks are usually white or yellow, while unmarked crosswalks are implied crosswalks
at any street corner.
The rules of who can walk or drive first may depend on what kind of crosswalk it is. In some
cases, pedestrians always have the right-of-way. On other streets, pedestrians may have to
yield to vehicles based on street lights or traffic.
Some crosswalks have timers near them, so you can see how much time remains before
vehicles have the right-of-way. For people with vision impairment, some cities have installed
machines that beep and alert them when to walk. Regardless of what type of crosswalk you
find, use caution when crossing a road and be aware of your surroundings.

MAD Text Match
Match the two parts to form a complete sentence.
1. My family and I were singing in church yesterday.
2. I was playing at the park with my friends.
3. My dad was buying a present at the bookshop.
4. We were staying at a hotel during our vacation.
5. My mom was looking for a quiet neighborhood to live in.
6. The museum was selling beautiful art.
7. The bank was closing early on Saturday.
8. My sister was meeting friends at a restaurant downtown.
4-10 SECTION 1
1
4
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
Create a sentence in the past continuous using the subject and verb given. Add something to
complete each sentence.
For example: You see: I / dance You type: I was dancing in the rain.
1. my sister and I / play My sister and I were playing...
2. I / run I was running...
3. my family / barbecue My family was barbecuing...
4. Susan / take pictures Susan was taking pictures...
5. the plane / arrive The plane was arriving...
6. Mark and Eric / follow Mark and Eric were following...
7. we / stop We were stopping...
8. I / travel I was traveling...

MAD Open Recording
Look at the image and say at least 6 past continuous sentences about it.
SECTION 1 4-11
1
4
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
CULTURAL NOTE
Religion in the U.S.
The United States of America is known as a “melting pot”, which means that many people
with different cultures, backgrounds, and religions live together in the U.S. The first people
who lived on the land which is now the United States of America were Native Americans.
As Europeans and others moved to America, they brought with them their own cultures,
beliefs and religions. Today, there is a high percentage of people in the U.S. who identify as
Christians, however there are also many people who practice Judaism, Hinduism, Islam, or
Buddhism. There are others who do not practice any religion at all. When you drive through
different cities in the U.S., you will see many churches, temples, mosques, synagogues, and
other religious buildings. The U.S. government protects the right for people to have “freedom
of religion”, meaning people are able to practice whichever religion they choose.

COORDINATING CONJUNCTIONS
Coordinating conjunctions connect words, phrases, or clauses that are independent or equal.
A comma is always placed before the coordinating conjunction.
Coordinating Conjunction Meaning Example
We are going to the museum, and

and in addition to
then we are going for ice cream.
connects two different things I enjoy living in the country, but she
but
that express a contrast enjoys living in the city.
demonstrates a choice Would you like to go to the playground,

or
between two things or do you want to swim at the pool?
demonstrates the result of

so I needed money, so I went to the bank.
something
Language Tip: “For” is also a coordinating conjunction. It means “because,” but it is rarely used.
4-12 SECTION 1
1
4
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
MAD Multiple Choice
Choose the conjunction that best completes each sentence.
1. I had to get gas, __________ I stopped at the gas station.
A. and B. or C. but D. so
2. I needed a new book, __________ I went to the bookstore.
3. A big city is busy, __________ it can often be noisy.
4. I need to put money in the bank, __________ it is closed.
5. Do you want to go to a restaurant, __________ would you prefer to cook at home?
6. I have to go to the post office and the library, __________ I don’t have enough time.
7. I go downtown to shop, __________ I listen to music in the park.
8. I would love to go to the pool, __________ we can ride a boat on the lake.

MAD Word Jumble
Put the statements or questions in the correct word order.
1. Would you like to go to the bookshop or the museum?
2. I need to go to the post office for stamps.
3. The bank is not far away, so I am going to walk there.
4. Is the police station near or far?
5. It is hot and sunny today, but the swimming pool is closed.
6. Do you need to stop at the gas station for gas?
7. Is your neighborhood noisy or quiet?
8. It is Sunday, so my family and I are going to church.
SECTION 1 4-13
1
4
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
Read the story and fill in the blanks with the correct coordinating conjunction from the
word bank.
but or and so and so but or
I have a busy day today. There are many places I have to go. It is Sunday, [so] I am going
to church with my family. I need to go to the post office, [but] it is closed on Sundays. I also
need to stop at the gas station. It is my friend’s birthday on Friday. He enjoys reading, [so] I
am going to the bookstore. I will buy him a book, [and] I will also look for a magazine. He likes
music, [and] he is a fan of cars. Therefore, I am going to buy him a book about music, [or] I’m
going to take him to a car show. Finally, I was going to meet my friends at the swimming pool,
[but] it is going to rain later. We decided to see a movie instead. There is a comedy at 4 p.m.,
[or] we can see an action movie at 5 p.m.

Create a sentence using the Section 1 Vocabulary and the coordinating conjunction given.
1. and 2. but 3. or 4. so

MAD Open Recording
Read the sentence starter and find the correct ending for the sentence. Then say the entire
sentence in the pause provided.
1. I was going to buy stamps at the post office, but it was closed.
2. We went to the playground, and we played for many hours.
3. He went shopping for a new magazine, but he did not find one that he wanted.
4. Call the police when it’s an emergency, or you can call the fire department.
5. We needed food for the road trip, so we went to the grocery store.
6. She wanted to buy a map, for she was new to the city.
7. We were really hungry after the long hike, so we went to a restaurant for lunch.
8. The hotel had a beautiful room, and there was a large swimming pool.
4-14 SECTION 1
1
4
CONVERSATION
ACTIVITIES
ACTIVITY 4.1.18 - SPEAK: What were the people doing?
First, decide who is going to be Partner A and who is going to be Partner B. Next, take turns
asking what each person or set of people were doing at each place. Answer your partner with
the clue provided for you on your worksheet.
For example:
If Partner A has ‘David - fire station’, then Partner A asks, “What was David doing at the fire
station?”
Partner B has ‘David - to work’, so Partner B answers “David was working.”
PARTNER A Worksheet
Partner A - Questions to ask Partner B Partner A - Answers to give Partner B
1. Ben - post office 1. Susan - gas

2. the kids - playground 2. John - books
3. you - bank 3. Jennifer - art
4. Debbie - the swimming pool 4. Kevin - to hang out with a friend
5. Emma - hospital 5. Bryan and Mary - to be on vacation
PARTNER B Worksheet
Partner B - Answers to give Partner A Partner B - Questions to ask Partner A
1. Ben - stamps 1. Susan - gas station

2. the kids - to play 2. John - bookstore
3. I - to get money 3. Jennifer - museum
4. Debbie - to swim 4. Kevin - apartment building
5. Emma - to visit her grandmother 5. Bryan and Mary - hotel
SECTION 1 4-15
1
4
CONVERSATION
ACTIVITIES
ACTIVITY 4.1.19 - SPEAK: What was happening around town?
Look at the map and take turns telling your partner what was happening. Use the past
continuous and conjunctions. Take notes on 5 of the best sentences that you and your
partner came up with. Count how many different sentences you can think of together.
Use tallies: (IIII)
Ex: The truck was driving on Queen Street, but he wanted to be on King Street.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Total Sentences:
4-16 SECTION 1
FLAT STANLEY GOES TO WISCONSIN
People like to share experiences about their lives and their travels. A project called “Flat Stanley” allows
people to connect with one another from anywhere in the world. Flat Stanley is a paper man you send in
the mail to a friend, family member, celebrity, politician, or anyone. Then, the person spends a couple of
days with Flat Stanley and writes about their experiences together. Then, the person mails Flat Stanley
back to the sender. Below is an example of Flat Stanley’s trip to Green Bay, Wisconsin.
We were waiting for Flat Stanley all day when he finally arrived. We saw the mailman from the post office arrive
at our apartment building, so we ran downstairs. We took Stanley upstairs and showed him our apartment.
While we were eating dinner, we decided to take Stanley on a tour of Green Bay the next day to show him all
of the exciting places in our city.
The next morning, we ate breakfast and then took Stanley for a bike ride around our neighborhood. We
stopped at the playground in the middle of our neighborhood to play for a half hour. Then we went home to
give Stanley a tour of our town with mom and dad. We were driving downtown and drove past the bank and
police station. After, we arrived at the National Railroad Museum. We got out and looked at all of the different
trains. As we were walking, we took a lot of pictures! After our tour, we were really hot, so we decided to go
swimming at the Resch Aquatic Center. It was very busy, but we had a great time. We were really tired after
swimming, so we all went home to relax.
The second day, we went downtown for a Green Bay Packers football game. The football stadium was full
of thousands of people. Every time the Green Bay Packers scored, it was very noisy because everyone was
very excited and cheering. They won the game! We were driving back to our house after the game when we
stopped for gas at the gas station. It was good that we stopped because there was a lot of traffic, and we all
needed a break. When we finally got home, we were all sad that it was Stanley’s last night with us. We were
talking about how much fun we had during his visit, but then it was time for bed. The following day we went to
the post office and mailed Stanley back home to Miami, Florida.
Thank you for sending him to us. We can’t

wait for you to learn about his time in Green
Bay. He is welcome to come back and visit
anytime!
SECTION 1 4-17
ACTIVITIES
MAD Multiple Choice
Read the story about Flat Stanley and answer the questions below.
1. What is the main idea of the story?
A. People like to take trips around the world.
B. People like Flat Stanley because he can travel in the mail.
C. Green Bay, Wisconsin is a great place to visit.
D. Flat Stanley is a paper man who took a trip to Green Bay, Wisconsin.
2. Which place did Stanley visit first?
A. the post office
B. the apartment building
C. the bank
D. the gas station
3. Where is one place Flat Stanley did NOT visit in Green Bay?
A. a swimming pool
B. a museum
C. a fire station
D. a football stadium
4. Which coordinating conjunction would complete the following sentence? “We saw the
mailman from the post office arrive at our apartment building, _______ we ran downstairs.”
A. so B. but C. and D. or
5. Which sentence from the story supports the idea that Flat Stanley helps people connect
and learn about different places in the world?
A. “As we were walking, we took a lot of pictures!”
B. “Flat Stanley is a paper man you send in the mail to a friend, family member, celebrity,
politician, or anyone.”
C. “We can’t wait for you to learn about his time in Green Bay.”
D. “We were talking about how much fun we had during his visit when it was time for bed.”

MAD Open Recording
After reading about Flat Stanley’s trip to Green Bay, Wisconsin, think about where you can
take him in your town. Record yourself explaining where you would take Flat Stanley and
why.
4-18 SECTION 1
1
4
VOCABULARY
DIRECTIONS

MAD Open Recording

SECTION 2 4-19
ACTIVITIES
MAD Pronunciation
1. How do I get to the swimming pool? 6. There are 4 traffic lights on Main Street.
2. Should I go west or east on this street? 7. Go straight for 5 blocks.
3. Go around the roundabout. 8. Drive over the bridge.
4. Walk to the corner and turn left. 9. My friend and I are lost.
5. Can you give me directions? 10. Don’t cross the road.

MAD Letter Jumble
1. straight ahead 2. the bridge 3. the street 4. to be located
5. the corner 6. the stop sign 7. north 8. around

A tourist is asking Shannon, a local, how to get somewhere. Use the images to fill in the
blanks with the correct vocabulary word.
Tourist: How do I get to the ?
Shannon: First, you need to go for five blocks. Then, you turn .
Drive again. Go through the but continue . At the first turn .
The is on the side of the street.

Answers:
1. [gas station] 2. [straight] 3. [left] 4. [straight] 5. [roundabout]
6. [straight] 7. [stop sign] 8. [right] 9. [gas station] 10. [left]
4-20 SECTION 2
1
4
VOCABULARY
ACTIVITIES
MAD Category Match
Listen as the people describe their neighborhoods. Drag the vocabulary words to the person
who used them.
1. Hi. My name is Caleb. When you go out of my neighborhood, there is a traffic light on the
corner. This light takes so long to turn green, so instead of going straight, I often just turn right to
avoid it. There is a bus stop on that corner too, which was nice before I had my driver’s license. I
was able to go places easily without having to ask my parents or friends for a ride. Now that I have
my driver’s license, it is awesome that we have a gas station only a block away. My car has never
run out of gas, thankfully. The post office is three blocks away, and our church is around the corner.
2. Hi, my name is Adam. I live in an awesome neighborhood in the heart of downtown. I have
everything that I need extremely close by. From where I live, the bank is one block east, and my
favorite restaurant is one block west. I am a student at the university, so I spend many hours
studying in the library. It is about four blocks away, which is not too bad. I am studying to be a
paramedic, and I have an internship at the fire department. The station is around the corner
from my apartment, which is super convenient.
3. Hello. I’m Cassandra. The best part about where I live is that we are so close to a school. I have
two little children, so we often go to the school playground to spend our days. On really hot days,
we walk north a few blocks to the neighborhood swimming pool. The only other thing close by is
the hospital, which is nice in case of an emergency. It gives me peace of mind
having it so near.
Caleb Adam Cassandra

post office downtown playground
church bank swimming pool
gas station fire department hospital
bus stop library school
traffic light restaurant
SECTION 2 4-21
ACTIVITIES
MAD Text Match
Match two parts to form a complete sentence.
PARK
1. There is a stop sign on 5th Street.

2. There is a running trail at the hotel.
3. There is a playground at the school.
4. There is a taxi driving on River Road.
5. The green car is driving on Main Street.
6. The kids are riding their bikes on Country Road.
7. The woman is walking the dog in the park.
8. The fire station is across the street from the church.
4-22 SECTION 2
1
4
VOCABULARY
ACTIVITIES
For each picture say a sentence that describes the person’s location using at, in, or on.
The kids Sarah and Jacob The car
1 2 3
Kim The taxi Paul
4 5 6
Possible answers:
1. The kids are in the pool.
2. Sarah and Jacob are at the park.
3. The car is on the street.
4. Kim is at the hospital.
5. The taxi is on the bridge.
6. Paul is in the bookstore.
CULTURAL NOTE
Family Cars
In America it is not common for Americans to walk or go by foot to places unless they live
in the city. Neighborhoods and suburbs are far from supermarkets, post offices, etc. For this
reason, Americans are highly dependent on cars and other forms of transportation to get
from one place to the next. Most families have 2 cars and often more depending on how
many kids they have that can drive.
SECTION 2 4-23
1
4
GRAMMAR
IMPERATIVES (+, -) GIVING COMMANDS
The imperative form is used to give instructions, orders, and warnings.
A subject is not used when giving orders. The infinitive form of the verb is used (without ‘to’).
To create the negative form of the imperative tense, simply add don’t in front of the infinitive form
(without ‘to’).
Take a left.
Positive Form (+)
Go straight for five blocks.
Don’t cross the street yet!
Negative Form (-)
Don’t go through the stop sign!
Written instructions on signs often use do not, instead of don’t.

For example: Do not enter.

Type the affirmative and then the negative form of the imperative tense of each verb.
For example: to drive / faster [Drive faster.] [Don’t drive faster.]
1. to ask / for directions [Ask for directions.] [Don’t ask for directions.]
2. to give / the money [Give the money.] [Don’t give the money.]
3. to turn / the corner [Turn the corner.] [Don’t turn the corner.]
4. to cross / the road [Cross the road.] [Don’t cross the road.]
5. to open / the door [Open the door.] [Don’t open the door.]

MAD Word Jumble
Put the affirmative and negative commands in the correct word order.
1. Open the door for the old woman. 5. Do not cross the street here.
2. Always look at the street signs. 6. Don’t get lost downtown.
3. Ask for directions at the gas station. 7. Go north for three blocks.
4. Walk straight ahead and take the second left. 8. Don’t close the window.
4-24 SECTION 2
1
4
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
Rewrite these questions to give commands instead. Be careful with capitalization and punctuation.
For example: You see: Can you not turn here? You type: [Don’t turn here.]
1. Can you close the door? [Close the door.]
2. Can you go to the store? [Go to the store.]
3. Can you not be late? [Don’t be late.]
4. Can you play at the park? [Play at the park.]
5. Can you write the directions? [Write the directions.]
6. Can you not drive so fast? [Don’t drive so fast.]

Use the words in the box to complete the directions from the gas station to the cafe.
TEACHER NOTE: The word “facing” will help as your students are trying to find their way around
with a map. “Facing” means which direction you are looking, so which way is your “face” pointed in
order to go in a certain direction.
go straight turn turn right take
start drive drive turn left
1. [Start] at the gas station facing north.

2. [Turn right] on Jackson Street.
3. [Go straight] for two blocks.
4. [Take] a right on 3rd Street.
5. [Drive] to the end of the block.
6. [Turn left] on Main Street.
7. [Turn] right on 4th Street.
8. [Drive] half a block and the cafe is on the left.
SECTION 2 4-25
1
4
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
MAD Sentence Jumble
Look at the path the student needs to take to get from HOME to the POST OFFICE.
Put the imperative directions in the correct order. (Use image from 4.2.12.)
Start at home.
Walk out the door and face east. Then, turn left on 1st Street.
Follow 1st Street north to Main Street.
Turn right on Main Street.
Go straight ahead and turn left on 2nd Street.
Continue north until Jackson Street.
Turn right on this street and go straight.
The post office is on the corner on the right side of the street.

MAD Text Match
Read the instructions and follow the map (image from 4.2.12). Start each time at the
place it tells you. Match the name of the starting point with the name of the building at
the ending point.
1. Hospital: Hotel 2. Bank: Cafe
Start at the hospital facing south. Start at the bank facing south. Turn left on
Turn right on Main Street. Walk west Jackson Street. Take the first right on 3rd
and turn right on 2nd Street. Go half a Street. Go straight ahead and face east on
block and the building is on the left side Main Street. Then, turn right on 4th Street
of the street. and the building is on the left side.
3. Gas Station: Cinema 4. Fire Department: Park

Start at the gas station facing north. Start at the fire station facing south.
Turn left on Jackson Street. Turn left again Turn left on Main Street. Then, turn left on 1st
on 1st Street. Go straight until you get to Street. Walk a block and turn right on Jackson
Main Street and turn left. Walk east for a Street. Walk straight ahead for two blocks and
block and a half. The building is on the right. turn right on 3rd Street. Walk south and turn
right on Main Street. The place is on the right
4-26 SECTION 2 side of the street.
1
4
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
Listen to the following people give you directions from one place to another. Start at home
facing east each time. Fill in the blanks with the name of the building where the directions take
you. (Use image from 4.2.12.)
1. [Hospital] 2. [Supermarket]
Go left on 1st Street. Take a right on Main Turn left on 1st Street. Go right on Main Street.
Street. Go straight until 4th Street. Look to Go straight until 2nd Street. Turn left and go straight
your left and the building is on the corner. for a block. Turn left on Jackson Street. Walk straight
and the building is on the right side of the street.
3. [Church] 4. [Bank]
Take a left on 1st Street. Go straight until the Go left on 1st Street. Go right on Main Street.
second street and turn right. Go straight for Then, turn left on 2nd Street. Take a right on
three blocks and the building is on the right Jackson. The building is on the left side.
side of the street.

Follow along as the person on the map goes to two different buildings. As the person walks
from one place to the next, say the correct directions.
SECTION 2 4-27
1
4
GRAMMAR
PREPOSITIONS OF MOVEMENT
Some prepositions are used to show movement from one place to another.
Preposition of Movement Examples
1. across* Go across the street to the post office.
2. around There is a cafe around the corner from the museum.
3. into My mom is walking into the supermarket.
4. over The taxi is driving over the river.
5. past The woman is walking past the cafe.
6. through The man is biking through the neighborhood.
7. to The bus is going to the school.
*The preposition across can be followed by the preposition from when you are talking about two
locations. In this case, it is a preposition of location, not movement.
For example: The post office is across from the apartment buildings.
4-28 SECTION 2
1
4
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
MAD Multiple Choice
Look at the image and choose the preposition that best completes each sentence.
1. The woman is walking her dog __________ the hospital.
A. over B. through C. past
2. The police car is driving __________ the neighborhood.
A. around B. across from C. over
3. The supermarket is __________ the tennis courts.
A. across from B. to C. through
4. The man is going __________ the supermarket.
A. past B. into C. around
5. The woman and child are going __________ school.
A. over B. past C. to
6. The man in the blue shirt is walking __________ the police car.
A. past B. to C. through
7. The woman is walking her dog __________ the neighborhood.
A. to B. across from C. through
8. The man is running __________ the street.
A. across from B. across C. around
SECTION 2 4-29
1
4
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
MAD Multiple Choice
Listen to the statements and decide if they are true or false according to the image.
1. The school is around the corner from my house.
A. True B. False
2. The police station is across the street from the bank.
A. True B. False
3. The kid is biking past the church.
A. True B. False
4. The people are going into the church.
A. True B. False
5. The green car is driving through the neighborhood.
A. True B. False
6. The man and woman are walking to the bank.
A. True B. False
4-30 SECTION 2
1
4
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
Listen to the person describe a recent vacation. Fill in the blanks with the correct missing
preposition.
This is where we stayed [on] vacation last year. It was awesome. The hotels were [across from]
the beach. The pool was [next to] our hotel. We went [into] the pool or the ocean every day.
I love walking [through] the sand [on] the beach. The restaurants were [past] the pool and
[around] the corner. Everything was so close that we could walk everywhere. We never had to
use a taxi or a bus. The bridge went [across] the small part of the ocean, which is called a bay.
We walked [over] it one day. It took about 1 hour, but it was such a beautiful day that we did not
care. It was such a fun and relaxing vacation.

MAD Open Recording
Look at the image and describe the relationship of the two places/things using a preposition of
movement or location.
1. plane / air 2. boat / people 3. car / bridge
4. buildings / houses 5. hotels / ocean 6. people / water
SECTION 2 4-31
1
4
CONVERSATION
ACTIVITIES
ACTIVITY 4.2.21 - SPEAK: Which way should I go?
Look at the map. Give your partner directions to follow to and from two places.
ACTIVITY 4.2.22 - SPEAK: What is your neighborhood like?

Tell your partner about your neighborhood. Describe what buildings are nearby and where
they are located using prepositions of movement and location.
4-32 SECTION 2
TOUR OF DOWNTOWN MILWAUKEE
4
Recently, my husband and I visited Milwaukee. Every time we go, we stay at my aunt’s house and never re-
ally travel far from the neighborhood. This time, we wanted to go downtown to see some different and ex-
citing places. My aunt and uncle took our kids to the zoo for the day while we went exploring. We started
at the Pabst Theater to see the historic building. It was so amazing to be in the old building where there
were many famous concerts. It was beautiful! Then, we got into our car and drove to Discovery World, a
center for technology and science. It also had an aquarium, which I was very excited about because I love
to see all of the different animals that live in the ocean or in lakes. After, we traveled to Lakeshore State
Park to have lunch and look at the beautiful water.
After lunch is where we had some problems. We traveled by car to the first three locations. We followed
the directions as we went, but we got lost going to Broadway Theater Center from the park. To leave the
park, we knew we had to go over the bridge and then turn right. When we reached the end of that road,
we turned left and arrived at a traffic light. We didn’t remember if we needed to go straight, turn right,
or turn left. My husband asked me which way should we go, so I said to drive straight through the stop
light. As we were driving, we realized we did not know where we were. We decided to stop and ask for
directions. We drove to a gas station and parked in the parking lot. My husband went inside and asked
a very nice man how to get to the Theater Center. He told my husband that we were very close, and we
needed to make a left at the next corner after we leave the gas station. Then, continue straight for 6
blocks, and the theater will be on the right side of the street. We finally made it and had a great time
walking through the older buildings, different shops, and art museums. After getting lost, we decided it
was time to go home.
SECTION 2 4-33
41
READING
ACTIVITIES
MAD Sentence Jumble
Based on the reading, put the places in the correct order starting with the first place they
visited and ending with the last place.
1. Pabst Theater
2. Discovery World
3. Lakeshore State Park
4. Gas Station
5. Broadway Theater Center

MAD Open Recording
In the reading, the husband and wife got lost driving from Lakeshore Park to the Broadway
Theater Center. Tell about a time you or your family got lost driving somewhere.
Use the questions below to help guide your response.
Where were you going?
Who were you with?
Did you ask for directions?
Did you use a map or GPS?
Did you arrive at your destination?
If yes, how late did you arrive?
4-34 SECTION 2
1
4
VOCABULARY
GETTING AROUND TOWN

MAD Open Recording

SECTION 3 4-35
ACTIVITIES
MAD Pronunciation
1. How do I get to the train station? 6. Is this the entrance to the parking garage?
2. Where do I get on the bus? 7. Do you take a taxi or ride the bus to work?
3. Get off the subway carefully. 8. I need to get there quickly.
4. Look out for the cars. 9. Park in the east parking lot.
5. The price is too expensive. 10. Can we walk to the subway station?

MAD Letter Jumble
1. underground 2. the bus 3. to get off 4. the boat
5. the train 6. the traffic 7. the bus stop 8. slowly

MAD Image Match
Match the image with the correct vocabulary word.
1. the bus 2. to get off
3. the taxi 4. the subway station
5. the parking lot 6. the train
4-36 SECTION 3
1
4
VOCABULARY
ACTIVITIES
MAD Image Match
7. to get on 8. the bus stop
9. the parking garage 10. the traffic

Complete each sentence with a vocabulary word from the word bank.
parking garage exit price get off

car traffic walk train
1. The [traffic] is awful. I am going to be late.

2. Don’t enter here. It is the [exit].
3. Do you want to drive or [walk] to the museum?
4. The parking lot is full. We have to park in the [parking garage].
5. Carefully [get off] the subway.
6. What is the [price] of a bus ticket?
7. I am going to take a [train] to visit my aunt. It is a fun way to travel.
8. Where is your [car]? Did you park in the lot?

Class activity
the A2 Resources Google Doc Folder, or download the A2StudentGames.pdf.)
SECTION 3 4-37
ACTIVITIES
Use the words provided to type a complete sentence. Conjugate the verb in the past
simple. Be careful with capitalization and punctuation.
For example: You see: The man / to walk / past the restaurant.
You type : [The man walked past the restaurant.]
1. The kids / to get off / the bus
[The kids got off the bus.]
2. The people / to park / the cars on the street
[The people parked the cars on the street.]
3. The woman / to get on / the bus
[The woman got on the bus.]
4. The people / to go / into the coffee shop
[The people went into the coffee shop.]
5. The taxi / to turn / the corner
[The taxi turned the corner.]
6. The man / to run / through the neighborhood
[The man ran through the neighborhood.]
7. The black car / to stop / at the stop sign
[The black car stopped at the stop sign.]
8. The person / to ride the bike / across the street
[The person rode the bike across the street.]
4-38 SECTION 3
1
4
VOCABULARY
ACTIVITIES
Listen to the sentences about the image (image from 4.3.7). All of the sentences are in the past
simple. Change them to the past continuous in the pause provided.
For example: You hear: The man walked past the burger restaurant.
You say: The man was walking past the burger restaurant.
1. The kids got off the bus. The kids were getting off the bus.
2. The taxi turned the corner. The taxi was turning the corner.
3. The woman got on the bus. The woman was getting on the bus.
4. The people went into the coffee shop. The people were going into the coffee shop.
5. The cars were parked on street. The cars were parking on the street.
6. The man ran through the neighborhood. The man was running through the neighborhood.
7. The black car stopped at the stop sign. The black car was stopping at the stop sign.
8. The boy rode the bike across the street. The boy was riding the bike across the street.
CULTURAL NOTE
Taxi vs. Uber
A taxi (also know as a cab) is a vehicle of a company that has a contract to work in a city. You can
call the company and request a taxi to drive you from point A to point B. The rate of the ride is
based on how far and how long you travel. It may be more expensive in certain cities. At the end
of a ride, you pay the driver directly, although he or she owes a percentage of that money to the
company. It’s normal to also add some money as a tip for the driver, too. You can pay with cash
or credit card.
A competitor of the taxi is a company called Uber. People sign up to become a driver, use their
own car, and work during their free time (as opposed to a taxi driver who may have set hours with
their employer as their main job). If you want to ride with an Uber, you download the Uber app
and request a ride. You can view the profile of the driver to see what past passengers have rated
the driver. You can even see how close they are to picking you up and what the ride might cost
from point A to point B. At the end of the ride, you are charged payment through the app and can
also add a tip for the driver. No cash necessary. An Uber may be less expensive than a taxi except
during “surge” hours or “high traffic” hours where the rate of a ride increases due to a high demand
for rides.
SECTION 3 4-39
1
4
GRAMMAR
IMPERATIVES (Let us / Let’s)
Let us/Let’s are the first person plural imperative.
Let us is only used in very formal situations. Formal example: Let us ask for directions.
Let’s is the short form, which is often used to make Common example: Let’s take the subway
suggestions that include ourselves. downtown.
There are two negative forms of let’s: let’s not and do not let us. Let’s not is far more common
as it is informal. Do not let us is used in more formal situations such as political documents and
speeches, and ceremonies.
Formal example: Do not let us forget what happened in the past.
Common example: Let’s not take a taxi. Let’s walk instead.

Rewrite the imperative as a first person plural imperative. Be careful with capitalization and
punctuation.
For example:
You see: Go to the bus stop. You type: [Let’s go to the bus stop.]
You see: Don’t drive through the red light. You type: [Let’s not drive through the red light.]
1. Don’t park on Main Street. [Let’s not park on Main Street.]
2. Go on vacation. [Let’s go on vacation.]
3. Get off the bus on Main Street. [Let’s get off the bus on Main Street.]
4. Go to the front entrance. [Let’s go to the front entrance.]
5. Don’t take a taxi. [Let’s not take a taxi.]
6. Find a different parking lot. [Let’s find a different parking lot.]
7. Don’t turn right at the stop light. [Let’s not turn right at the stop light.]
8. Exit here. [Let’s exit here.]
4-40 SECTION 3
1
4
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
MAD Word Jumble
Put the first person plural imperatives in the correct word order.
1. Let’s not take a taxi tonight.
2. Let’s ride the subway to the concert.
3. Let’s park in the parking garage.
4. Let’s not walk to the festival.
5. Let’s use this entrance.
6. Let’s take a right at the next stop light.
7. Let’s not get lost this time.
8. Let’s ask for directions.
9. Let’s turn left at the corner.
10. Let’s cross the bridge.
ACTIVITY 4.3.11 - LISTEN & READ

MAD Multiple Choice
Listen to the people talk. Then, choose the answer that best completes each imperative
sentence.
1. I don’t want to eat at a restaurant. Let’s go to a __________ instead.
A. police station B. cafe C. post office
2. We are lost. Let’s ask for __________.
A. directions B. a map C. a map and directions
3. There is a lot of traffic today. Let’s take the __________ instead.
A. bus B. subway C. taxi
4. I want to see a movie tonight. Let’s go to the __________ .
A. post office B. library C. cinema
5. I don’t know what street we are on. Let’s go look at the __________ .
A. street sign B. stop sign C. street light
6. It’s too noisy here. Let’s go somewhere more __________ .
A. loud B. busy C. quiet
7. It’s too far to ride our bikes to the festival. Let’s take our __________ .
A. car B. airplane C. dog
8. The train broke down. Let’s __________ the train and find the nearest subway stop.
A. get off B. get on C. stop
SECTION 3 4-41
1
4
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
Listen to the people and say the best response using a “Let’s...” command.
For example: It’s really hot today. Let’s go to the swimming pool.
Possible answers:
1. I am really hungry. Let’s go to the cafe.
2. I am very tired. Let’s go home.
3. My car doesn’t work. Let’s take the bus.
4. The parking lot is full. Let’s park in a parking garage.
5. I need cash. Let’s go to the bank.
6. I need to buy groceries. Let’s go to the supermarket.

ADVERBS
Adverbs can be used to describe verbs. They describe HOW you do something.
For example: She walks quickly.
The traffic is moving slowly.
Formation of Adverbs
Rules Examples
1. You can make many adverbs by adding -ly to an quick → quickly
adjective. slow → slowly
2. If the adjective ends in y, then replace the y with an i happy → happily
and add the -ly. noisy → noisily
dramatic → dramatically
3. If the adjective ends in ic, then add -ally.
romantic → romantically
capable → capably
4. If the adjective ends in ble, then the e becomes a y.
responsible → responsibly
early → early fast → fast

5. There are some irregular adverbs and these simply
good → well late → late
have to be memorized.
hard → hard straight → straight
4-42 SECTION 3
1
4
GRAMMAR
ADVERBS
Position of Adverbs
Rules Examples
1. The adverb usually goes after the verb it describes. He sings loudly.
2. If the verb has a direct object without a preposition,

They cross the street carefully.
the adverb should go after the object.
I quickly ran through the park.
3. If the verb is followed by a preposition and an object,
I ran quickly through the park.
you can put the adverb in different places.
I ran through the park quickly.
be smell
Exception: Adverbs are not used to describe these
seem sound
verbs. (These verbs use adjectives.)
look feel

MAD Multiple Choice
Choose the correct conjugation of each adjective.
1. interesting A. interestingily B. interestingly C. interestingally
2. new A. newly B. newally C. newily
3. dramatic A. dramatically B. dramaticly C. dramaticily
4. horrible A. horribally B. horribily C. horribly
5. straight A. straightly B. straight C. straightally
6. artistic A. artisticily B. artistically C. artisticly
7. quick A. quickally B. quickily C. quickly
8. careful A. carefully B. carefulally C. carefulily

Type each adjective as an adverb. For example: You see: quick You type: [quickly]
1. perfect [perfectly] 5. slow [slowly]
2. easy [easily] 6. sweet [sweetly]
3. sad [sadly] 7. happy [happily]
4. loose [loosely] 8. fashionable [fashionably]
SECTION 3 4-43
1
4
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
MAD Category Match
Three drivers are competing in a car race. Listen to the announcer describe the race.
Then, place each phrase under the correct driver.
Good afternoon, and welcome to the annual Speedy Car Race! My name is Chip Hansen, and
I will be your announcer this afternoon. It is a great day here at Speedway Race Track! There
are three amazingly talented drivers getting ready to begin. Driver 1 is slowly heading to the
starting line as the other two drivers are already in position. Now that all the drivers are at
the line the race is ready to start in 3, 2, 1 and they’re off! Driver 2 is quickly moving into first
place, while Driver 3 is slowly making his way into second place. Driver 1 is carefully going
into the turn. If he wants to get into second or first place, he needs to drive faster. Driver 2 is
driving especially well today as he is still in first place. Wait! What’s this? Driver 1 is suddenly
in second place. Is he going to be able to stay in second? We are in the final lap now! The
drivers are approaching the finish line. Driver 2 proudly crosses the finish line in first place.
Driver 3 happily finishes in second place with Driver 1 only seconds behind him. Driver 1
sadly takes last place. What a race!
Driver 1 Driver 2 Driver 3
driving slowly to the starting line moving quickly into first place moving slowly into second
turning carefully driving especially well finishes happily in second place
finishes sadly in third place finishes proudly in first place

MAD Open Recording
Read the statements. Give the person a command telling them what you want them to do
using an adverb.
For example: Your friend has a sad smile in the picture. Smile happily in the picture.
Your friend is so dramatic. Don’t act dramatically.
Possible Answers:
1. Your friend is driving too fast. Drive slowly.
2. Your brother is playing his music too loud. Don’t play your music loudly.
3. Your sister is talking too quiet. Don’t talk so quietly.
4. Your friend is texting while driving. Drive more carefully.
5. Your mom is wearing something outdated. Dress more fashionably.
4-44 SECTION 3
1
4
CONVERSATION
ACTIVITIES
ACTIVITY 4.3.17 - SPEAK: Where should I go?
You are in a new city and you do not know your way around. What do you do in the
following situations? Ask your partner where you should go for each situation. Then ask
where the building is located. Your partner gives you directions to the building or tells you
where the building is located using prepositions. Write the names of the buildings on your
map. Then switch roles and your partner asks the questions and you answer.
For example:
Partner A looks at his/her paper. Partner A sees “You want to find a place to learn English.”
Partner A says: I want to learn English. Where should I go? Partner B looks at map and the
buildings he/she has labeled. Where is the place where someone learns English?
Correct Answer: the school. Partner B says: You should go to the school. Partner A writes
down “the school” in the ‘Where should I go box’. Then Partner A asks: Where is the school
on the map? Partner B says: ‘‘It is on the corner of West Road and 4th Street.’’ OR ‘‘It is the 3rd
building on the right on the last street of the map’’. Partner A writes “the school” on his/her
map now. (It is already there on the map, so you can see it as the example.)
You will need to give these answers in the MAD for the next activity.
Partner A
1. You want to find a place to park your car. Where do you go? parking garage
2. You want to learn more about the history of the city. Where should you go? museum
3. It is very hot out and you want to cool off. Where do you go? swimming pool
4. You want to buy a travel book that has a city map. Where should you go? bookstore
5. You do not feel well and need a doctor. Where should you go? hospital
6. You want to take the train back home. Where do you go? train station
Partner B
7. Someone took your bike! Where do you go? police station
8. You want to buy a stamp so you can mail a postcard. What do you do? post office
9. You want to eat lunch in the park and sit on the swings. Which way do you go? playground
10. You have tickets to a movie tonight. Where do you go? cinema
11. You want to see some beautiful stained glass windows. What do you do? cathedral
12. It is evening and you need to find a place to sleep. Where should you go? hotel
SECTION 3 4-45
ACTIVITIES
ACTIVITY 4.3.17 - SPEAK: Where should I go? (Continued)
PARTNER A PARTNER B
ACTIVITY 4.3.18 - WRITE: Where is it on the map?

LAD Text Match
Match the names of the buildings with the correct letters on the map. This will tell the teacher
if you and your partner communicated the information correctly.
Word Bank
A. Train Station I. Post Office
B. Cathedral J. Police Station
C. Hotel K. Grocery Store
D. Cinema L. Theater
E. Swimming pool M. Playground
F. Gas Station N. Museum
G. Hospital O. School
H. Bookstore P. Fire Department
Q. Parking Garage
4-46 SECTION 3
1
4
READING
DIFFERENT TYPES OF TRANSPORTATION IN A CITY
When traveling in a city, there are many different ways to get around. Choosing the best method of
travel depends on many factors such as price and time. Let’s take a look at a couple of different options
and compare.
1. You can drive your car. This can be a great option if you are bringing a lot of items with you. You can easily
put everything in your car and not have to worry about carrying or dropping things. It is also a great option if
you are traveling long distances because you can be comfortable. Some negatives about driving a car are that
you can spend a long time in traffic moving very slowly and you have to drive carefully. When you get to your
location, finding parking is also very difficult. There can be many parking garages, but the price is normally
expensive for a short period of time.
2. You can take a subway. Many big cities have underground trains, or subways, that stop at different
destinations to help people get where they need to go. The subways normally run very early in the morning to
very late at night and stop many times. It is easy to get on a subway at any time of the day from many locations.
The price is also only two or three dollars per ride and helps people save money. On the other hand, you must
arrive at the right time to catch a subway. If the subway leaves at 11:10 and you are there at 11:11, you missed
your train. Then you have to wait anywhere from 10 - 20 minutes for the next one. Also, subways can break
down, and you might have to transfer to a different train or get stuck on the tracks and have to wait for help.
3. You can take a public bus. There are many bus stops on the street to get on or off. Also, there are
different buses you can take depending on where you are and want to go. The price is also only three to five
dollars every time you get on. Additionally, there are many seats and places to stand to fit a lot of people.
On the down side, buses have to travel slowly in traffic, and it can take longer to get to your destination.
If you want to get somewhere quickly, this is not a good option for you.

MAD Category Match
After reading the article, match the correct positive or negative description with the mode of
transportation in the chart below.
Car Subway Bus
- have space for your items - can get on easily during the day or at - different stops to get on or off
- good for long distances night - a lot of space to fit many people
- have to drive carefully - helps people save money because it is - price is only three to five dollars
- the price to park in a parking not expensive - not great to travel quickly
garage - have to be on time or early to get on
- might break down

MAD Open Recording
Record yourself explaining which type of transportation you take daily. Then, also explain what
type of transportation you take in a city where you live (car, subway or bus) and why.
SECTION 3 4-47
1
4
LET’S TALK!
VIDEO - LET’S GO DOWNTOWN!

MAD Viewing
same time.
Jack: Hey, Connor!
Connor: What’s up?
Jack: I have 2 tickets to the museum tomorrow if you wanna* come with.
Connor: Yeah, are you going downtown just for one museum or do you wanna maybe find
something else to do afterward since we’re driving all the way down there?
Jack: Of course, it’s a big city. What are you thinking we can do?
Connor: Um, I don’t know. There’s a lot of things to do. We could go to the beach, we could play
volleyball, go for a run, or rent a paddleboard. There also might be a baseball game at the stadium
that we could catch later on?
Jack: I like your thinking. That’s a good idea. Why don’t you look for tickets and then get back to me.
Connor: Alright, sounds good. What time would you want to go?
Jack: Well, it opens up at 10 but I kinda* wanna sleep in, so how about I come pick you up at noon?
But I don’t know where you live, so...
4-48 LET’S TALK!

1
4
LET’S TALK!
VIDEO - LET’S GO DOWNTOWN!
MAD Viewing
Connor: Alright, well it’s pretty simple. When you go out here and take a left, and then go straight
through 2 roundabouts. And at the end of the roundabouts, you go up the hill. Take a right, and it’s at
the end of the road on the left side of the street.
Jack: Okay, sweet. I think I got that.
Connor: It’s pretty simple.
Jack: I’ll see ya* then, man.
Connor: Sounds good. I’ll see ya later.
(Jack drives to pick up Connor. Connor is waiting for Jack at the end of his driveway.)
Connor: Hey!
Jack: Hey, man!
Connor: I got our tickets already, the game’s at 3 o’clock at Miller Park Stadium if that’s good for you.
Jack: Yeah, sweet, how much was the ticket?
Connor: It was cheap, dude, no worries, it’s my treat.
Jack: Oh, okay. Let’s go then.
Connor: Do you know where you’re going?
Jack: I was hoping you knew.
Connor: I know. My brother went to the university down in Milwaukee, and I know where we’re going.
It’s kind of right next to the museum, so just take the freeway down to Milwaukee.
Jack: Okay, I know how to get to Milwaukee. I don’t know which exit to get off at though.
Connor: That’s fine, we’ll worry about it when we get there. I’ll tell you.
Jack: Okay, sweet.
kinda* - Kinda can be used in informal spoken language to replace kind of.
wanna* - Wanna can be used in informal spoken language to replace want to.
LET’S TALK! 4-49

1
4
LET’S TALK!
ACTIVITIES
LT 4.2 - LISTEN
MAD Multiple Choice
Choose the best answer based on the chapter video.
1. Jack has 2 tickets for the __________ tomorrow.
A. zoo B. movies C. museum
2. What does Jack want to do before he picks up Connor? Jack wants to...
A. sleep in. B. go on a run. C. rent a paddleboard.
3. How are Jack and Connor getting downtown?
A. Jack will drive.
B. Connor’s brother will drive them.
C. Jack and Connor will ride their bikes.
4. Which directions are correct to get to Connor’s house?
A. Go straight. Take a right at the bottom of the hill. Drive straight through. His house is on
the left side of the street.
B. Turn left. Take another left at the roundabout. Go down the hill, and it’s the house on
the right side of the street.
C. Take a left, and then go straight through 2 roundabouts. At the end of the
roundabouts you go up the hill. Take a right, and it’s at the end of the road on the
left side of the street.
5. What time are they meeting to go downtown?
A. 12:00 p.m. B. 10:00 a.m. C. 3:00 p.m.
6. What did Connor’s brother do in Milwaukee?
A. He worked at Miller Park Stadium.
B. He went to the university downtown.
C. He ran a half marathon in the city.
4-50 LET’S TALK!

1
4
LET’S TALK!
ACTIVITIES
Listen to the chapter video. Fill in the blanks with the correct coordinating conjunctions.
1. “Yeah, are you going downtown for just one museum, [or] do you wanna maybe find something
else to do afterward?”
2. “Why don’t you look for tickets, [and] then get back to me.”
3. “I kinda wanna sleep in, [so] how about I come pick you up at noon?’’
4. “When you go out here [and] take a left, and then go straight through 2 roundabouts…”
5. “My brother went to the university down in Milwaukee, [and] I know where we’re going.’’
6. “It’s kind of right next to the museum, [so] just take the freeway down to Milwaukee.”

MAD Open Recording
Answer the questions about yourself related to the chapter video.
1. Do you like going to the museum? Why or why not?
2. What activities do you like to do in a city?
LET’S TALK! 4-51

1
4
LET’S TALK!
INTERVIEWS - LET’S GO TO YOUR HOUSE!
LT 4.5 - LISTEN
MAD Viewing
Jason Jack

are missing in their interview. The blanks may have more than one word. Use capitalization when
needed.
Jason: “To get to [my house], take a right onto Waukesha Avenue. [Go] straight until you get to
Bonnie Lane. Take another [right], and my house is [at] the end of the street.”
Jack: “Go [straight] until you hit the [roundabout]. Then take the [second] exit. Continue going
straight until you [turn right] onto Hamilton Drive. Then, [take] another right onto Willow View
Drive, and my house is on the left.”
4-52 LET’S TALK!

1
4
LET’S TALK!
ACTIVITIES
LT 4.7 - LISTEN
MAD Multiple Choice
Listen to the students give directions to their homes. Choose the correct answer.
1. What is the first direction Jason gives?
A. Go straight.
B. Take a left.
C. Turn right.
D. Take the first exit on the roundabout.
2. To get to Jack’s house, after you exit the roundabout, what do you do next?
A. Turn left.
B. Go straight.
C. Take a right.
3. Where is Jason’s house?
A. Bonnie Lane
B. Bonnie Road
C. Willow Tree Road
D. Willow View Drive
4. Where is Jack’s house?
A. on the right hand side
B. at the end of the street
C. on the corner
D. on the left side
5. Which is Jason’s house?
A. House E
B. House C
C. House B
D. House A
6. Which is Jack’s house?
A. House A
B. House D
C. House B
D. House E
LET’S TALK! 4-53
REVIEW: SELF-EVALUATION How well do I
Additional
Refer to...
I CAN... Practice
(Page = P.)
Review (R)
1. discuss places using the past Section 1

R. 5, 8
continuous. P. 4-8
2. use coordinating conjunctions. R. 5, 8 P. 4-12

Section 2
3. give and follow directions using R. 1, 2, 3, 5, 6,
P. 4-24
imperatives. 7, 8
P. 4-40
4. discuss getting around town using Section 3
R. 1, 5, 6, 7, 8
prepositions of movement. P. 4-28
5. use adverbs to describe verbs. R. 3, 4, 5, 8 P. 4-42
R1 - LISTENING 1
MAD Text Match
Listen to each set of directions and match where the person starts and ends.
4-54 CHAPTER 4
REVIEW ACTIVITIES
MAD Text Match
1. Police station - Ice cream shop
Start at the police station facing west. Turn left on 78th Street. At the stop sign turn right.
Enter the roundabout and take the third exit. Drive straight and the place is across the
street on the right.
2. Fire station - School
Start at the fire station facing west. Go north on 78th Street. Then, turn left at the first traffic light.
Drive straight and take your first right. Go around the roundabout and take the second street.
The place is on the left side of the second exit.
3. Hotel - Park
Exit the hotel on 77th Street. Turn right and go north. Drive around the roundabout, and take the
second exit. Drive straight to the stop sign and turn left. Drive for half a block, and the place is on
the right side.
4. Supermarket - Hospital
Exit the parking lot of the supermarket on 76th Street. Turn left and go north. At the first traffic light
turn right. Enter the roundabout and take the third exit. Go straight for a block and a half, and turn
left into the parking lot. The place is straight ahead.
R2 - LISTENING 2
Use capitalization when needed.
Emily: “[To] get to my house, take the [first] exit in the [roundabout].
Go straight, and then turn left on Chestnut Hill Road. [Go] straight, and
then [turn left] on Cherry Hill Road, and my house [is on] the right hand
[side].”
CHAPTER 4 4-55
REVIEW ACTIVITIES
R4 - GRAMMAR 2
MAD Image Match
Match each command with the correct image from the picture.
1. Don’t hit the dog! 2. Look at the map.
3. Be on time! 4. Meet me for

breakfast.
5. Look before you 6. Don’t park in front

cross the street. of the bookstore.
7. Cross the street at 8. Ride carefully in

the crosswalk. the street.
R5 - READING
Read the passage below about when Julia’s friends came to visit. Then, answer the
questions using complete sentences.
Over the summer, my friends from college came to visit me at home. When they arrived,
we decided to drive into town for a tour. I was very excited to show them where I live
because it is very different from their towns. We do not have any buses, subways, or
parking garages because it is so small. My friends live in big cities where they have bus
stations, everyone moves quickly, and downtown is very noisy! We were driving straight into
town when we passed the police station and the post office. Our town park was on the right
side of the street. The park is really fun because you can play sports like baseball or basketball.
My favorite thing at the park is the swimming pool for hot days. Then, we reached the stop
light. If you turned left, you would continue through town. If you turned right, you would leave
town. ‘‘Go left!’’ yelled my friends. As we drove straight down the road, we saw the gas
station, the bank, and the local bookstore. The supermarket and the cathedral were across
4-56 CHAPTER 4
REVIEW ACTIVITIES
the street. Our town is not very busy, so there wasn’t any traffic. We drove through the whole town
in under five minutes! As we were leaving town, my friends asked if there was anywhere else to visit.
I told them about an ice cream shop outside of town where they used fresh milk from local cows.
“Let’s go get ice cream,” said my friends, so we turned at the stop sign and drove straight there.
1. How is Julia’s town different from her friends’?

2. What were the first two places they passed when driving into town?
3. What is located at the town park?
4. What was across the street?
5. How long did it take to drive through town?
6. Where did her friends want to go after they drove through town?
Possible Answers:
1. Julia’s town does not have any buses, subways, or parking garages.
2. They passed the police station and post office.
3. The swimming pool is at the town park.
4. The supermarket and cathedral were across the street.
5. It took less than five minutes to drive through town.
6. They wanted to go to the ice cream shop.
R6 - WRITING
MAD Open Text
Use the map to type directions from the supermarket
to the police station.
R7 - SPEAKING 1
MAD Open Recording
Use the map to give directions from the playground to
the hotel.
R8 - SPEAKING 2
MAD Open Recording
Describe each picture using new vocabulary that you learned from this chapter.
CHAPTER 4 4-57
ASSESSMENT
GOOGLE MAPS
Using Google Maps, have your students explore Milwaukee, WI with the “street view.”
They need to fill out the worksheet. Allow students to work alone or with a partner. Use the
LAD Presentation Mode or a projector to show the students how to use Google Maps street
view when following directions. Take them from the Milwaukee Public Museum to the Art
Museum using the street view. They should look at the buildings and the people. Try to feel
what it is like being in Milwaukee.
PROJECT 2 (NOT IN LAB) (Optional: Refer to the Rubric Section.)

SCHOOL SCAVANGER HUNT
Create a scavenger hunt throughout your school. Use the room numbers as “building
addresses”. This takes a bit of planning but is so fun when you have your students walking
quietly through the halls following your directions from “building to building”.
For example, you could use your classroom as the starting location and have the directions
be something like this:
1. Start at the door of our classroom facing the hallway.
2. Turn to the right and walk for two “blocks”.
(Pretend that there are blocks in the hallways and each hallway is a street.)
3. At the second block, turn left and continue straight for one block.
4. Then, turn right and walk for half a block.
5. The place is on the left hand side.
4-58 CHAPTER 4
ASSESSMENT
LISTENING 1
MAD Text Match
Listen to each set of directions and match where the person starts and ends.
1. Supermarket - Apartment buildings

Leave the supermarket parking lot and go west on Park Road.
Go in the roundabout, and take the second exit.
Turn left at the traffic light, and the place is on the right.
2. Hospital - Park
Exit the hospital and go north on 55th Street.
Go straight until the first stop light.
Then, turn left.
Enter the roundabout and take the first exit.
At the stop sign turn left.
Go straight and the place is on the right side.
3. Gas station - Ice cream shop

Leave the gas station, and go north on 54th Street.
Turn right at the stop sign.
At the next stop sign, turn left.
Go north on 55th Street for two blocks.
The building is on the right past the supermarket.
4. School - Bank
Leave the school and go south on 53rd Street.
Turn left at the stop light.
Go straight and in the roundabout, take the second exit.
Go straight through the stop sign, and the place is on the left side.
CHAPTER 4 4-59
ASSESSMENT
LISTENING 2
Use capitalization when needed.
Kaitlyn: “[To get to] my house, you will [go straight] on Good
Hope Road and then take the second exit at the roundabout.
Then, [you will] continue on Good Hope Road, and turn right [on]
Hamilton Drive. Then, [turn right] on Willow View Drive, and my
house will be on the right hand [side].”
GRAMMAR 1
Complete each sentence with either a conjunction (and, but, for, or, so) or a preposition of
movement (across, around, over, past, through, to).
1. The taxi drives [through] the city looking for passengers.
2. Would you prefer to go to the pool [or] the park today?
3. I need to go to the post office [for] I do not have any stamps.
4. The parking garage is open, [so] I am going to park there.
5. The plane flew [over] the city.
6. Can we drive [to] the bank first?
7. Drive carefully when going [past] a school entrance.
8. Let’s go downtown to see a movie [and] then eat at a restaurant.
4-60 CHAPTER 4
ASSESSMENT
GRAMMAR 2
MAD Image Match
Match each command with the correct image from the picture.
1. Look before you cross 2. Get off the bus

the street. slowly.
3. Stop at the red light. 4. Drink lots of

water.
5. Don’t hit the woman 6. Park in front of the cafe.

biking!
7. Stop at the blue sign 8. Buy a book for dad’s

for the passenger. birthday.
READING
Read the passage below about a treasure hunt that Kyle went on. Then, answer the questions
using complete sentences.
I went to visit my cousins in Appleton, Wisconsin for a week during the summer. One of the best
parts about my visit was the treasure hunt my aunt made for me and my cousins. A treasure hunt
is a fun game. People get clues or notes and follow the directions to find a special treasure at the
end of the game. The first clue was, “Take me to get to downtown.” We knew right away that we
needed to take a train. My aunt drove us to the train station, and we rode into the center of
downtown. When we arrived, my aunt gave us the next clue, “I have many pages of information
and stories in my store.” We were all thinking hard when my cousin yelled, “The bookstore! Let’s go!”
We all were running for the door when my aunt told us, “Slow down! Walk carefully when we leave
the train station.” We turned left from the station and continued straight down the street for two
blocks to the bookstore. We found the next clue with my older cousin who worked there. It said,
“I have many stamps.”
CHAPTER 4 4-61
ASSESSMENT
READING (Continued)
We all knew right away that this was the post office. We exited the bookstore and went to the
stop light. We had to cross the street, but needed to wait until it was safe. Finally, we arrived at
the post office, and my aunt gave us an envelope with the next clue, but this one was different.
It had directions to a final location instead of a clue to a place. It told us to go straight on North
Mary Street, and then turn right to find our final destination. We quickly left the post office and
followed the directions to arrive at Peabody Park. We went to our favorite place in the park to
find my uncle with a picnic, yummy desserts, and different games for us to play. What a fun day!
1. What is a treasure hunt?

2. What was the location of the first clue?
3. What were the directions from the second location to the bookstore?
4. Who gave them the clue at the bookstore?
5. How was the final clue different from the other clues?
6. Where was the final destination, and what was the “treasure” waiting for them?
Possible answers:
1. A treasure hunt is a game where people get clues or notes and follow the directions to
find a special treasure at the end of the game.
2. The location of the first clue was in the center of downtown.
3. They left the train station and turned left. Then, they continued straight for two blocks.
4. Kyle’s older cousin gave them the clue.
5. The final clue had directions to the final location instead of a clue.
6. The final destination was Peabody Park, where a picnic, desserts and different games
were waiting for them.
4-62 CHAPTER 4
ASSESSMENT
WRITING
MAD Open Text
Use the map to type directions
from the apartments to the ice
cream shop.
SPEAKING 1
MAD Open Recording
Use the map to give directions
from the school to the hospital.
SPEAKING 2
MAD Open Recording
CHAPTER 4 4-63
1
5 CHAPTER FIVE
HEALTH & WELLNESS
VOCABULARY
Body Parts and Injuries ............................................. 5-4
Going to the Doctor .................................................... 5-16
It’s an Emergency ........................................................ 5-27
GRAMMAR
Reflexive Pronouns ..................................................... 5-7
Past Participles as Adjectives ................................... 5-10
Indefinite Pronouns .................................................... 5-19
The Verb Should and Ought ................................... 5-22
Present Perfect ............................................................ 5-30
Indirect Objects ........................................................... 5-33
CONVERSATION
Create a Monster ........................................................ 5-14
Monster Comparison ................................................. 5-14
Ask anyone anything! ................................................. 5-2 5-25
What should I do? ....................................................... 5-25
Have you ever? ............................................................. 5-38
Describe an illness or injury ..................................... 5-39
READING
Athlete’s Bodies: Soccer Player ................................ 5-15
Caroline Goes to the Doctor ..................................... 5-26
Band-Aids ...................................................................... 5-40
LET’S TALK!
Video - Let’s check on Skylar! ................................... 5-42
LEARNING OBJECTIVES Interviews - Let’s talk about injuries! ...................... 5-45
• discuss body parts and injuries.

REVIEW & ASSESSMENT
• use reflexive and indefinite pronouns.
Review ............................................................................ 5-47
• discuss illnesses and give recommendations. Projects .......................................................................... 5-51
Assessment ................................................................... 5-51
• use the present perfect.
• identify indirect objects and prepositional phrases.
INTRODUCTION 5-1
1
5

TEXAS
TX
Abbreviation: TX Known For: being the largest state

Nickname: The Lone Star State The Alamo
Capital City: Austin friendliness
Other Major Cities: Houston, San Antonio, Dallas, Austin, BBQ, chili
Fort Worth, El Paso, Arlington football
Population: 27.86 million (2016) Texas tea
Area: 268,597 mi² (square miles) hot weather
Flag: Houston Space Center
oil
rodeos, horses, cowboys
Gulf Coast Resorts
State Song: Texas, Our Texas The King Ranch
State Bird: Northern Mockingbird Tyler Municipal Rose Garden
State Flower: Bluebonnet Dallas Cowboys (NFL)

1. In Chapter 4, you learned about transportation. Using the google transit map,
find routes from Dallas to University Park. A few options should show up.
Discuss these options. Go to other cities and look at the information you can get
from this map.
2. In Texas, sports are a way of life. Research one of the professional sports teams
or the rodeo. Write down 5 interesting facts that you read about the sport or
team. Talk about this as a class.
5-2 INTRODUCTION
1
5
VOCABULARY
SECTION 1 VOCABULARY: Body Parts and Injuries
Parts of the Body Verbs
the ankle the foot (feet) the throat to ache to hurt (hurt)
the arm the hand the toe to break (broke) to get hurt
the back the head the tooth (teeth) to cut (cut) to injure
the body the heart the wrist to fall (fell) the injury
the brain the knee to fall down to sprain
the chest the leg to heal
the face the neck to be healed
the finger the stomach
SECTION 2 VOCABULARY: Going to the Doctor

Illnesses At the Doctor Recommendations
the ache the illness the appointment It is important...
the earache sick to check to be careful
the headache to be sick the dentist to exercise
the stomachache to get sick the doctor (Dr.) to lie down (lay)
the toothache to feel sick to give (gave) to rest
to be ill; to feel ill to sneeze the medicine the rest
the cold the sneeze the nurse to sit (sat)
to cough the symptom to take care of someone; to sleep (slept)
the cough to look after someone to stand (stood)
to feel the temperature to wash (up)
the flu to take someone’s temperature to wash with soap
to have a fever the waiting room
SECTION 3 VOCABULARY: It’s an Emergency

In the Hospital Adjectives Other Words and Phrases
the accident to hear (heard) able weak Feel better soon!
the ambulance the pain alone worried Get well soon!
the bandage; Band-Aid to be in pain bad; terrible I am sorry for your loss.
the blood the problem brave I am sorry to hear that.
to bleed (bled) fast Ouch!; Ow!
the danger lucky That hurts!
dangerous ready What happened?
to die sure
to be dead strong
INTRODUCTION 5-3
1
5
VOCABULARY
BODY PARTS AND INJURIES

MAD Open Recording


MAD Pronunciation
1. He was running and hurt his ankle. 6. How did you hurt yourself?
2. My tooth fell out last night! 7. I want a cup of tea because my throat hurts.
3. Did you sprain your wrist? 8. My feet ache because I walked all day.
4. The injury hurt a lot. 9. She broke her finger when she fell.
5. The cut on my knee is now healed. 10. Learning English makes my brain hurt.
5-4 SECTION 1
1
5
VOCABULARY
ACTIVITIES
MAD Letter Jumble
1. the stomache 2. yourself 3. the injury 4. the heart
5. the body 6. the neck 7. the finger 8. to fall

For each number, write the body part that it is indicating.
1. [the head]
2. [the eye]
3. [the ear]
4. [the nose]
5. [the chest]
6. [the arm]
7. [the knee]
8. [the leg]
9. [the hand]
10. [the mouth]

MAD Image Match
Listen to what happened to each person. Then, match each description with the correct image.
My mom was teaching Last night I slept well,

1. me how to ride my bike. 2. but when I got out of
I turned too quickly and bed my back was aching.
fell off. I hurt my leg.
I love to run every day. I played football for

Yesterday I was running years. I had to stop
3. 4.
and hurt my knee. It is because of a brain
now sprained. injury.
SECTION 1 5-5
1
5
VOCABULARY
ACTIVITIES
MAD Image Match
My friend was going fast I was running and
5. down the stairs. She fell 6. not wearing shoes.
and hurt her back. I broke my toe.
I broke my foot and hurt I fell off of my

my knee because I fell bicycle and got a
7. 8.
going downstairs. big cut on my face.

Listen to the children’s song that kids learn about body parts. Write the words that you hear.
First verse:
[head], shoulders, [knees] and [toes], [knees] and [toes] ♫ Sung twice
[eyes] and [ears] and [mouth] and [nose]
[head], shoulders, [knees] and [toes], [knees] and [toes]
Second verse:
[arms], [stomach], [feet] and chin, [feet] and chin ♫ Sung twice
[eyes] and [ears] and [mouth] and shin
[arms], [stomach], [feet] and chin, [feet] and chin

MAD Open Recording
Use the verb to say a sentence including a body part. Use any verb tense.
1. to break 2. to cut 3. to hurt 4. to sprain
5. to injure 6. to fall 7. to ache 8. to heal
5-6 SECTION 1
1
5
GRAMMAR
REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS
Reflexive pronouns are used when the subject is doing the action and is also receiving the action of
the verb. They either end in -self, for singular, or -selves, for plural.
Examples of reflexives: Frank cut himself on accident while cooking yesterday.

We injured ourselves in the car accident.
Susan wrapped her ankle by herself when she sprained it.
Pronoun Reflexive Pronoun

I myself
you yourself
he himself
she herself
it itself
we ourselves
you (plural) yourselves
they themselves

Fill in each blank with the correct reflexive pronoun.
1. I hurt [myself] yesterday at the playground.
2. Did you cut [yourself] while making dinner?
3. The boys injured [themselves] outside.
4. Did he hurt [himself] at the football game?
5. Helen injured [herself] at her volleyball game.
6. The dog hurt [itself] because he ran too fast.
7. My sister and I injured [ourselves] at the basketball competition.
SECTION 1 5-7
1
5
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
MAD Word Jumble
1. I was cutting vegetables when I cut myself with the knife.
2. I sprained my wrist and it healed itself in two weeks.
3. Did you injure yourself?
4. They applauded themselves after a great game.
5. Austin drew himself for his art project.
6. Did she go shopping by herself?
7. I made myself a necklace.
8. Did you cook yourself dinner?

MAD Multiple Choice
Read the conversation between Melanie and Tessa. They are camping and talking about
injuries. Fill in the blanks with the correct reflexive pronoun.
Melanie: Have you ever hurt __________ badly?
Tessa: Yes, once. I was 14 years old and hurt __________ while riding my bike.
Melanie: What did you do?
Tessa: I broke my right wrist, hand and finger.
Melanie: That sounds awful. My brother hurt __________ badly like that once. I never have
though.
Tessa: You never broke a bone before?
Melanie: No. Worst thing that I have done is cut myself.
Tessa: How did you do that?
Melanie: I was helping my dad cook dinner. I was cutting the onion and cut __________ instead.
Tessa: Ouch.
Melanie: Yeah. I cut a little bit of my finger off and had to go to the hospital. My dad drove me
to the hospital. My mom was at work and drove __________ there to meet us.
Tessa: Yuck. I never want to be a doctor. I do not like it when people hurt __________.
Melanie: I like helping people. I want to be a doctor or nurse.
Tessa: Well, let’s try to be careful. We don’t want to hurt __________ while we are camping.
You aren’t a doctor yet and there are not many people around to help us.
Melanie: Good idea. A small cut can heal __________. A big cut, sprain or break is a different story.
At least there is a hospital about 20 minutes away from here. That isn’t too far.
5-8 SECTION 1
1
5
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
MAD Multiple Choice
1. Melanie: Have you ever hurt __________ badly?
A. myself B. yourself C. herself
2. Tessa: Yes, once. I was 14 years old and hurt __________ while riding my bike.
3. Melanie: That sounds awful. My brother hurt __________ badly like that once. I never have though.
A. myself B. yourself C. himself
4. Melanie: I was helping my dad cook dinner. I was cutting the onion and cut __________ instead.
A. myself B. itself C. himself
5. Melanie: My mom was at work and drove __________ there to meet us.
6. Tessa: Yuck. I could never be a doctor. I do not like it when people hurt __________.
A. himself B. themselves C. herself
7. Tessa: We don’t want to hurt __________ while we are camping.
A. myself B. yourself C. ourselves
8. Melanie: Good idea. A small cut can heal __________.
A. myself B. yourself C. itself

Say a statement that describes what happened to each person using the past simple and a
reflexive pronoun.
For example: You see: You say: Jane hurt herself.
Possible answers:
Andy and I hurt ourselves. I injured myself. Matt hurt himself.
Rose cut herself. The girls hurt themselves. You injured yourself.
SECTION 1 5-9
1
5
GRAMMAR
PAST PARTICIPLES AS ADJECTIVES
Past Participles can be used as adjectives. They can describe how someone feels.
For example: I am bored.
Past Participles can also describe the state or condition of a thing.
For example: My leg is injured.
Formation of Past Participles
Present Simple Past Simple

1. First, choose the correct form of the
verb be and the correct tense (present
I am I was
simple or past simple).
You are You were
*to review complete rules of the:
He / She / It is He / She / It was
present simple go to page ___________
We / They are We / They were
past simple go to page ___________
For example:
2. If the verb is regular, add d or ed to the injure → injured (My ankle is injured.)
base form of the verb to form the past sprain → sprained (My wrist is sprained.)
participle.
Examples of irregular past participles that are used

3. If the verb is irregular, you will need to as adjectives in this chapter:
know the memorized irregular form. break → broken feel → felt sleep → asleep
*See the chart ___________ cut → cut hear → heard take → taken
die → dead hurt → hurt
fall → fallen lie → lain
For example: My knee is sprained. His foot is broken.
5-10 SECTION 1
1
5
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
MAD Multiple Choice
Choose the correct past participle form of each verb.
1. to sprain A. sprayn B. sprain C. sprained
2. to cook A. cooked B. cookded C. cook
3. to break A. breaked B. broked C. broken
4. to need A. need B. needed C. ned
5. to hurt A. hurted B. hurt C. hurtd
6. to wash A. wash B. washed C. washd
7. to sleep A. sleep B. slept C. asleep
8. to fall A. fallen B. falled C. fell

MAD Image Match
Listen to each person describe an injury they received. Then, match the injury with the name
of the person who received the injury.
1. My name is Joshua. I was playing with my friends and now my head is hurt.
2. My name is Ben. Yesterday, I was running down a hill and fell. My knee is hurt.
3. My name is Jose. I was climbing a tree and fell. My leg is broken.
4. My name is Dorothy. I enjoy riding my bike daily, but the other day I fell off and now my wrist
is broken.
5. My name is Patrick. I was playing football and I took a hard hit to the knee. It is sprained.
6. My name is Kimberly. This morning I went running and injured myself. I think my ankle is sprained.
Ben Dorothy Kimberly Joshua Jose Patrick
SECTION 1 5-11
1
5
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
Change each past simple statement into a statement that uses the past participle as an
adjective.
For example: You see: My sister sprained her wrist.
You type: [My sister’s wrist is sprained.]
1. I injured my knee. [My knee is injured.]
2. Michael broke his arm. [Michael’s arm is broken.]
3. Lisa hurt her neck. [Lisa’s neck is hurt.]
4. Anthony cut his finger. [Anthony’s finger is cut.]
5. Karen injured her foot. [Karen’s foot is injured.]
6. Paul washed his hands. [Paul’s hands are washed.]
7. My hand healed. [My hand is healed.]
8. Jack sprained his ankle. [Jack’s ankle is sprained.]

MAD Sentence Jumble
Put the story in the correct order.
Yesterday, my friends and I went for a run.
We were running on a trail in the woods.
Suddenly, I tripped on a rock.
I fell and hurt myself.
My left wrist is now injured.
I don’t think it is broken or sprained.
However, it does hurt a lot.
Also, my left knee is cut.
It didn’t bleed too much, but I am in pain.
We went home after I got the injury.
5-12 SECTION 1
1
5
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
MAD Open Recording
Use the words given to say a complete sentence describing the condition of a body part.
For example: You see: Laura / the back / to injure
You say: Laura’s back is injured.
Possible answers:
1. Steve / the ankle / to sprain Steve’s ankle is sprained.
2. I / the leg / to break My leg is broken.
3. Helen / the toes / to hurt Helen’s toes are hurt.
4. Frank / the head / to injure Frank’s head is injured.
5. Emma / the hand / to cut Emma’s hand is cut.
6. Tyler / the teeth / to brush Tyler’s teeth are brushed.
7. Alan / the back / to heal Alan’s back is healed.
SECTION 1 5-13
1
5
CONVERSATION
ACTIVITIES
ACTIVITY 5.1.18 - SPEAK: Create a Monster
For this activity, you are going to practice using the body part vocabulary. You need to draw
a monster with as many body parts as you can. For example, you could draw two heads, 6
arms, 3 legs, etc. Then, Partner 1 describes his/her monster to Partner 2 who is going to
draw it. When Partner 1 is finished describing his/her monster, then Partner 2 describes
his/hers, so Partner 1 can draw it. When the descriptions and drawings are complete, you
and your partner are going to show each other the monsters to compare.
ACTIVITY 5.1.19 - SPEAK: Monster Comparison

MAD Open Video or Class Presentation
You and your partner are going to compare the monsters that each of you drew. Discuss
how similar or different the monsters are. Did each partner draw all the correct body parts?
Record a video in the MAD talking about the differences between your monster picture and
your partner’s monster picture. Show the picture as well. OR Present to the class with your
partner.
5-14 SECTION 1
1
5
READING
ATHLETES’ BODIES: SOCCER PLAYER
The human body is a combination of different parts that work together to help us do anything we
want to do. Just talking on the phone involves your brain, your arm, your hand, your fingers, your mouth,
your tongue, your lungs, and more! Everyone uses their bodies in different ways, but athletes work their
bodies in special ways. Depending on the sport they are playing, different parts of the body work harder
than others. Let’s talk about the different body parts a soccer player uses.
Soccer is a game where you kick a ball with your feet, but cannot use your hands or arms. Therefore,
if you play soccer, you need to have quick feet and strong legs to kick. When the ball is coming to you,
instead of catching it with your hands, you can use your chest to stop the ball. After, you can use your feet,
legs, and knees to continue moving the ball towards the goal. Finally, if the ball is really high in the air, you
can use your head to hit the ball. Be careful that the ball doesn’t hit your face because that can really hurt.
It is a really fun game, but you have to work hard not to use your hands and to score a goal.
A soccer player would need to be in good shape to protect himself or herself from an injury. For example,
an athlete was injured when she fell while taking the ball from another player. She cut her leg and needed
to go to the doctor to get stitches to help her get better. It is also possible to break a bone if you run into
another player. In addition, you could fall and sprain your ankle or muscles in your foot or leg. While
there are many ways to hurt the different parts of the body, athletes work hard, exercise, and protect
themselves while playing. Most of the time, they play a great game and hopefully win!

MAD Multiple Choice
Decide if the statements are true or false based on the reading.
1. When you do something like talking on the phone or eating dinner, you only use two or three
parts of your body. A. True B. False
2. When you play soccer, you can’t use your hands. A. True B. False
3. You can use your knees to catch the ball when you play soccer. A. True B. False
4. An athlete needs to be in good shape to protect his or her body. A. True B. False
5. A soccer player can sprain a muscle in their foot, ankle, or leg. A. True B. False
6. An athlete always gets hurt when they play a sport. A. True B. False

MAD Open Recording
You just read about the different parts of the body soccer players use. Think of a sport you
played in the past or play now. What parts of your body do you use while you play? Record
yourself explaining what body parts you use and why when you play your sport.
SECTION 1 5-15
1
5
VOCABULARY
GOING TO THE DOCTOR

MAD Open Recording


MAD Pronunciation
1. Drink water if you have a headache. 6. I don’t feel good, I need to lie down.
2. My cough is worse than yesterday. 7. Last week, my sister had the flu.
3. Make an appointment. 8. I will take care of you.
4. What are his symptoms? 9. It is important to exercise often.
5. She has a bad illness. 10. Gabrielle has a fever.
5-16 SECTION 2
1
5
VOCABULARY
ACTIVITIES
MAD Letter Jumble
1. the medicine 2. to check 3. the earache 4. the cold
5. to sneeze 6. to feel sick 7. the cough 8. to lie down

MAD Multiple Choice
Read each scenario and choose the most appropriate recommendation.
1. It is time for dinner.
A. Exercise. B. Rest. C. Wash up.
2. Students sit all day at school. It is important to...
A. sleep. B. stand when they can. C. be careful.
3. I think I have a fever.
A. Take your temperature. B. Stand. C. Be sick.
4. My tooth hurts.
A. Call the doctor. B. Sneeze. C. Call the dentist.
5. When you walk to school, it is important to…
A. be careful. B. lie down. C. sleep.
6. You have an earache. It is important to…
A. exercise. B. feel ill. C. take the medicine.
7. When you have the stomach flu, it is important to...
A. eat often. B. rest. C. go for a hike.
8. My brother fell and hurt his knee. It is important to...
A. wash it with soap. B. stand. C. take his temperature.
9. My head feels funny.
A. Go for a run. B. Exercise. C. Lie down.
10. When you have a bad cough. It is important to…
A. sneeze. B. take cough medicine. C. cough a lot.
SECTION 2 5-17
1
5
VOCABULARY
ACTIVITIES
MAD Image Match
Listen to Tony’s story. Then, match the ordinal number with the correct picture.
This morning, I was feeling sick.
My dad called the doctor to make an appointment.
I went to her office at 11:00 a.m.
I told her that I had an earache.
She checked my ear.
Then, she gave me some medicine.
I went home and lay down to rest.
Sixth Seventh Second Fifth Fourth First Third

You are in the doctor’s office. Answer the doctor’s questions about your symptoms.
Use the prompts in your answer. Prompts:
1. How are you feeling? sick
2. What are your symptoms? cough, fever
3. Did you take your temperature? 102
4. How long did you have the cough? 7 days
5. Would you like medicine to feel better quickly? yes
CULTURAL NOTE
Doctor vs. Dr.
“Dr.” is simply an abbreviation for the title “Doctor.” You can use it as a title when addressing
someone. For example, Dr. Marsha Flynn. It is respectful and customary to use “Dr.” as part
of their full title. You don’t spell out “Doctor Marsha Flynn” though in this case. Use the full
word “doctor” when you refer to a medical profession in general. For example: “I am looking
for a doctor who specializes in treating athletes.” Remember, there are lots of different kinds
of doctors! When people earn a doctoral degree also called a phD, they are doctors of that
profession and can place “Dr.” in front of their names.
5-18 SECTION 2
1
5
GRAMMAR
INDEFINITE PRONOUNS
Indefinite pronouns are pronouns that do not refer to a specific person, place, or thing.
Pronouns that end in -one or -body refer to people
* -one is a more formal version, while -body is more informal
Pronouns that end in -thing are for things.
Pronouns that end in -where are for location.
For example:
Definite Pronoun Indefinite Pronoun
Jack made the doctor’s appointment. Someone made the doctor’s appointment.
Base Word Use Indefinite Pronoun Example
Used to describe someone Can someone please help me?

unspecified somebody Somebody has a cough.
some
quantities or somewhere I have a pain somewhere in my leg.
unknown things something I need something to reduce my fever.
everyone Everyone should try to sleep 8 hours a night.

Used to describe everybody Everybody needs to drink 8 glasses of water a day.
every a complete
quantity or all everywhere Germs can be everywhere, so wash your hands!
everything Tell your doctor everything you are feeling.
anyone Anyone who feels ill should get some rest.

Used to describe anybody Anybody can get the flu.
any any one person, anywhere You can sit anywhere in the waiting room.
place, or thing I went to the doctor to see if they could do
anything
anything about my stomachache.
no one No one is sick.

Used to nobody Nobody has a toothache.
no describe an
nowhere My son goes nowhere but bed when he is sick.
absence
nothing I have nothing to give you for your fever.
Negative
The only indefinite pronouns that can be used in the negative form are anyone, anybody, anywhere,
and anything.
For example:
I don’t (do not) have anything for my cold. We can’t (can not) go anywhere until your fever is gone.
SECTION 2 5-19
1
5
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
MAD Multiple Choice
Choose the best indefinite pronoun to complete each sentence.
1. Can __________ look after Charlotte? She is sick.
A. someone B. everything C. anywhere D. nobody
2. I looked __________ and I can’t find my medicine.
A. nobody B. something C. everywhere D. anything
3. I’m sorry, but I have __________ to give you for your headache.
A. everybody B. nothing C. anywhere D. something
4. __________ seems to be sick!
A. Everyone B. Anything C. Somewhere D. Nothing
5. It is important to listen to __________ the doctor says.
A. somebody B. anyone C. nothing D. everything
6. Is __________ here a nurse?
A. somewhere B. anyone C. everything D. nowhere
7. Don’t go __________ today. You need to get some rest!
A. nowhere B. anywhere C. something D. everybody
8. Does __________ have an illness?
A. no one B. everything C. somebody D. anything
9. Asher needs __________ for his earache.
A. everybody B. nowhere C. anything D. something
10. __________ can take someone’s temperature.
A. Anyone B. Nobody C. Everything D. Somewhere

MAD Word Jumble
1. Nobody got hurt at the park.
2. Is anybody in the waiting room?
3. The nurse speaks to everybody before the doctor does.
4. Do you have anything for a headache?
5. I don’t want to go anywhere today.
6. We looked everywhere for the medicine.
7. Can someone drive me to see the doctor?
8. Do you know how to take someone’s temperature?
5-20 SECTION 2
1
5
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
Complete the phone conversation between Sarah and Ashley with the correct indefinite
pronoun from the word bank. *Use capitalization when needed.
everyone nowhere someone anything somewhere
something nothing anywhere nobody everywhere
Sarah: Hi, Ashley! It’s Sarah. I am calling to see if you would like to go see a movie with me tonight.
Ashley: I would love to, but I am sick and I feel like going [nowhere].
Sarah: Too bad. It seems like [everyone] is sick. [Nobody] that I called can go. What illness do you
have?
Ashley: I’ve got the flu. [Nothing] is making me feel better right now.
Sarah: I’m sorry to hear that. Is there [anything] that I can do for you?
Ashley: Thank you, but I do not want you to come [anywhere] near me. This is a horrible illness.
Sarah: What are your symptoms?
Ashley: I have a fever of 103 and my body aches [everywhere].
Sarah: That is terrible. Is [someone] there to take care of you?
Ashley: Yeah. My mom is here with me. Well, I am feeling a little hungry so I am going to try to eat
[something] and then rest [somewhere] where I can’t hear my little brother.
Sarah: Ok. Feel better soon.
Ashley: Thank you. Bye.
ACTIVITY 5.2.11 - LISTEN & READ & SPEAK

Listen to the question and say the best response in the recording pause provided.
1. Where do you want to go on vacation? Anywhere! I just need to rest and have fun.
2. Whom do you want to call for help? Someone at the hospital. I had a bad accident.
3. What do you want to do for dinner? Let’s go somewhere to eat instead of cooking.
4. Whom do you want to tell? Nobody. I am embarrassed about my accident.
5. What do you want to help the pain? Nothing. I am not in a lot of pain.
6. Who should go to the doctor? Anyone who is not feeling well or wants to catch an illness.
SECTION 2 5-21
1
5
GRAMMAR
SHOULD / OUGHT TO
Should and ought to are modals used to describe obligations or advice. Both words mean the same
thing, but should is used more commonly, while ought to is more formal.
Should = Ought to
Should and ought to are located after the subject of the sentence but before the infinitive.
For example:
Subject + should / ought to + infinitive + other information
You should eat more fruits and vegetables to stay healthy.
You ought to eat more fruits and vegetables to stay healthy.
You should go to the dentist every 6 months.

You ought to go to the dentist every 6 months.
Negative
To form the negative of should, you need to add the word not. It can be a contraction as well.
For example: I should not exercise this week.
I shouldn’t exercise this week.
To form the negative of ought to, you need to add the word not.
For example: You ought not to exercise this week.
Questions
To form questions, only use should. Questions using ought to are very formal and not used often.
For example:
Should + subject + infinitive + other information
Should he take medicine tonight?
Shouldn’t we check with the doctor?
What should I bring to the hospital?
5-22 SECTION 2
1
5
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
MAD Word Jumble
1. You ought to call the doctor about that cough.
2. Noah should lie down to rest.
3. How often should Emily take her medicine?
4. The nurse ought to take Jacob’s temperature.
5. The children ought to take care of their grandparents.
6. I should feel better by tomorrow.
7. Should I take care of him today?
8. You should not exercise too hard.

MAD Category Match
Listen to each person describe an illness or injury. Then, match the illness/injury with the correct
recommendations for the person.
My name is Zoe. Last night, I was playing soccer. I ran into another girl and fell down. My ankle is
in a lot of pain right now.
My name is Nathan. Today, I feel ill. I am really cold and my body aches. My mom took my
temperature and it is 101 degrees Fahrenheit.
My name is Alex. I have a headache. I’m coughing and sneezing all the time.
Zoe Nathan Alex
has a sprained ankle has a fever has a cold
should see a doctor to check should take some cough

should drink some hot tea
it out medicine
should take some pain
should lie down and rest should drink a lot of water
medicine
SECTION 2 5-23
1
5
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
MAD Sentence Jumble
Put the conversation between Wyatt and his doctor in the correct order.
Doctor: Good afternoon, Wyatt. How are you feeling today?
Wyatt: Not very well. I feel really sick.
Doctor: Can you tell me about your symptoms?
Wyatt: Well, I am coughing and sneezing a lot. My right ear also hurts.
Doctor: I ought to listen to your chest and check your ears.
Wyatt: Ok. What should I do about my earache?
Doctor: Well, your ear does look a little red. You should take some pain medicine.
Wyatt: Pain medicine? Okay. Anything else I should do?
Doctor: You ought to drink a lot of water and rest.
Wyatt: Do you recommend cough medicine?
Doctor: You ought to take cough medicine when you need it.
Wyatt: Ok. Thank you for checking my symptoms.

MAD Open Recording
Lucy is sick. Give her recommendations for what she should/ought to do.
5-24 SECTION 2
1
5
CONVERSATION
ACTIVITIES
ACTIVITY 5.2.16 - SPEAK: Ask anyone anything!
LAD Pairing Activity (Groups of 3)
Take turns asking and answering questions using indefinite pronouns. You are given four
questions to ask and then you have to come up with one question on your own. Make sure to
use an indefinite pronoun. Write down what your partner says so you can tell his/her answer
in the MAD for the next activity.
QUESTIONS PARTNER 1 PARTNER 2
You can go anywhere in the world. Where do
you want to go? Why?
You can buy anything for someone’s birthday.
What do you buy? Why?
You can help anyone feel better. Whom do you
help? Why?
You can take anyone on vacation with you.
Whom do you take? Why?
Your question:

MAD Open Recording
Pick one answer you liked the best from each partner. Say their answer in your own words.
Lastly, read the extra question that you asked your partners.
ACTIVITY 5.2.18 - SPEAK: What should I do?

In pairs, you are going to take turns playing the role of doctor and sick person. Use the
symptoms provided when speaking with the doctor. The doctor will listen to the symptoms
and then give recommendations on what the person should do.
PARTNER A’s Symptoms PARTNER B’s Symptoms
fever feel cold body aches coughing sneezing throat hurts
Recommendations for PARTNER B Recommendations for PARTNER A
SECTION 2 5-25
1
5
READING
CAROLINE GOES TO THE DOCTOR

MAD Multiple Choice
Based on Caroline’s form, choose the best answer to each question.
1. Which city does Caroline live in?
A. Dallas B. Texas C. Clementine
2. What is the last name of the doctor she is seeing?
A. Monroe B. Stevens C. Texas
3. Which symptom does she NOT have?
A. fever B. cough C. vomiting
4. Where does she NOT have pain?
A. head B. hands C. ear
5. When did Caroline start to feel sick?
A. Monday B. Sunday C. yesterday
6. What has Caroline NOT taken to help her symptoms?
A. cough drops B. pain medicine C. sore throat medicine
7. Who is Caroline’s first emergency contact?
A. her dad B. her mom C. Dr. Monroe
MAD Open Recording
Pretend you are Caroline and tell the doctor what your symptoms are, when they started, and
what you are doing to help them.
5-26 SECTION 2
1
5
VOCABULARY
IT’S AN EMERGENCY

MAD Open Recording


MAD Pronunciation
1. Thankfully my grandfather did not die. 6. The hospital is full of worried parents.
2. Feel better soon. 7. It is dangerous to drive in a bad storm.
3. The ambulance arrived at the accident. 8. What is the problem?
4. Her back was in pain for she slept wrong. 9. I am sorry to hear that.
5. Are you able to walk? 10. The nurse put a bandage on my arm.
SECTION 3 5-27
5 ACTIVITIES
CULTURAL NOTE
911
When emergencies happen, you want to get help quickly. That’s why 911 was made.
In the United States, you simply call 911 if there is an emergency where you need the fire
department, police department, or an ambulance to go to the hospital. The emergency
dispatcher who answers the phone can tell where you’re calling from, and he or she is trained
in how to best respond, what emergency service is needed, and how to get help to you as
quickly as possible.
Never call 911 as a joke or to see what happens. You can get a ticket and have to pay money
to the city. The only time you should call 911 is if someone is hurt or in danger. This might
include a car accident, a crime, someone who is having a medical emergency, or a house on
fire.

MAD Letter Jumble
1. the hospital 2. terrible 3. to be dead 4. What happened
5. Get well soon 6. worried 7. dangerous 8. the bandage
MAD Text Match
Match the sentence starter with the correct ending.
1. Are you sure you are feeling better?
2. I heard that Leo is really sick.
3. The hospital is next to the police station.
4. There was a lot of blood.
5. What is the problem?
6. Audrey’s parents are worried about her.
7. I am sorry for your loss.
8. Jacob took care of his baby sister.
9. Your nose is bleeding.
10. Is he able to drive?
Class activity
5-28 SECTION 3
1
5
VOCABULARY
ACTIVITIES
Complete each blank with an adjective from the word bank.
lucky worried alone able weak

dangerous terrible ready sure fast
1. Are you [able] to walk on your broken foot?

2. I have a [terrible] headache!
3. The mother is [worried] about her son’s illness.
4. The stomach flu makes me feel [weak].
5. Caleb drove too [fast] and got in an accident.
6. Don’t go to the hospital [alone]. I can drive you.
7. Are you [sure] you are feeling okay?
8. You are very [lucky] that you didn’t die in the accident.
9. Is Nora [ready] to go to her doctor appointment?
10. It can be [dangerous] if someone has a very high fever.

Say the best response for each scenario. Choose from the following responses:
Feel better soon.; Get well soon!; I am sorry for your loss.; I am sorry to hear that.;
Ouch! That hurts. You can only use each response one time. Answers may vary.
1. You heard that your friend’s grandmother died. What should you say to him?
I’m sorry for your loss.
2. You heard that your little sister broke her arm. What should you say to her?
Ouch! That hurts.
3. You heard that your dad has a terrible stomachache. What should you say to him?
Get well soon! OR Feel better soon.
4. You heard that your friend can’t go to the movies with you because she is sick. What should
you say to her? Get well soon! OR Feel better soon.
5. You heard that your friend got in a car accident and he has to buy a new car.
I am sorry to hear that.
SECTION 3 5-29
1
5
GRAMMAR
PRESENT PERFECT
The present perfect is used to discuss what someone has done.
Uses of the present perfect Examples

1. It is used to describe events that happened
in the past and are still true now because you She has been sick for a week.
can see the result.
2. It is used to describe experiences in one’s life. She and I have exercised together for years.
3. It is also used to describe events that started

We have been seeing this doctor for 10 years now.
in the past and are still happening now.
Formation of the Present Perfect

Positive
I / you / we / they have / ‘ve
past participle
he / she / it has / ‘s
For example:
I have sprained my ankle twice. OR I’ve sprained my ankle twice.
He has fallen. OR He’s fallen.
Negative
I / you / we / they have not / haven’t / ‘ve not
past participle
he / she / it has not / hasn’t / ‘s not
For example:
I have not broken a body part. OR I haven’t broken a body part.
My family has not been to the hospital yet. OR My family hasn’t been to the hospital yet.
Questions
Have I / you / we / they
past participle?
Has he / she / it
For example:
Have you been resting? Has she had a high temperature?
*The word ever is often used in present perfect questions. It is placed after the subject in the question.
For example: Have you ever broken your ankle? Has he ever had an earache?
5-30 SECTION 3
1
5
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
MAD Multiple Choice
Choose the correct conjugation for each verb in the present perfect.
1. you / to sprain
A. you have sprained B. you has sprained C. you sprained
2. my grandpa / to die
A. my grandpa died B. my grandpa has died C. my grandpa have died
3. they / to sit
A. they has sat not B. they have not sat C. they sat not
4. Lila / to bleed
A. Lila has bled B. Lila bled C. Lila have bled
5. we / to wash
A. we washed B. we has washed C. we have washed
6. I / to rest
A. I rested not B. I have not rested C. I has not rested
7. the nurse / to take
A. the nurse has taken B. the nurse have taken C. the nurse has took
8. the girls / to exercise
A. the girls exercised B. the girls has exercised C. the girls have exercised

Fill in each blank with the present perfect conjugation of each verb based on the subject
given. For example: You see: I / to injure You type: [I have injured]
1. they / to be in pain [they have been in pain]
2. she / to hear [she has heard]
3. I / to feel ill [I have felt ill]
4. my uncle / to die [my uncle has died]
5. Judy / to bleed [Judy has bled]
6. he / to sprain [he has sprained]
7. we / to wash up [we have washed up]
8. Dylan / to lie down [Dylan has lain down]
SECTION 3 5-31
1
5
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
Rewrite the past simple statements in the present perfect. Do not use contractions.
For example: You see: My brother was ill for a week.
You type: [My brother has been ill for a week.]
1. The ambulance arrived at the hospital. [The ambulance has arrived at the hospital.]
2. Jake died in a car accident. [Jake has died in a car accident.]
3. The doctor washed his hands. [The doctor has washed his hands.]
4. Sam did not break his arm. [Sam has not broken his arm.]
5. Michelle did not have a fever. [Michelle has not had a fever.]
6. My knee ached for two days. [My knee has ached for two days.]
7. The nurse took care of her. [The nurse has taken care of her.]
8. My sister felt weak. [My sister has felt weak.]

Answer each personal question using the present perfect in a complete sentence.
1. Have you ever broken a body part? If so, which?
2. Have you visited someone in a hospital? If so, whom?
3. Have you taken care of someone? If so, of whom?
4. Have you ever had an earache?
5. Have you ever been in a car accident?

Listen to the past simple sentences and repeat them using the present perfect.
For example: You hear: I went to the hospital. You say: I have gone to the hospital.
You hear: Did you go to the doctor? You say: Have you gone to the doctor?
1. I was ill for a week. I have been ill for a week.
2. Did the nurse take your temperature? Has the nurse taken your temperature?
3. Molly sprained her ankle. Molly has sprained her ankle.
4. Did the kids wash up with soap? Have the kids washed up with soap?
5. The doctor gave him medicine. The doctor has given him medicine.
6. Did Emmett make an appointment? Has Emmett made an appointment?
5-32 SECTION 3
1
5
GRAMMAR
INDIRECT OBJECTS (Dative Case)
I.O. = INDIRECT OBJECT
The indirect object answers the question
The INDIRECT OBJECT is a noun or a pronoun.
‘To or for whom is receiving the action of
It is a person or thing indirectly receiving the action of the verb?’
the verb.
For example: The doctor gave Jeff medicine. (Ask: To or for whom is the medicine being given?)
Indirect Object = Jeff
The indirect object comes before the direct object of the sentence.
Indirect object pronouns are used to replace indirect object nouns.
Once someone has established a noun, we can use a pronoun instead to not be repetitive.
For example: Jeff needed something for his cough. The doctor gave Jeff the medicine.
= Jeff needed something for his cough. The doctor gave him the medicine.
Instead of using an indirect object, you can also use a prepositional phrase with to/for.
The noun is then called the object of the preposition because it is the object in the prepositional
phrase. It still answers the question To whom? Or For whom?
For example: The doctor gave Jeff the medicine can also be written as follows:
The doctor gave him the medicine. OR The doctor gave the medicine to him.
I.O. prepositional phrase
My mom bought me soup. OR My mom bought soup for me.
I.O. prepositional phrase
SUBJECT PRONOUNS DIRECT OBJECT PRONOUNS INDIRECT OBJECT PRONOUNS

(Norminative Case) (Accusative Case) (Dative Case)
I me me
you you you
he him him
she her her
it it it
we us us
they them them
SECTION 3 5-33
1
5
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
MAD Multiple Choice
Choose the indirect object noun of each statement.
1. The nurse gave Silas a bandage.
A. the nurse B. a bandage
C. Silas D. gave
2. Jessica has told the doctor her symptoms.
A. her symptoms B. the doctor
C. Jessica D. has told
3. My mom made me a dentist appointment.
A. made B. a dentist appointment
C. my mom D. me
4. The doctor gave Hazel the medicine.
A. the medicine B. Hazel
C. gave D. the doctor
5. His dad gave Leo cough medicine.
A. Leo B. cough medicine
C. his dad D. gave
6. Caleb bought Jane some soup to help her cold.
A. some soup B. bought
C. Jane D. Caleb
7. We brought her flowers at the hospital.
A. her B. brought
C. we D. flowers
8. My mom made my sister tea to help the pain in her throat.
A. made B. my sister
C. tea D. my mom
5-34 SECTION 3
1
5
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
MAD Multiple Choice
Identify the part of speech that is between the two asterisks (*).
1. The nurse took *my* temperature.
A. direct object B. indirect object C. prepositional phrase
2. I asked to speak *with her*.
3. My dentist gave me *a new tooth*.
4. My dentist gave *me* a new tooth.
5. I need *a Band-Aid*. My leg is bleeding.
6. Can you give *her* a Band-Aid? She has a cut.
7. Our doctor gave medicine *to us*.
8. You had *an accident*? I am sorry to hear that.
SECTION 3 5-35
1
5
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
Fill in each blank with the indirect object pronoun that best completes each sentence.
1. Josh was bleeding at school. The teacher gave [him] a bandage.
2. The doctor took good care of me. He gave [me] medicine.
3. Sandy is sick. Her brother gave [her] the flu.
4. I am really sick. I don’t want to give [you] this bad cold.
5. My siblings and I are sick. Our dad made [us] an appointment for Friday.
6. I ate too much sugar. It gave [me] a stomachache.
7. I did not go to the movies with my friends because I did not want to give [them] my illness.
8. I called Mrs. Jones to get an appointment with my doctor. I asked [her] for an appointment
tomorrow.

MAD Multiple Choice
Read the sentence and then choose the correct pronoun to complete the sentence.
1. We need to call the doctor. __________ needs to hear about your symptoms.
A. He (subject) B. Him (direct object) C. Him (indirect object)
2. The doctor told __________ to lie down and rest.
A. I (subject) B. me (direct object) C. me (indirect object)
3. My mom gave __________ the couch medicine.
A. he (subject) B. him (direct object) C. him (indirect object)
4. I need to take your temperature. Oh! __________ have a fever!
A. You (subject) B. You (direct object) C. You (indirect object)
5. I called the nurse this morning. I told __________ you are not feeling well.
A. she (subject) B. her (direct object) C. her (indirect object)
7. Can you give __________ recommendations to feel better quickly?
A. we (subject) B. us (direct object) C. us (indirect object)
8. I need an appointment to see the doctor. Can you make __________ for Tuesday at 10:00 a.m.?
A. it (subject) B. it (direct object) C. her (indirect object)
5-36 SECTION 3
1
5
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
For 1-5, rewrite each sentence to include a prepositional phrase with pronoun.
1. I gave her some soup. [I gave some soup to her.]
2. Did you make him an appointment? [Did you make an appointment for him?]
3. I gave her my cold. [I gave my cold to her.]
4. Can you make her some tea? [Can you make some tea for her?]
5. My mom packed me a lunch. [My mom packed a lunch for me.]
For 6-10, rewrite each sentence to include an indirect object pronoun.
6. Can you give the name of your doctor to me? [Can you give me the name of your doctor?]
7. She brought clothes to him at the hospital. [She brought him clothes at the hospital.]
8. Did you make dinner for them? [Did you make them dinner?]
9. Jacob brought the medicine to me. [Jacob brought me the medicine.]
10. The nurse brought bandages for us. [The nurse brought us bandages.]

What happened to Rob? As you see the pictures, tell what happened to Rob. Try to use
indirect object pronouns. For example: say to whom things were given or to whom things
happened.
SECTION 3 5-37
1
5
CONVERSATION
ACTIVITIES
ACTIVITY 5.3.19 - SPEAK: Have you ever...?
Partner 1 will ask Partner 2 a question. Partner 2 will answer. Partner 1 will write the
person’s name and their answer in the question box.
For example:
Partner 1: What is your name?
Partner 2: My name is Sadie. (student says his/her name)
Partner 1: Have you ever broken your arm?
Partner 2: Yes, I have broken my arm. Have you ever broken
You complete the box that has the question you asked like this: your arm?
Yes, Sadie has broken her arm.

Now repeat, but Partner 2 asks a question.
Then, the teacher switches the LAD partners so the students can talk with another partner.
Have you wanted to

Have you ever been
Have you ever had to be alone instead of with Have you ever sprained
in danger or done
stay in the hospital? people before? something? What?
something dangerous?
When/Why?
At your last
Who have you looked Have you ever been in Have you had the flu appointment, how long
after? a car accident? this year? did you have to sit in the
waiting room?
Have you injured Have you done

Have you ever had a Have you ever broken
yourself in a sports something too fast and
toothache? something? What?
competition? gotten hurt?
When have you been in Have you had a cold Who have you visited Have you exercised
a lot of pain? this year? in a hospital? today?
5-38 SECTION 3
1
5
CONVERSATION
ACTIVITIES
ACTIVITY 5.3.20 - SPEAK: Describe an illness or injury
Each person is going to describe a time when he/she had an illness or an injury. As each
person shares, the other people are going to ask questions to learn more about it. Write some
notes about each person’s injury/illness and what happened.
QUESTIONS PARTNER 1 PARTNER 2 PARTNER 3
Illness or Injury
What happened?

MAD Open Recording
Choose one partner’s story and tell it in your own words. What was their illness or injury?
How did it happen?
SECTION 3 5-39
1
5
READING
BAND-AIDS
Have you ever cut yourself and used a bandage or a Band-Aid? Homes all over the world have boxes
of Band-Aids to help when someone is bleeding thanks to two people named Earle and Jossephine
Dickson. Earle worked for a company called Johnson & Johnson that bought and sold cotton.
Jossephine worked hard at home and liked to cook. Many times she would have accidents or get bad
cuts that needed bandages. Earle and Jossephine would wrap her cuts in cotton and tape every night.
It was hard, took a long time, and Earle always worried about his wife. Then, they had a great idea!
They created the Band-Aid so Jossephine could be safe and take care of herself easily. Later, they
thought other people might want the help too, so they showed their idea to Earle’s company. They
liked it very much, so they decided to sell Band-Aids to everyone. Now when anyone has bled, they
can be able to take care of themselves quickly. Today, Band-Aids are different sizes, shapes, and
materials. They are used at home, in the ambulance, and at the hospital. Doctors like them because
they can help stop people from getting infections and feel better soon. Also, they are strong and
doctors do not have to worry about them coming off. Now when someone has injured himself or
herself, they have Band-Aids to help.

Read the following questions and answer in complete sentences.
1. Who created the Band-Aid?
Earle and Jossephine Dickson created the Band-Aid.
2. Why did they create the Band-Aid?
They created it because Jossephine cut herself a lot, and it took a long time to
bandage her.
3. How are Band-Aids different today?
They come in different sizes, shapes, and materials.
4. Where are Band-Aids used?
They are used at home, in the ambulance, and at the hospital.
5. Why do doctors like Band-Aids?
Doctors like them because they can help stop infections and are strong.
5-40 SECTION 3
1
5
READING
ACTIVITIES
MAD Open Recording
Tell about a time when you needed to use a bandage or Band-Aid. What happened?
(Some ideas to talk about: How badly were you bleeding? How many bandages did you need
before the bleeding stopped? Did you use medicine?)
CULTURAL NOTE
Brand Names
Languages can be funny sometimes. We shorten words, abbreviate them or use slang in everyday
talk. Often we do this because the new version of the word is easier to say. In other cases, a word
that was a product or brand name can become a generic term after becoming so well-known for
its use. Here are a few examples: “Band-Aid” is a brand name of a line of bandages, yet we ask for a
band-aid when we have a cut and do not ask for a bandage. “Kleenex” is a brand of facial tissue, but
the word is used to refer to facial tissues of any brand. “Dixie Cups” is a brand representing small,
disposable paper cups, but people may ask for a Dixie cup if they would like to use a cup they can
throw away.
SECTION 3 5-41
1
5
LET’S TALK!
VIDEO - LET’S CHECK ON SKYLAR!

same time.
Grace: Hey, I came over as soon as I could. Are you okay?

Skylar: Uh, no, I went to see the doctor this morning and he said I broke my arm.
Grace: Oh no. How’d that happen? What were you doing to break your arm?
You don’t play any sports!
Skylar: I know! It was really embarrassing. I was at the park with my little brother this afternoon and
it was still wet from this morning. So I was going down the slide and I saw a big puddle at the end.
I tried to jump off and I slipped and fell on my arm.
Grace: Ouch! Bad luck! That must have been a pretty hard fall to break your arm.
Skylar: Yeah, it definitely wasn’t my most graceful moment, that’s for sure. And that’s not even
the worst part. I hit my head and I was unconscious so my little brother had to call 911 and the
ambulance had to come and help.
Grace: Really?
5-42 LET’S TALK!

1
5
LET’S TALK!
VIDEO - LET’S CHECK ON SKYLAR!
Skylar: My little brother has never seen anyone unconscious before.
Grace: He must have been super scared.
Skylar: He’s only 10, he said he’d never been so scared before.
Grace: Well, how can I help?
Skylar: Well, all of my books are in my locker at school. I was gonna* see if you could maybe pick
them up for me? And ask my teachers about the homework I’m missing this week?
Grace: Yeah, definitely. How long will you be out?
Skylar: Uh, the doctor said I should rest for about 1 week. And after that, he said that if I’m feeling
better I can go back for half days only. Writing is going to be tough though because it is my right
arm, so I think I’m gonna bring my computer to help me take notes.
Grace: Yeah. Does it hurt badly?
Skylar: I am in a lot of pain. The doctor said that I really just need to rest up this week. But he’s
more concerned about my head than my arm. My brain hurts when I walk.
Grace: Yikes. Do you have any medicine that will help?
Skylar: He did give me medicine for the next two weeks. It takes some of the pain away, but not
all of it!
Grace: Well, I have never heard of anyone breaking their arm in a park before. You are special!
Skylar: Thanks. I know!
gonna* - Gonna can be used in informal spoken language in place of going to.
LET’S TALK! 5-43

1
5
LET’S TALK!
ACTIVITIES
LT 5.2 - LISTEN & READ
MAD Multiple Choice
Answer questions about the video.
1. Why did Skylar visit the doctor?
A. She felt ill. B. She broke her arm. C. She injured her leg.
2. Who was at the park with Skylar?
A. Grace B. her mom C. her brother
3. How did she break her arm?
A. She jumped off a swing. B. She tripped. C. She slipped off the slide.
4. Who was called to help Skylar?
A. her brother B. an ambulance C. Grace
5. How old is Skylar’s brother?
A. ten B. twelve C. fifteen
6. For how long should Skylar rest?
A. one week B. ten days C. two weeks
7. What hurts when she walks?
A. her arm B. her leg C. her head

Something is false about each statement. Change the word(s) marked between the two asterisks
(*) to make the sentences true.
1. Skylar went to see the *dentist* this morning. [doctor]
2. Skylar and her brother were at the *beach*. [park]
3. The *best* part was when she hit her head. [worst]
4. Her *big sister* called for help. [little brother]
5. *Skylar* will pick up her books from school. [Grace]
6. The doctor gave Skylar medicine for *one week*. [two weeks]
5-44 LET’S TALK!

1
5
LET’S TALK!
INTERVIEWS - LET’S TALK ABOUT INJURIES!
LT 5.4 - LISTEN
Jason Jack

Listen to the following students talk about themselves. Fill in the blanks with words that are
missing in their interview. *Watch spelling and capitalization if it is the beginning of a
sentence.
Jason: “When I was in [first grade], I was riding my bike [down] my street [to get to] my house,
and - uh - my bicycle ran [over] a rock, I [fell off] the bike and [broke] my collarbone. So, I had
to go into the [hospital] and get a sling that I had [to wear] for a couple of months.”
Jack: “One time when I was really [young], I was [sitting] on a rocking chair, and I was rocking
it back and forth [until] I rocked [too far] and it tipped back. When I [fell] I had split [my head]
open, and I had [to go to] the hospital to get stitches.”
LET’S TALK! 5-45

1
5
LET’S TALK!
ACTIVITIES
LT 5.6 - LISTEN
MAD Category Match
After watching the interviews, put each phrase under the correct person.
Jason Jack
was in first grade was young
bike injury fell off a chair
broke his collarbone injured his head
went to hospital for a sling went to hospital for stitches

MAD Open Recording
Tell about a time you were injured. Use the following questions to help with your story:
1. What were you doing before you got injured?
2. How did you get injured?
3. What did you hurt?
4. Did you go see a doctor or to a hospital?
5. What did you have to do to heal your injury?
5-46 LET’S TALK!

How well do I
Additional
Refer to...
I CAN... Practice
(Page = P.)
Review (R)
Section 1
1. discuss body parts and injuries. R. 1, 2, 4, 5, 8
Section 3
P. 5-7
2. use reflexive and indefinite pronouns. R. 3, 6, 8
P. 5-19
3. discuss illnesses and give Section 2
R. 5, 6, 8
recommendations. P. 5-22
4. use the present perfect. R. 7, 8 P. 5-30
5. identify indirect objects and

R. 3, 5, 8 P. 5-34
prepositional phrases.
R1 - LISTENING 1
MAD Category Match
Listen to the two girls talk about a time when they got hurt. Match the person with the
correct words describing their injuries.
Sandy: Hi, Heather. How are you today?
Heather: I’m not doing so well, Sandy. I fell at gymnastics yesterday and broke two fingers.
Sandy: Oh no. I am so sorry to hear that. How long until it is healed?
Heather: Fingers don’t take too long to heal. I can’t use them for 3 weeks.
Sandy: I never broke a finger, but I did break my big toe before.
Heather: Really? What did you do?
Sandy: I was playing kickball and kicked the ball wrong.
Heather: Oh gosh. That’s bad luck. How long did it take to heal?
Sandy: It took 6 weeks to heal. It hurt really badly. But back to your finger, Heather. Are you in
a lot of pain now?
Heather: No, it doesn’t hurt too much right now. I am using a lot of ice on it.
Sandy Heather
broke a toe broke two fingers
6 weeks to heal 2 weeks to heal
played kickball fell at gymnastics
hurt really badly doesn’t hurt too much CHAPTER 5 5-47
REVIEW ACTIVITIES
R2 - LISTENING 2
with words that are missing in her interview.
Kaitlyn: “[When] I was young, my [ears hurt] really bad. So, I went to
[the doctor] and they [gave] me prescription medication for an ear
infection. And that [did not] work, so then I had to go [back] and get
surgery to get tubes put into [my ears].”
R3 - GRAMMAR 1
MAD Multiple Choice
Look at the word between the asterisks and decide whether it is a reflexive pronoun, an
indefinite pronoun, or an indirect object pronoun.
1. Did you injure *yourself* at the baseball game?
A. reflexive pronoun B. indefinite pronoun C. indirect object pronoun
2. Would you like to go *somewhere* to eat?
3. *Nobody* can go to the movies with me tonight.
4. The doctor gave *him* some medicine.
5. I hurt *myself* at football practice.
6. Do you know *anyone* who is a dentist?
7. Sam was cutting vegetables yesterday and cut *himself*.
8. The doctor checked *me* for a fever.
5-48 CHAPTER 5
REVIEW ACTIVITIES
R4 - GRAMMAR 2
Change each past simple sentence into a sentence that uses the past participle as an adjective.
For example: You see: My dad mowed the lawn. You type: [The lawn is mowed.]
1. Derek washed his hands. [Derek’s hands are washed.]
2. Tim hurt his back. [Tim’s back is hurt.]
3. My sister cleared the table. [The table is cleared.]
4. Jessica broke her wrist. [Jessica’s wrist is broken.]
5. I sprained my ankle. [My ankle is sprained.]
6. My parents worried about me. [My parents are worried about me.]
7. We packed our suitcases. [Our suitcases are packed.]
8. The students did their homework. [Their homework is done.]
R5 - READING
MAD Multiple Choice
Read the following passage about Marsha’s car accident. Then, answer the multiple choice
questions based on the reading.
It started as a normal day. I put my children on the bus to school, and then took the dogs for a
walk. After that, I needed to buy food for dinner. I was driving to the grocery store when I got
in a car accident. Someone went straight through a red light and did not stop as I was turning
right. I heard a loud sound and was scared that I could die. I woke up in the ambulance on my
way to the hospital. I was in a lot of pain, but I had to stay strong. When we arrived, the doctors
came to check me. They bandaged my cuts and sent me for x-rays. The hospital called my hus-
band to let him know what happened. He was very worried and came right away. My kids stayed
in school and my parents picked them up later. Finally, the doctor came back with my results.
He said I had a broken leg and wrist. Also, I had injured my head and the ribs in my chest. I was
lucky I did not have more injuries. Overall, he said I would be ok, but I ought to get a lot of rest
when I leave. He said my husband would need to look after me, and when he is at work, some-
one else should help me. He gave me medicine to take for 2 weeks to help with the pain. Thank-
fully, I got better quickly and I am all healed now.
1. How did Marsha get into a car accident?
A. She did not stop at a red light.
B. She turned right and did not stop at a stop sign.
C. Someone drove straight through a light instead of stopping and hit her.
D. She was texting while driving.
CHAPTER 5 5-49
REVIEW ACTIVITIES
MAD Multiple Choice
2. Who came to the hospital to see Marsha because he or she was worried?
A. her husband B. her children C. her parents D. her friend
3. What happened to Marsha in the accident?
A. only some cuts
B. She broke her leg and wrist.
C. She hurt her back and her head.
D. She sprained her ankle.
4. What did Marsha have to do after she left the hospital?
A. gets lots of rest and take medicine
B. take care of herself
C. sleep for a minimum of 8 hours per night
D. exercise her leg and wrist to help them heal
R6 - WRITING
MAD Open Text
First, describe what happened to Tim.
Then, give recommendations about what
he should do.
R7 - SPEAKING 1
Answer the questions using the present perfect.
Have you ever sprained your ankle? Has the doctor given you medicine for an illness? Have you
taken someone’s temperature? Have you made your next dentist appointment? Have you ever
been in an ambulance?
R8 - SPEAKING 2
MAD Open Recording
5-50 CHAPTER 5
ASSESSMENT
HELP ME DOCTOR!
Write a skit about going to the doctor. Decide who is going to be the doctor and who is going
to be the person visiting the doctor. The person visiting needs to have an illness or an injury.
The doctor should ask questions and the person has to answer the questions based on his/her
symptoms or injury. At the end the doctor needs to give recommendations for what the person
should do. Do your skit for the class or record it in the LAD with your partner.

REAL LIFE INJURIES AND ILLNESSES
Research an illness or injury. Answer the follow questions about this illness or injury.
What are the symptoms of this illness/injury?
How is it treated?
Is this illness something you can get anywhere in the world?
How many people had this injury/illness last year? Or the year before?
How long does it take to heal/recover?
What is one interesting fact about this injury/illness?
Teacher Note: You can have the students record themselves presenting their brochure in the MAD
with a video or do the LAD Presentation mode and have students present to the class.
LISTENING 1
MAD Category Match
Listen to the people talk about a time when they got hurt. Match the person with the correct
words describing their injuries.
Pam: Greg! I heard you got in a car accident. Are you okay?
Greg: Hi, Pam. You heard right. Unfortunately, I got in a terrible accident. The doctor said I am lucky
to not be dead.
Pam: Yikes. I am so sorry to hear that. What happened?
Greg: The person behind me was driving too fast. I stopped at the light, but he did not. He crashed
into me going really fast.
Pam: Really? Oh no! Are you injured?
Greg: I had cuts on my face, neck, and chest, but I healed very quickly.
Pam: Oh gosh. Were you alone in your car?
CHAPTER 5 5-51
ASSESSMENT
MAD Category Match
Greg: Yes, thankfully, but the driver of the other car had someone with him. I had to be brave
and help the driver get that woman out of the car.
Pam: How did you do that? Weren’t you in pain because you had a lot of cuts?
Greg: I didn’t feel the pain at all. I was too worried about helping the woman in the other car.
The driver broke one arm and was in a lot of pain. I called the ambulance and we were all
rushed to the hospital.
Pam: Is the woman okay? What about the driver?
Greg: The woman lost a lot of blood and her heart was very weak. He and the woman are still
both in the hospital.
Pam: I hope they are okay.
Greg: Me too. And I hope he doesn’t drive so dangerously anymore.
Greg Driver of the other car

was stopped at a light was going too fast
had many cuts broke his arm
was alone in the car had a woman in the car
did not feel the pain was in a lot of pain
healed quickly is still in the hospital
LISTENING 2
with words that are missing in her interview.
Emily: “Back in middle [school], I was [sick] with the Swine Flu. I
had [headaches] all the time, and I was constantly throwing up, and
[my mom would] have to make me food. I also missed a [week] of
school and it [was hard] to catch up.”
5-52 CHAPTER 5
ASSESSMENT
GRAMMAR 1
MAD Multiple Choice
Look at the word between the asterisks and decide whether it is a reflexive pronoun, an
indefinite pronoun, or an indirect object pronoun.
1. Ouch! Did you cut *yourself*?
2. Amanda brought *him* some soup.
3. Can you give me *something* for this cough?
4. *Nobody* but me has the flu in my family.
5. Jackson injured *himself* at gymnastics.
6. I hurt *myself* at hockey practice.
7. The doctor gave *me* some medicine.
8. Can I get you *anything* for that fever?
GRAMMAR 2
Change each past simple sentence into a sentence that uses the past participle as an adjective.
1. Zoe’s neck hurts. [Zoe’s neck is hurt.]
2. My mom did the laundry. [The laundry is done.]
3. Seth injured his knee. [Seth’s knee is injured.]
4. Maggie made her bed. [Maggie’s bed is made.]
5. My brother cut the vegetables. [The vegetables are cut.]
6. Samantha set the table. [The table is set.]
7. John broke his hand. [John’s hand is broken.]
8. The waiter served the dinner. [The dinner is served.]
CHAPTER 5 5-53
ASSESSMENT
READING: ACCIDENTS HAPPEN
MAD Multiple Choice
Look at the following graphs about injuries in the United States and then read the passage.
After, answer the multiple choice questions using both the graphic and the passage.
Injuries in the United States
Reference of diagram/photo from:

https://www.cdc.gov/nchs/injury/injury_
figures_ppt.htm
Accidents can happen anywhere and at any time. Sometimes accidents can be small.
For example, if you sprain your ankle, you can schedule an appointment and go to the
doctor. When you arrive, you will be checked quickly and probably go home in an hour.
The diagram shows that there were 35,000,000 people who visited the doctor due to
injury in the United States. Instead of going to the doctor, you also have the option to
stay at home, put ice on it, and get rest to heal by yourself. One time I was injured in my
kitchen, but it was only a small cut. I washed it with soap and water and put a Band-Aid
on it. Many people get hurt, but we have doctors and nurses to look after us.
Sometimes accidents are dangerous and people can die. If you get seriously injured,
you should go quickly to the hospital to be seen by a doctor. If you were injured and
cannot drive yourself, an ambulance can take you. Simply call 911. The doctors in the
emergency room are ready to help with your pain and help you feel better soon.
Sometimes, you could have to stay in the hospital for a couple of days because you
need someone to take care of you. Unfortunately, people do not always get better if
they have been in a dangerous accident. According to they diagram, 167,184 people
died due to injuries in the United States. People in hospitals work very hard to save lives,
but sometimes they cannot solve all the problems from an accident. They have to be very
brave to work in a hospital. Sometimes they see things that are very terrible and sad.
Danger is everywhere. It is important to be careful, take care of yourself, and go to the

doctor or the hospital when it is necessary.
5-54 CHAPTER 5
ASSESSMENT
READING: ACCIDENTS HAPPEN (Continued)
MAD Multiple Choice
1. How many people died due to injuries in 2004?
A. 31,000,000 (31 million) B. 167,184 C. 2,000,000 (2 million) D. 35,000,000 (million)
2. Where should you go if you are in a dangerous accident?
A. You should wait and schedule a doctor’s appointment.
B. You should go to the hospital.
C. You should stay at your home.
D. You should go to your friend’s house.
3. What is one thing you can do if you get a small cut?
A. Schedule an appointment with a doctor.
B. Put ice on it and get some rest.
C. Wash it with water and soap and put on a Band-Aid.
D. Go to the hospital.
4. According to the graph, which option below has the highest amount of people?
A. death from injuries
B. hospital discharges for injuries
C. emergency department visits for injuries
D. initial visits to physician (doctor) offices for injuries
WRITING
MAD Open Text
First, describe what Jacob’s symptoms are based on the picture.
Then, give recommendations about what Jacob should do.
SPEAKING 1
Answer the questions using the present perfect.
Has someone in your family been in a car accident? Have you ever stayed in a hospital?
Have you ever broken a toe or finger? Have you had the stomach flu? Have you ever looked
after someone?
SPEAKING 2
MAD Open Recording
Look at the vocabulary images
from the beginning of each
section. Describe one image
using new vocabulary that
you learned from this chapter. CHAPTER 5 5-55
1
6 CHAPTER SIX
AT WORK
VOCABULARY
Professions ................................................................... 6-4
At Work .......................................................................... 6-23
Technology .................................................................... 6-38
GRAMMAR
Future Tense ................................................................ 6-8
Present Continuous for Future ................................ 6-12
1st Conditional ............................................................. 6-28
Review of Contractions .............................................. 6-31
Gerunds ......................................................................... 6-41
Infinitives ....................................................................... 6-44
CONVERSATION
Which profession best fits you? ............................... 6-17
An Interesting Profession .......................................... 6-20
Complete the Statements ......................................... 6-3 6-35
Describe a Profession ................................................ 6-36
How do you communicate? ...................................... 6-48
What’s your favorite website? .................................. 6-48
READING
Occupations ................................................................. 6-21
Searching for a Head Chef ........................................ 6-37
Computers Then and Now ........................................ 6-49
LET’S TALK!
Video - Let’s talk about your future! ....................... 6-51
LEARNING OBJECTIVES Interviews - Let’s talk about jobs! ............................ 6-53
• discuss professions using the future tense.

REVIEW & ASSESSMENT
• use the present continuous for the future.
Review ............................................................................ 6-55
• discuss places of work using the 1st conditional tense. Projects .......................................................................... 6-61
Assessment ................................................................... 6-62
• discuss communication through the use of technology.
• use infinitives and gerunds.
INTRODUCTION 6-1
1
6

COLORADO
CO
Abbreviation: CO Known For: Skiing

Nickname: The Centennial State Rocky Mountain National Forest
Capital City: Denver Pike’s Peak
Other Major Cities: Colorado Springs, Boulder, Fort Collins, Great Sand Dunes
Aspen, Aurora Mesa Verde Ancient Cliff Village
Population: 5.541 million (2016) World’s Highest Highway
Area: 104,185 mi² (square miles) Denver Broncos (NFL)
Flag: Colorado Avalanche (NHL)
Denver Nuggets (NBA)
Colorado Rockies (MLB)
State Song: Where the Columbines Grow

State Bird: Lark Bunting
State Flower: Colorado Blue Columbine

1. Just for fun, take the following quiz:
https://writical.com/state-move-based-personality/ If this one is no longer
? available, find another one. It is fun to see what websites and quizzes people
have made based on personality traits.
2. Research things to do in Colorado by visiting their website:
https://www.colorado.com/things-to-do. Find an activity that you would like to
do if you could travel there.
6-2 INTRODUCTION
1
6
VOCABULARY
SECTION 1 VOCABULARY: Professions
Professions Verbs
the artist the engineer the pilot to become

the businessman; the explorer the police officer to look forward to
the businesswoman the farmer the profession; the occupation
the carpenter the firefighter (the fireman) the professional athlete
the coach the journalist the programmer
the cook (the chef) the mechanic the veterinarian
the driver the musician the writer
the bus driver the painter
the taxi driver the photographer
SECTION 2 VOCABULARY: At Work
Places of Work On the Job Verbs Adjectives

the business; the assistant the receptionist to earn amazing; excellent
the company the boss the secretary to fix; to repair brilliant
the factory the break the staff to own famous
the farm the job the uniform to work friendly
the office the manager unhappy
the meeting
SECTION 3 VOCABULARY: Technology
Aspects of Technology Verbs

the digital camera the website; the web page to chat to receive
the laptop the screen to click; to click on to save
the conversation the software to delete to send (sent)
the file to download to text
the information the download the text (message)
the keyboard to email to turn off
the mouse the email to turn on
the message the email address
to print
the printer
INTRODUCTION 6-3
1
6
VOCABULARY
PROFESSIONS

MAD Open Recording


MAD Pronunciation
1. Let’s talk to our coach! 6. I brought my car to the mechanic.
2. This musician is very talented. 7. Did the engineer find the problem?
3. The chef cooked dinner at his restaurant. 8. I want to be a photographer.
4. The veterinarian helped the sick dog. 9. He wants to be a professional athlete.
5. Where does the firefighter work? 10. Do you want to ask the police officer a
6-4 SECTION 1 question?
1
6
VOCABULARY
ACTIVITIES
MAD Letter Jumble
1. the occupation 2. the carpenter 3. businesswoman 4. police officer
5. the artist 6. the explorer 7. the painter 8. programmer

Complete the story about all the different professions in Derek’s family. Use the pictures to fill
in each blank with the correct vocabulary word.
My family has so many different professions. My dad loves to build furniture. He is a .
My mom, on the other hand, loves animals. She is a . My older brother is studying to
become a because he loves flying. My uncle lives in Chicago and works as a .
My grandmother enjoys painting and drawing. She is an . My grandfather loves nature
and spends most of his time outdoors. He has been a all of his life. When I grow up, I
want to become a or a . Writing new software or a book would be a lot
of fun.
Answers:
1. [carpenter] 2. [veterinarian] 3. [pilot] 4. [taxi driver]
5. [artist] 6. [farmer] 7. [programmer] 8. [writer]
SECTION 1 6-5
1
6
VOCABULARY
ACTIVITIES
LANGUAGE EXPLORATION
Job Titles
Sometimes, there are little tips and tricks in English that make it easy for learners to use the
language. For example, the names of some professions are made by simply adding -er to the
end of a verb. The names of these professions come from the verbs that go with the job:
the painter, the teacher, the farmer, the driver, the cleaner, the explorer.
Can you identify what the verb is for each word?
This pattern is very common in English, and easy to make, but it isn’t always correct.
Another common ending for a job title is -ist, which is added to a noun.
Think: the piano = the pianist, the art = the artist, the hairstyle = the hair stylist.
You need to be careful with this ending because you might need to take off a letter before you
add -ist. If you see a verb or a noun that has a career related to it, try adding -er or -ist to the
end, and check if that is correct.

MAD Image Match
Match the supplies with the correct profession.
1. the businessman 2. the coach
3. the professional athlete 4. the explorer
5. the painter 6. the cook
7. the journalist 8. the photographer
9. the musician 10. the engineer
6-6 SECTION 1
1
6
VOCABULARY
ACTIVITIES
Listen to the description and then say which profession it is.
1. Food is important. I love that I can grow it for my family and other families in my state.
2. For my job, I need a camera and perfect lighting. I love making memories last forever.
3. I love to work with food and make delicious meals for people to eat.
4. I write articles for a newspaper and often have to talk with people for a story.
5. I enjoy traveling around the world. I learn so much about different cultures.
6. Building with wood is my passion. I make beautiful furniture like dressers and tables for people
to buy.
7. I work in a big city. People get in and out of my yellow car all day long.
8. Fixing a car is like a puzzle. I have to find the problem and then fix it. It isn’t as easy as people
may think.
9. Coming up with different stories is fun. I start with a blank sheet of paper and turn it into a book.
10. Keeping people safe is my job. If someone drives too fast or someone is in danger, I have to
help.
Answers:
1. the farmer
2. the photographer
3. the cook or the chef
4. the journalist
5. the explorer
6. the carpenter
7. the taxi driver
8. the mechanic
9. the writer
10. the police officer
SECTION 1 6-7
1
6
GRAMMAR
FUTURE TENSE
The future tense is used to talk about actions that have not happened yet.
To form the future tense, add the word will before the infinitive.
subject + will + infinitive + other information
I will work as a writer.
Later, he will talk to the chef about the delicious dinner.
To form the negative of the future tense, add will not before the infinitive.
subject + will not + infinitive + other information
They will not give personal information to the journalist.
She will not be the photographer for the event.
To form affirmative contractions in the future tense, combine the pronoun with the word will.
Future Tense (will) Contraction Example
I will I’ll I’ll be a doctor in the future.
You will You’ll You’ll be a great cook!
He will He’ll He’ll go to college to become a firefighter.
She will She’ll She’ll be an artist in Paris, France.
It will It’ll It’ll be great to see you on Saturday.
We will We’ll We’ll see a police officer at career day tomorrow.
They will They’ll They’ll go to the same university.
* The contraction of the negative form (will not) is simply the word won’t for all pronouns and
subjects. For example: You won’t show the plans to the new engineer.
The carpenter won’t build the chairs for the table.
Will the painter finish painting Yes, she will finish painting
Yes, she will.
the kitchen tomorrow? the kitchen tomorrow.
Will the mechanic fix the car by No, he will not (won’t) fix the
No, he will not (won’t).
tomorrow? car by tomorrow.
To form open-ended questions, use one of the 6 question words at the beginning of the sentence,
and then follow the rules for formatting a closed question.
Question word + will + subject + infinitive + other information
When will the painter finish painting the kitchen tomorrow?
How will the mechanic fix the car?
Answers: She will finish around 4:00. He will put on a new tire.
6-8 SECTION 1
1
6
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
MAD Text Match
Match the description of each person with his/her future profession.
1. Jason enjoys working with cars. He will be a mechanic.
2. Carissa enjoys playing the guitar. She will be a musician.
3. Tim enjoys working outside in the fields. He’ll be a farmer.
4. Laura loves to help people feel better. She will be a doctor.
5. Clayton really enjoys sports. He will be a coach.
6. Paul likes driving and being with people. He will be a bus driver.
7. Mary is artistic and dramatic. She’ll be an actress.
8. Amy likes being up in the air. She will be a pilot.
9. Lucas is on the computer a lot. He’ll be a programmer.
10. Bryan makes his own furniture. He will be a carpenter.

MAD Word Jumble
1. What profession will you study in college?
2. The doctor will see your son now.
3. The artist will not finish her painting today.
4. What will the cook make for dinner tonight?
5. The actress will star in a movie this fall.
6. The professional athlete won’t be able to play.
7. When will the taxi driver be here?
8. Who will become a fireman?

Read about Susan’s past summer job.The story is written in the simple past. Change the story
to talk about Susan’s job next summer instead using the future tense.
Use a contraction when needed.
For example: You see: left You type: [will leave]
SECTION 1 6-9
1
6
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
ACTIVITY 6.1.10 - READ & WRITE (Continued)
In summer, Susan 1. worked the night shift at a restaurant. She 2. was a waitress. First,
she 3. went to the tables and 4. greeted the guests. Next, she 5. took their food and
drink orders. Then, the chefs 6. cooked the food and she 7. delivered their drinks. She
8. brought the food to the table. She 9. waited for them to be done with their meal and
10. gave them their bill. Susan’s job 11. wasn’t easy all the time, but she 12. talked with a
lot of interesting people. She 13. didn’t earn a lot of money as a waitress, but she 14. made
good money from tips.
1. [will work] 2. [will be] 3. [will go]

4. [will greet] 5. [will take] 6. [will cook]
7. [will deliver] 8. [will bring] 9. [will wait]
10. [will give] 11. [won’t be] 12. [will talk]
13. [won’t earn] 14. [will make]

Rewrite each sentence by changing the present simple to the future tense. For 1-5, use
the full future tense phrase. For 6-10, use the contraction of the future tense.
1. The bus driver brings the students to school. [... will bring ...]
2. The police officer writes a ticket for driving too fast. [... will write ...]
3. This chef works at a famous restaurant. [... will work ...]
4. The pilot’s flight is delayed because of the weather. [... will be delayed...]
5. The musician plays the drums at the concert. [... will play...]
6. He speaks with the engineer about the problem. [He’ll speak...]
7. They make their dog an appointment with the veterinarian. [They’ll make ...]
8. I call the mechanic to check my car. [I’ll call ...]
9. We introduce ourselves to the journalist. [We’ll introduce ...]
10. She arrives late to the volleyball game and her coach gets mad. [She’ll arrive ...]
6-10 SECTION 1
1
6
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
MAD Category Match
Listen as Caleb and Liam discuss what they will do after graduation. Then, drag the correct
phrase to the correct column for each person.
Caleb: Liam, I can’t believe we will graduate in two weeks!
Liam: I know. I am looking forward to it!
Caleb: What will you do next year?
Liam: I will attend New York University in the fall. What about you?
Caleb: I will attend Harvard University. What will you study in New York?
Liam: I will study journalism. Someday I will be a famous journalist for a news station.
Caleb: That is great! Why do you want to become a journalist?
Liam: I enjoy writing and talking with people. It interests me to learn about and share news
stories with the world. What will you study, Caleb?
Caleb: I will study medicine to become a doctor.
Liam: What kind of doctor will you become and why?
Caleb: I really like kids so I will be a pediatrician. How many years will you attend New York
University?
Liam: I will attend for four years. How long will it take you to become a doctor?
Caleb: It will take me eleven years!
Liam: Wow! That is a long time. Well, I hope you enjoy your time at Harvard.
Caleb: We will keep in touch!
Liam: Absolutely! I will see you at graduation.
Caleb Liam
Harvard University New York University
will study medicine will study journalism
will become a doctor will become a journalist
likes working with kids likes news stories
will attend for 11 years will attend for 4 years

MAD Open Recording
Talk about your future profession. Answer the following questions as you talk:
1. What occupation will you have in the future?
2. What will you do in this occupation?
3. What will you have to do that you will not enjoy doing?
SECTION 1 6-11
1
6
GRAMMAR
PRESENT CONTINUOUS FOR FUTURE
To discuss events that will happen in the future, you can also use the present continuous tense.
It is used when there is already an arrangement, an intention, or a plan to do something later.
In order to tell the difference between present continuous (happening now) and present continuous
for the future tense (happening later), you need to include keywords such as tomorrow, later, next
week, etc. in your other information.
Present Continuous (happening now) Present Continuous (happening in the future)
The dentist is checking his teeth. The dentist is checking his teeth next Friday.
The businesswoman is meeting the boss later

The businesswoman is meeting the boss.
today.
To form the present continuous tense for the future, use the present tense of to be plus the gerund
form of the verb.
Subject + to be (not) + present participle + other information
The new cook is arriving on Tuesday to start work. (arrangement)
The explorer is traveling to a new island. (intention)
The firefighter is not taking a vacation next week. (plan)
To form questions using the present continuous tense for the future;
Closed Questions:
to be + subject + present participle + other information
Open-ended Questions:
Question word + to be + subject + present participle + other information
Question Answer
Is the computer programmer
No, she is not (isn’t) working next week. OR No, she is not (isn’t).
working next week?
When is the driver coming to pick us

He is coming at 7 o’clock tonight.
up tonight?
6-12 SECTION 1
1
6
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
MAD Multiple Choice
Choose whether each sentence is the present continuous or the present continuous for
future.
1. We are practicing with our new coach tomorrow at 6 in the morning.
A. present continuous B. present continuous for future
2. The bus drivers are driving around the city.
3. The carpenter is bringing us the table he made later tonight.
4. The writer is writing a new book.
5. The chef is making dinner.
6. The photographer is taking pictures of our family this weekend.
7. The mechanic is looking at my car on Friday.
8. The taxi driver is stopping at the traffic light.
SECTION 1 6-13
1
6
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
MAD Text Match
Look at Morgan’s September calendar. Match the two parts to form complete sentences
about her schedule.

1 2 3 4 5 6
Today first day of movie with
school friends
7 8 9 10 11 12 13
basketball basketball fishing with
practice practice dad
14 15 16 17 18 19 20
first visit with visit with
basketball grandparents grandparents
game
21 22 23 24 25 26 27
visit with study with Fall Festival
grandparents Jennifer with family
28 29 30
Mandarin
exam
1. Morgan is practicing basketball next week.

2. Morgan and her dad are fishing next Saturday.
3. She and her family are attending the Fall Festival on the 27th.
4. She is going to play her first basketball game in two weeks.
5. Morgan is starting school tomorrow.
6. Jennifer is studying with Morgan on the 24th.
7. Morgan and her friends are seeing a movie this Friday.
8. She is taking the Mandarin exam at the end of the month.
6-14 SECTION 1
1
6
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
Listen to the phone conversation between Noah and his mom as he shares some exciting news.
Then, change the word(s) marked between the asterisks (*) to make each sentence true.
Mom: Hello?
Noah: Mom! Guess what?
Mom: What?
Noah: The Denver Broncos coach just called me.
Mom: Wow! That is so exciting. Did they offer you a job?
Noah: They did. My dream came true. I am playing professional football this season.
Mom: Colorado is a beautiful state. I am sad to see you leave Texas, but I am so happy for you.
When do you have to move there?
Noah: Next month. The season starts in two months. I would like you to come out for the first game.
Mom: Of course! I would love to be at the first game. What are you doing before the season starts?
Noah: I am going to exercise a lot and practice almost every day.
Mom: Well, you are going to need to be careful so you don’t get an injury. Also, it is important to
sleep well, so you are well-rested for practices.
Noah: Thank you for the recommendations, mom. I am going to take care of myself the best I can.
Mom: Who are you living with when you are in Denver?
Noah: I’m going to live with Cole. He is another ball player on my team. We are staying at his house
during the season.
Mom: Well, I have never been to Denver, so I am looking forward to visiting you in two months.
Noah: I am looking forward to that as well! Talk soon, mom.
Mom: Love you, Noah. Bye!
Noah: You, too. Bye!
1. Noah is playing professional *basketball* next season. [football]
2. He is playing for the *Colorado* Broncos. [Denver]
3. He is leaving *Denver*. [Texas]
4. He is going to *swim* almost every day. [practice]
5. Noah’s mom says he should be careful so he doesn’t get an *illness*. [injury]
6. Noah will be living with *Noah* in Colorado. [Cole]
7. Noah’s mom will be visiting with him in *one year*. [two months]
SECTION 1 6-15
1
6
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
Your friend is inviting you to do a variety of activities, but your calendar is full.
Decline your friend’s invitations using the information on your calendar and the present
continuous tense for the future. Answers will vary.

1 2 3 4 5 6
Today first day of movie with
school friends
7 8 9 10 11 12 13
basketball basketball fishing with
practice practice dad
14 15 16 17 18 19 20
first visit with visit with
basketball grandparents grandparents
game
21 22 23 24 25 26 27
visit with study with Fall Festival
grandparents Jennifer with family
28 29 30
Mandarin
exam
1. Do you want to come with me to see a movie on the 13th?

2. Would you like to eat dinner with my family on the 24th?
3. When will you be playing your first basketball game?
4. What will you be doing on the 27th?
5. Would you like to go to a concert on the 20th?
Possible answers:
1. I’m sorry I can’t. I am fishing with my dad on that day.
2. I can’t. I am studying with Jennifer on the 24th.
3. I am playing on the fifteenth.
4. I am going to the Fall Festival with my family on the 27th.
5. I’m sorry, but I cannot. I am visiting my grandparents that weekend.
6-16 SECTION 1
1
6
CONVERSATION
ACTIVITIES
ACTIVITY 6.1.18 - SPEAK: Which profession best fits you?
You and your partner will take turns being the student or the career counselor. When
Partner A is the career counselor, he/she asks Partner B questions about occupation
preferences. Once Partner A has told about all 4 boxes, Partner B then becomes the career
counselor. Once you both have completed all of the boxes, look at the occupation options
and match each person with the best occupation. Each person and occupation can only be
used once.
Example conversation:
Partner A: (Acting as a career counselor) Hello, how can I help you today?
Partner B: (Acting as an example) I am trying to find an occupation that I can do in the future.
Partner A: (Acting as a career counselor) Great! What are some things you will want and not
want to do in your future profession?
Partner B: (Acting as an example) I will want to help other people. It makes me feel good to do
something nice for someone else. I will not want to sit at a desk all day in my future profession.
That will be boring.
Partner A: (Acting as a career counselor) Okay. Let’s see which profession fits you best.
PARTNER WORKSHEET
Explorer Programmer Pilot Fireman
Profession Person # ________ Person # ________ Person # ________ Person # ________

Options Mechanic Businessman Police Officer Musician
Person # ________ Person # ________ Person # ________ Person # ________
SECTION 1 6-17
1
6
CONVERSATION
ACTIVITIES
ACTIVITY 6.1.18 - SPEAK: Which profession best fits you? (Continued)
PARTNER A’s WORKSHEET

Person 1 Person 2 Person 3 Person 4
- team work - talking to people - music - maps
- danger - money & math - instruments - directions
Likes
- running - traveling - team work - traveling
- maps & directions - computers - artistic things
- jobs hard on the
- sitting at a desk - working alone body - standing all day
Dislikes
- computers - anything with art - getting hands - talking a lot
messy
Which
profession?
Why?
PARTNER B’s WORKSHEET

- helping people - fixing problems - working at a desk
- maps
- driving fast - working with my computers
Likes - directions
- standing up for hands - creating new
- traveling
what is right - vehicles things
- sitting all day - wearing a suit or - talking a lot

- working at a desk
Dislikes - work without uncomfortable - doing the same
- lots of paperwork
adventure clothes thing every day
Which
profession?
Why?
6-18 SECTION 1
1
6
CONVERSATION
ACTIVITIES
MAD Image Match
Now that you have the answers from the “Which profession best fits you?” conversation
activity, match each image with the correct person.
PARTNER A
Answers
Fireman Businessman Musician Pilot
Profession
Match
PARTNER B
Answers
Police Officer Explorer Mechanic Programmer
Profession
Match
SECTION 1 6-19
1
6
CONVERSATION
ACTIVITIES
ACTIVITY 6.1.20 - SPEAK: An Interesting Profession
Interview someone who has a profession that interests you. The next day, share what
you learned with your partner.
1. Take home the following worksheet and fill out the top part with YOUR interview
questions and answers.
2. The next day you will exchange information with your partners. Fill out your
partner’s information in the bottom part of the chart.
YOUR INTERVIEW INFORMATION
Who did you interview?
What profession does he/she have?
What kind of school did he/she attend before

starting this profession?
How long did he/she have to attend this

school?
What does he/she do in this profession?
What personality traits does he/she need for

this job?
What does he/she like about the job?
What does he/she dislike about the job?
6-20 SECTION 1
1
6
READING
OCCUPATIONS
There are many different occupations for young people to become when they are old enough to work.
Let’s look at a couple different professions.
Writer / Journalist
Writers or journalists are people who write stories for other people to read. A writer can write stories
that are real or not real, but a journalist always writes about what is real. They both can write books or
for magazines, web pages, and newspapers. Writers need to be good planners because they normally
have to finish writing by a certain date. They can work from home and have to be creative, so people will
be interested in what they are reading. Many times they can decide what hours they work as long as they
are writing. To be either occupation, you need to know about grammar and language. Many times writers
and journalists will go to college to study the art of writing. They will practice writing articles or chapters
before they publish their first piece of work for everyone to read. Both writers and journalists may interview
people for their work as well.
TIRE
Mechanic
ENGINE & OIL

Cars, taxis, motorcycles, buses and planes - there are so many options for travel. All of these vehicles
require maintenance, and our mechanics are specially trained to maintain and repair all kinds of problems
with our transportation vehicles. They have special tools that people do not have in their homes to work on
cars. The engine is the main part of a car. If that does not work, you can’t drive the car and get where you
need to be. Oil levels keep the vehicle’s engine running smoothly. When a vehicle drives many miles, the oil
has to be changed more often. A vehicle’s wheels have to have a certain amount of air, or else they won’t
be able to move properly. In colder climates, some people put “winter tires” on their cars which have better
traction to drive safer in the snow. It can be a very messy job and a mechanic is normally dirty by the end of
the day. A mechanic works for a company in a garage during the week or sometimes the weekend but not
late at night. To be a mechanic, you can learn while you are working or you can go to take classes at a
technical college. There are different classes for different types of vehicles or vehicles made in different
countries. These are a couple of the many professions that are available in our world. There are some
similarities and differences, but all that really matters is that you are interested in what you do.
SECTION 1 6-21
1
6
READING
ACTIVITIES
MAD Category Match
Read all of the details about the two professions. Then, drag the correct information under the
correct profession.
Writer/Journalist Mechanic
writes for books, magazines, and newspapers fixes vehicles when there is a problem
can work at home works in a garage
has deadlines (has to finish by a certain date) works with different parts of the engine
studies in college to learn and practice can learn while working or can take classes at a
technical college

MAD Open Recording
After reading about two different professions, which one would you prefer to become in the
future? Record yourself explaining your choice. If you do not want to become a journalist/
writer or mechanic, what other profession do you look forward to working in and why? Why
would you not want to become one of these professions?
6-22 SECTION 1
1
6
VOCABULARY
AT WORK

MAD Open Recording


MAD Pronunciation
1. The receptionist took my call. 6. Henry will be successful when he is older.
2. My assistant works really hard. 7. The meeting went longer than it usually does.
3. I am ready to go find a new job. 8. How much does an explorer earn?
4. Luke works in a factory. 9. We have the happiest staff.
5. Do you have to wear uniforms to work? 10. What an amazing company!
SECTION 2 6-23
1
6
VOCABULARY
ACTIVITIES
MAD Letter Jumble
1. to repair 5. the break
2. the office 6. the secretary
3. the meeting 7. the manager
4. the business 8. the farm

MAD Image Match
Match the place of work with the correct profession.
1. the explorer 2. the photographer
3. the businessman 4. the programmer
5. the mechanic 6. the farmer
7. the cook 8. the musician
9. the firefighter 10. the engineer
6-24 SECTION 2
1
6
VOCABULARY
ACTIVITIES
MAD Sentence Jumble
Rose and Evelyn are talking about Rose’s new job. Put the sentences in the correct order.
Evelyn: Hi, Rose. I heard you got a new job. How do you like it?
Rose: Hi, Evelyn. Yes, I started on Monday. It is excellent.
Evelyn: What is so amazing about it?
Rose: Everything. From my famous boss, to the friendly secretary, to the brilliant staff.
Evelyn: That sounds too good to be true. How did you find this job?
Rose: My mom’s friend owns the company and told my mom they needed help.
Evelyn: Nice. Do you earn good money?
Rose: Yes, I think so. $18 an hour cash!
Evelyn: Money is important, but it isn’t everything. Being happy is the most important.
Rose: I agree. I am so happy here already.
Evelyn: Is there anything that you don’t like or that makes you unhappy about the job?
Rose: Having to wear a uniform is not great and I wish our two breaks were about 5
minutes longer.
Evelyn: Well if that is it, then you really did find an excellent job! I am happy for you!

MAD Multiple Choice
Heather is asking her uncle, Justin, about his profession. Listen to their conversation and then
answer the questions below.
Heather: Hi, uncle Justin. I am interested in becoming an engineer like you. Do you have some time
to answer some questions for me?
Justin: That’s great! Sure, I have some time for you. What would you like to know?
Heather: First, what qualities does an engineer need to have?
Justin: Engineers build things or make things work better. So, engineers need to be good in
math and science. They also need to be creative. It is important to communicate well with others
because they have to work on a team. If you have these qualities, then you will be a good engineer.
Heather: I love math and science! How long does an engineer have to go to school?
Justin: Well, an engineer needs to attend a college for at least four years. However, there are
different types of engineers and some of them have to go to school for another two to seven years.
Heather: Wow! That’s a lot of schooling. Do I have to do anything else in order to be an engineer?
SECTION 2 6-25
1
6
VOCABULARY
ACTIVITIES
MAD Multiple Choice
Justin: Yes, an engineer needs to pass two engineering exams and then has to work with a
professional engineer for at least four years.
Heather: So, what type of engineer are you?
Justin: I am a computer software engineer. However, there are so many different types you
can become. For example, you could work as a mechanical engineer, a biomedical engineer,
or a fire protection engineer. There are lots to choose from!
Heather: How does one decide which type they should become?
Justin: That is what school is for. Attend a college where you can learn about all the different
types and you will find out which type is best for you.
Heather: Thank you for answering all my questions. That was very helpful. I look forward to
starting college to become an engineer.
1. Who is Heather speaking with?

A. her dad B. her brother C. her uncle
2. Which profession does she want to know more about?
A. explorer B. engineer C. painter
3. What quality is NOT mentioned for this profession?
A. needs to enjoy building things
B. needs to be able to work well with others
C. should be good in math and English
4. How long does a person have to attend college for this profession, at the minimum?
A. 1 year B. 4 years C. 15 years
5. How many exams does a person have to pass for this profession?
A. 2 B. 4 C. 6
6. What area does Justin work in?
A. computer software
B. mechanical
C. fire protection
6-26 SECTION 2
1
6
VOCABULARY
ACTIVITIES
CULTURAL NOTE
Diploma
After your hard work in an educational setting, you can earn a certificate, diploma or degree. The
difference between these distinctions is usually the time it takes to complete your education and
the depth of knowledge in each one.
A certificate can be earned after a workshop held on a single day or over the course of a short
period of time. A diploma has more in-depth curriculum than a certificate, but it can be earned in a
shorter program, too.
A degree is an advanced education option where you name an area of study to be your major. You
can earn a degree in two to four years or longer, depending on how rigorous of a class schedule
you take. To earn a degree, you have to take many classes in your specific area of study. You usu-
ally have to take some general classes, such as math and English, and this provides a well-rounded
educational experience.

Listen to the following questions and answer them in complete sentences.
1. Do you know anyone famous? If yes, who?
2. For which profession do you have to be friendly?
3. For which profession do you have to be brilliant?
4. What should someone do if he is unhappy in a profession?
5. Which profession do you think is amazing?
SECTION 2 6-27
1
6
GRAMMAR
1st CONDITIONAL
We use the 1st conditional to talk about real and possible situations. It is formed using the future
tense and the present simple tense together and the order does not matter. The if clause is the
condition and the other part of the sentence is the result.
Option 1:
If + present simple + other info. + future tense (will) + other info.
If I work hard, I will become a manager.
If you take the new job, you will earn more money.
*There is a comma when the if clause starts the sentence.
Option 2:
Future tense (will) + other info. + if + present simple + other info.
I will become a manager if I work hard.
You will earn more money if you take the new job.
*There is not a comma when the if clause is at the end of the sentence.
To form the negative, you will either have to use the negative of the present simple or the negative
of the future tense.
Negative of present tense: Negative of future tense:

Do not (Don’t) Does not (Doesn’t) Will not (won’t)
The company will close if we do not get more
The company won’t close if we get more jobs.
jobs.
To form questions using the 1st conditional;

Closed Questions:
If + present simple + other info. + future tense + other info.
Open-ended Questions:
Question word + future tense + if + present simple + other info.
Question Answer
If I do not receive your email, will
Yes, I will send it again if you do not receive it.
you send it again?
What will happen if there is a lot of

If there is a lot of traffic, I will arrive late for the meeting.
traffic?
6-28 SECTION 2
1
6
GRAMMAR
MAD Word Jumble
1. If I buy a farm, I will become a farmer.
2. She will work for a famous photographer if she wants to learn more.
3. If his car breaks, he will go see a mechanic.
4. He will wear a uniform if he works in a factory.
5. If I am a secretary, I will want to work for a friendly boss.
6. You will be an excellent boss if you have a business.
7. If no one is here on time, the meeting will not start at 10:00.
8. My job will be to answer the phone if I am a receptionist.

MAD Multiple Choice
Complete each sentence with the correct tense to fill in the blank.
1. If I want to __________ more money, I will become a manager.
A. earn B. will earn
2. I __________ unhappy if the meeting starts early in the morning.
A. am B. will be
3. The receptionist __________ a break if her boss takes one, too.
A. takes B. will take
4. If the doors and cupboards __________ to be repaired, he will call a carpenter.
A. need B. will need
5. The office will be quiet today if the staff __________ out of the building.
A. is B. will be
6. If the belt for my uniform is broken, I __________ a new one.
A. buy B. will buy
7. If my car is not fixed by Monday, I __________ with someone to work.
A. ride B. will ride
8. If the manager _________ someone brilliant for the job, we will ask him or her to work for us.
A. finds B. will find
9. If we do not finish this paint job before 3, I __________ on the weekend.
A. work B. will work
10. If the boss __________ a meeting for today at 5 p.m., I will have to stay late at work.
A. calls B. will call
SECTION 2 6-29
1
6
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
MAD Text Match
Complete each sentence starter.
1. I will answer a lot of phone calls if I am a secretary.
2. If my boss schedules a meeting with me, I will be there on time.
3. I will find friendly people to work at my company if I am manager.
4. I will earn a lot of money if I am famous.
5. If I have to wear a uniform, I will buy more than one to wear.
6. If I don’t have time for a break, I will eat lunch at my desk.
7. I will have to stand for many hours if I work in a factory.
8. If I am a fireman, I will have a dangerous job.
9. I will be able to do any profession I want if I have a brilliant mind.
10. If I work for an amazing company, I will want to work there for a long time.

Answer each question about what you will do if you are a certain profession.
1. What will you do if you are a police officer?
2. What will you do if you are a boss?
3. If you are a coach, what will you do?
4. What will you do if you are a secretary?
5. If you are a pilot, what will you do?
6-30 SECTION 2
1
6
GRAMMAR
REVIEW OF CONTRACTIONS
Contractions are formed when we combine different words in English to make one word.
There are two ways to make a contraction:
1. Pronouns with the verbs are combined like, He is not = He’s not
2. Verbs with the negative. - He is not = He isn’t
I am I’m are not = aren’t

you are you’re is not = isn’t
he is he’s
she is she’s
it is it’s
we are we’re was not = wasn’t
they are they’re were not = weren’t
*Use with the present simple or the present continuous.
I have I’ve
you have you’ve
he has he’s
have not = haven’t
she has she’s
has not = hasn’t
it has it’s
we have we’ve
they have they’ve
*Use with the present perfect.
do not = don’t
did not = didn’t
does not = doesn’t
Cannot = can’t could not = couldn’t

I would I’d
you would you’d
he would he’d would not = wouldn’t
she would she’d
it would it’d
we would we’d
they would they’d
*Use with the present perfect.
should not = shouldn’t
SECTION 2 6-31
1
6
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
MAD Multiple Choice
Choose the correct contraction for the subject and verb given.
1. you have not A. you’ve B. you haven’t C. you have’nt
2. he is A. he isn’t B. he’s not C. he’s
3. I do not A. I don’t B. I doesn’t C. I do’nt
4. they would A. they wouldn’t B. they’d C. they w’d
5. we have A. we haven’t B. we h’ve C. we’ve
6. she cannot A. she’s not B. she can’t C. she cann’t
7. I am A. I’m B. I’am C. I’m not
8. they are not A. they aren’t B. they arent’ C. they are’nt

Rewrite each subject and verb as a contraction.
1. she is [she’s] 6. I do not [I don’t]
2. they are [they’re] 7. he would [he’d]
3. it would [it’d] 8. they cannot [they can’t]
4. we will [we’ll] 9. she was not [she wasn’t]
5. you should not [you shouldn’t] 10. I have [I’ve]

MAD Multiple Choice
You can combine the pronoun and the verb or the verb and the negative form and the
sentence will still have the same meaning. Look at the sentence given and then choose the
alternate way to write the sentence so that they have the same meaning.
1. She’s not working today.
A. She is’nt working today.
B. She’snt working.
C. She isn’t working today.
2. We aren’t taking a break today.
A. We’re not taking a break today.
B. Were’nt taking a break today.
C. We’rent taking a break today.
6-32 SECTION 2
1
6
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
MAD Multiple Choice
3. I’ve not spoken with the manager yet.
A. Iven’t spoken with the manager yet.
B. I haven’t spoken with the manager yet.
C. I’ve haven’t spoken with the manager yet.
4. You aren’t a famous writer until you sell a book.
A. You’re not a famous writer until you sell a book.
B. You’rent a famous writer until you sell a book.
C. You are’nt a famous writer until you sell a book.
5. They’ve not been on a farm.
A. They have’nt been on a farm.
B. They’vent been on a farm.
C. They haven’t been on a farm.
6. She hasn’t owned a business.
A. She’snt owned a business.
B. She’s not owned a business.
C. She has’nt owned a business.
7. They aren’t going to wear uniforms.
A. Theyre’nt going to wear uniforms.
B. They are’nt going to wear uniforms.
C. They’re not going to wear uniforms.
8. He’d not like to become a veterinarian.
A. He would’nt like to become a veterinarian.
B. He wouldn’t like to become a veterinarian.
C. He’d would like to become a veterinarian.

Listen to the conversation between the boss and the secretary.
Mr. Johansen: Good morning, Ava.
Ava: Good morning, Mr. Jenkins.
Mr. Johansen: I [didn’t] see any messages on my desk. Did anyone call while I was out?
Ava: No, sir. You [haven’t] received any calls this morning.
Mr. Johansen: Great. No news, is good news. What does my morning schedule look like today?
SECTION 2 6-33
1
6
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
ACTIVITY 6.2.16 - WRITE (Continued)
Ava: [I’m] not in your calendar yet. Give me one minute to turn my computer on.
Mr. Johansen: Take your time. I know that I usually [don’t] get here this early.
Ava: Okay. You have an 8:00 meeting. You do not have anything at 9:00. You have a phone call at
10:00.
Mr. Johansen: Thanks. I [wouldn’t] want 3 meetings in a row. [I’d] like to eat lunch at 11:00 today.
Ava: You [can’t] eat lunch at 11. The engineers are coming in at 11 and [they’d] like to talk to you
about the new office building.
Mr. Johansen: I [wasn’t] ready to talk about this project yet. [Aren’t] they able to come tomorrow
instead?
Ava: [We’d] have to call and see.
Mr. Johansen: I can do that right now before my 8:00 meeting.
Ava: That sounds good. Let me look at your schedule for tomorrow. Okay, you [can’t] meet with
them at 10 or 11 tomorrow. Other than that, you are free all day.
Mr. Johansen: [It’d] be great if they could come at 1. Then I would have all afternoon to talk with
them about it.
Ava: Tell me what time you schedule the appointment. I will add it to your calendar.
Mr. Johansen: Thank you, Ava.
Ava: [You’re] welcome, Mr. Johansen.

Listen to each sentence and then repeat the sentence using a contraction instead.
For example: You hear: I would like to buy a new computer.
You say: I’d like to buy a new computer.
1. I have not received the email yet. I haven’t received the email yet.
2. She did not save her work. She didn’t save her work.
3. I am going to be a famous painter. I’m going to be a famous painter.
4. This web page is not the one we needed. This web page isn’t the one we needed.
5. They would love to meet the new coach. They’d love to meet the new coach.
6. He did not become a programmer. He didn’t become a programmer.
6-34 SECTION 2
1
6
CONVERSATION
ACTIVITIES
ACTIVITY 6.2.18 - SPEAK: Complete the Statements
Teachers, you will have to print this worksheet out for your students.
First, decide who will be Student A and who will be Student B.
Next, fill in the blanks with the correct contraction to complete the statements.
(Check your answers with someone else who has the same worksheet.)
Then, Student A will read each statement. Student B will listen and then say each statement
including the correct contraction.
For example: Student A says: He has not repaired the car yet.
Student B will then say: He hasn’t repaired the car yet.
Student A will then let Student A know if he/she completed the statement correctly. If it
isn’t correct, ask Student B to try again, so that he/she says the correct complete statement.
After Student A reads all 8 statements, Student B will read all of his/her 8 statements in the
same manner as Student A did.
Student A’s Worksheet

5. They’re going to love the new uniforms!
1. She wasn’t able to attend the meeting
(They are)
yesterday. (was not)
6. The explorer hasn’t found a new island yet.
2. I’ve worked for three different companies.
(has not)
(I have)
7. The firefighters couldn’t stop the fire.
3. The mechanic can’t fix my car. (cannot)
(could not)
4. Your boss isn’t very friendly. (is not)
8. You’d be an amazing manager. (You would)
Student B’s Worksheet
5. You shouldn’t go on break until after the

1. He’s unhappy at his job. (He is)
meeting. (should not)
2. The staff doesn’t work on the weekends.
6. I’m not going to interview them. (I am)
(does not)
7. The pilot didn’t fly last weekend. (did not)
3. The athletes haven’t arrived yet. (have not)
8. She’s been famous since her first book.
4. We’d like to see the farm. (We would)
(She has)
SECTION 2 6-35
1
6
CONVERSATION
ACTIVITIES
ACTIVITY 6.2.19 - SPEAK: Describe a Profession
You and your partner are each given occupations to describe to each other. Do not
use the name of the occupation in your description. While your partner is describing
the occupation, guess which occupation it is. Let your partner say at least 3 sentences
before guessing. Write down your partner’s occupations when you guess it correctly.
Use ‘if’ clauses and contractions.
For example, if you have the profession ‘the artist’, then you could say something like
this: “If I am this profession, I’ll study in Paris. If I study in Paris, I’ll draw the Eiffel Tower at
night. If I draw something amazing, I’ll try to sell it.”
PARTNER A’s Worksheet
Professions to Describe Partner’s Professions
the carpenter
the chef
the professional athlete
the mechanic
the driver
the painter
the pilot
PARTNER B’s Worksheet

Professions to Describe Partner’s Professions
the coach
the explorer
the nurse
the farmer
the photographer
the police officer
the journalist
6-36 SECTION 2
1
6
READING
SEARCHING FOR A HEAD CHEF
We are searching for a head chef to be responsible for food preparation at our new restaurant. He/she will
also be in charge of other workers in the kitchen. He/she will plan menus, too.
Responsibilities and Duties Important Qualities
The jobs of the head chef include: Business skills: Needs skills to help the restaurant
• checking that food is fresh. make money.
• hiring and managing other food workers. People skills: Must work well with others. This helps to
• creating recipes. make sure orders are correct.
• presenting food. Creativity: Needs to make interesting meals.
• making sure the kitchen and food are safe Time management: Must be sure that meals are
and clean. served on time.
• ordering food and supplies Starting Salary: $43,180 a year

MAD Multiple Choice
Based on the reading, decide whether each statement is True or False.
1. Two duties of the head chef are to create new recipes for the restaurant and wash
the dishes. A. True B. False
2. Time management is NOT an important quality of a head chef. A. True B. False
3. The head chef is responsible for preparing the food. A. True B. False
4. The head chef creates new recipes. A. True B. False
5. The head chef does NOT order food or supplies. A. True B. False
6. The head chef should work well with the other workers. A. True B. False
7. The head chef will need to hire other food workers at times. A. True B. False

MAD Open Recording
Based on the reading, answer the following questions in complete sentences.
1. What are two duties of a chef?
2. Which do you think is the most important quality of a head chef: business skills, people skills,
creativity, or time management? Why do you think this quality is the most important?
3. Would you like to be a head chef? Why or why not?
SECTION 2 6-37
6TECHNOLOGY

MAD Open Recording


MAD Pronunciation
1. Double click on the right side of the mouse. 6. Are you able to print one for me, too?
2. Save your file here. 7. I do not have the right information.
3. Which web address should I go to? 8. Don’t turn off the computer.
4. Can you send the email again? 9. Are you free to chat later this afternoon?
5. Kelly bought a new digital camera. 10. Is he sure that he has the correct email
address?
6-38 SECTION 3
1
6
VOCABULARY
ACTIVITIES
MAD Letter Jumble
1. to download 2. the printer 3. to receive 4. the computer
5. the screen 6. the software 7. the keyboard 8. to email

MAD Text Match
Use the picture to match the vocabulary word with the correct letter.
1. A: the screen
2. B: the keyboard
3. C: the printer
4. D: the mouse
5. E: the camera
6. F: the paper

MAD Multiple Choice
Identify the word that is not related to the others.
1. Which word is NOT related?
A. the keyboard B. the mouse C. the screen D. the email address
A. to click B. to delete C. to earn D. to download
A. the laptop B. the website C. the web page D. the email
A. the download B. the file C. to receive D. the information
A. to print B. to chat C. the printer D. the paper
A. to chat B. to text C. to talk D. to turn off
A. to send B. to fix C. the programmer D. the software
A. to turn on B. to turn off C. to start D. the message
SECTION 3 6-39
6ACTIVITIES
MAD Sentence Jumble
Put the sentences in the correct order explaining how to send an email.
1. First, turn on your computer.
2. Then, open your email.
3. Use the mouse to click on the icon to write a new email.
4. Type the email address of the person receiving your email.
5. After that, begin to type the email.
6. Before you click send, add the files the person needs.
7. Finally, click send.
8. Turn off your computer if you are finished with it.

You and your classmate have a project due on Monday. Your partner has been sick and you
haven’t been able to work together in class. He is video calling you on the computer.
Answer the questions that he asks in complete sentences.
1. Do you have time to chat now?
2. Did you receive my email with the project information?
3. Can you send me the file that you made?
4. Did you download the video to your laptop?
5. Do you want me to print the paper for our teacher?

Class activity
6-40 SECTION 3
1
6
GRAMMAR
GERUNDS
A gerund looks like a participle, but it is a noun. To form a gerund, take the verb and put it in its -ing
form. Examples: click → clicking email → emailing print → printing
Uses Examples
Becoming the boss of the company is my dream.
Responding to emails on time is very important.

1. As the subject of a sentence
Turning off your computer every night is good for
the battery.
I like printing extra copies of notes.

2. After some verbs that describe how we feel
or think such as: like, hate, enjoy, quit, suggest, She enjoys chatting on the phone with friends.
dislike, and deny
I dislike deleting files from my computer.
I talked him into taking the new job.

3. After prepositions
I am interested in becoming a partner in the
Some prepositions are: about, for, in, into, of, to business.
I am scared of losing my job.

MAD Text Match
Complete each sentence starter.
1. Deleting emails can sometimes take a long time.
2. I am interested in starting a business someday.
3. The receptionist denies deleting the email.
4. My friends and I enjoy chatting on the phone often.
5. Turning off your laptop every night is a good idea.
6. My brother enjoys being a police officer.
7. Becoming a fireman interests me.
8. Taking a break at work is important.
9. He dislikes using this software.
10. I suggest emailing me the information for the meeting.
SECTION 3 6-41
1
6
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
MAD Multiple Choice
In which sentence can you use the word as it is written?
1. downloading
A. I will __________ the pictures after you send them.
B. I suggest __________ all the files to your computer.
C. It is important __________ files to save them.
2. chatting
A. __________ with friends always makes me happy.
B. Do you __________ with friends on the computer?
C. We will __________ together at work.
3. texting
A. I hate __________. I prefer to call someone.
B. I need __________ you the party information.
C. Can you ask Julia __________ me?
4. becoming
A. I will never __________ a professional artist.
B. I have decided __________ a professional artist.
C. I am interested in __________ a professional artist.
5. repairing
A. Jordan will __________ my car tomorrow.
B. __________ a car is not something I enjoy doing.
C. It is sometimes difficult for a mechanic __________ a car.
6. saving
A. I will __________ the pictures after you send them.
B. Why don’t you __________ all the files to your computer?
C. __________ your work often is so important.

MAD Multiple Choice
Choose which question does not lead to the answer.
1. Taking pictures with a digital camera will work the best.
A. What will work the best?
B. How should we take the pictures?
C. Why do you like digital cameras?
6-42 SECTION 3
1
6
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
MAD Multiple Choice
2. I like sending emails from my computer.
A. What do you like doing on the computer?
B. Where do you like sending emails from?
C. Do you like having conversations?
3. I don’t like chatting on the phone.
A. Why don’t you like texting?
B. What technology don’t you use to communicate?
C. Do you like chatting on the phone?
4. Yes, he is interested in becoming a manager for our company.
A. Is he interested in becoming a manager?
B. What job interests him at our company?
C. Would he be interested in becoming a manager?
5. Taking a break at work is good for your brain.
A. When are you taking a break?
B. Why is it good to take a break at work?
C. What is good for your brain?
6. No, printing the file on time will be difficult.
A. What will be difficult?
B. Will you be able to print the file on time?
C. Could you print the file on time?

Listen to the questions and answer in complete sentences.
1. What do you like doing on the computer?
2. What software do you enjoy using and why?
3. Which website do you suggest visiting and why?
4. What profession are you interested in becoming and why?
SECTION 3 6-43
1
6
GRAMMAR
INFINITIVES
The infinitive is the original verb with the word “to” in front of it.
Examples: to read to earn to print
Uses Examples
1. After some verbs such as: agree, arrange, He arranged to have the meeting in the afternoon.
ask, promise, decide, afford, expect, learn,
The employee learned to use to new software
need, plan, want, wait quickly.
He went to the office to talk to a colleague.

2. To show the reason why you did something
She logged into the computer to download the file.
It is necessary to delete old files from your comput-

er once a month.
3. After adjectives (describing words)
It is easy to send a link through an email.
The boss asked John to deliver the paperwork to

4. After direct or indirect objects in a sentence the new client.
that are nouns or pronouns referring to a person The carpenter told you to print the new plans
yesterday.

MAD Multiple Choice
Look at the verb between the two asterisks. Decide if each one is correct or incorrect in the
sentence. For example: You see: I promised *sending* the email by 3:00.
You choose: B. incorrect
1. It is important *to delete* emails that do not have to be saved.
A. correct B. incorrect
2. The manager asked his receptionist *printing* the pictures.
3. I turned on my computer *to send* an email.
4. *Becoming* a firefighter is a brave decision.
6-44 SECTION 3
1
6
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
MAD Multiple Choice
5. There were a lot of people printing, so I waited *using* the printer.
6. Did you plan *emailing* me the files today?
7. She asked the programmer *to look* at the problem with her computer.
8. I need *buying* a new mouse. This one is not working.

MAD Word Jumble
1. The photographer needed to buy a new camera.
2. I look forward to chatting with you.
3. Do you expect the staff to work on Saturdays?
4. Alyssa went to a university to study engineering.
5. I can’t wait to read my favorite writer’s new book!
6. The assistant went to the office early to work.
7. Have you learned to use the new software yet?
8. The boss asked the receptionist to make the appointment.

Write a question that led to the answer. Teachers, answers will vary.
1. I am looking forward to getting a job.
2. I would like to repair fire engines or emergency vehicles.
3. Yes, I turned on my computer to download it for you.
4. No, I didn’t ask him to repair my keyboard yet.
5. We decided to have our conversation tomorrow.
6. You need to click on this file.
7. You have to download the software from this website.
8. Yes, it is too late to receive a new laptop.
SECTION 3 6-45
1
6
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
Listen to the sentences. Each sentence is missing an infinitive. Choose the best verb to
complete the sentence and type the infinitives in the correct blanks.
to text to email to bring to click on
to look forward to to turn off to own to save
1. He needs [to turn off] the computer before leaving work.

2. You have to be brave in order [to save] people’s lives.
3. I need you [to text] me when you get here.
4. She asked you [to bring] your laptop today.
5. The boss asked me [to email] him the file by noon.
6. To open the software, you have [to click on] the mouse twice.
7. It takes a lot of work [to own] a business.
8. After a busy week, it is easy [to look forward to] the weekend.

MAD Open Recording
Look at the Section 3 Vocabulary list. In each sentence, include the sentence starter, an
infinitive, and a Section 3 Vocabulary word or phrase.
1. He decided…
2. My boss asked me…
3. It is difficult…
4. I learned…
5. They wanted…
6-46 SECTION 3
1
6
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
LANGUAGE EXPLORATION
Email and Website Addresses
english@letstalk.com Do you know what this is? Do you know how to say it out loud? This is
an example of an email address, and you would say “english at letstalk dot com”. In the English
language, the @ is called an “at sign” or “at symbol”. However, there are many fun words for this
little symbol in other languages. See the list below. Which is your favorite?
- In Armenian, it is called a “puppy”.

- In Danish, it is called an “elephant’s trunk”.
- In German, it is sometimes called a “spider monkey”.
- In Greek, it is often called a “duckling”.
- In Hebrew, it is sometimes called a “shtrudel” (because it looks like the center of a strudel cake).
- In Hungarian, it is called a “worm”.
- In Czech, it is called a “pickled fish roll”.
The @ is also used often on social media and websites to directly notify a person of a message.
To do this yourself, you can attach the @ to their name, (like: @name), and your friend will see
what you wrote to them. In American English, you may also see this on a sports team’s schedule
to indicate who and where a team is playing. It could look like this: “Los Angeles @ Chicago,” which
means the team from Los Angeles is playing at the Chicago team’s home field.
Another internet term commonly used in the U.S. and around the world is .com (“dot com”),
which is what we call a domain, or the ending of a URL. You may also see: .gov, .edu, .org, and .us
when surfing the web in America. In fact, each state has their own form of this, such as .tx.us for
Texas, .wv.us for West Virginia, and .ak.us for Alaska!
Did you know that some popular websites have different versions of their site for different
countries? These are called country codes. You can visit kayak.us to go to an American version
of the travel site, kayak.es to see the Spanish version, kayak.de for the German site, or
www.kayak.co.uk for the site used in the United Kingdom.
What is the country code where you live?
Do you know country codes for any other countries?
SECTION 3 6-47
1
6
CONVERSATION
ACTIVITIES
ACTIVITY 6.3.18 - SPEAK: How do you communicate?
Discuss the following questions:
What forms of communication do you use regularly?
Which form do you use least? Why?
Which form do you like best? Why?
Which form do you use most to talk with friends? Why?
Which form do you use most to talk with family? Why?
ACTIVITY 6.3.19 - SPEAK: What’s your favorite website?

First, answer the following questions. Then, discuss your answers in a group of 4.
Your Answers Partner 1 Partner 2 Partner 3
What’s the name

of your favorite
website?
What is the web

address?
Why do you like

it?
What can you do

on it?
Who would like

it?

MAD Open Recording
Choose one of your partner’s websites that interests you and share what you learned about
this website. Then, share why you would like to visit this site.
6-48 SECTION 3
1
6
READING
COMPUTERS THEN AND NOW
It is hard to think about a world without the technology we have today, especially computers. In the past,
computers were very big. They had many parts and took up all of the space in a room. They were not for
personal use. Only people like the military or NASA had computers like these. They were also only capable
of doing one thing at a time, like solving big math equations quicker than doing them by hand. Emailing
was not invented yet, and no one used a mouse. To communicate, people had to write letters, talk on the
phone (no text messages!), or talk in person. The old computer screens only showed text. There were no
pictures, images, or videos. Finally, computers had limited software, and sometimes it could take up to a
day for a computer to process information.
Now, people enjoy using small computers that they can take with them. They can send emails, save
multiple files, go on web pages to look up information, message and chat with friends, and print papers
all at the same time! Clicking on web pages, programs, and links is easy with the use of a mouse or even
your finger on some personal computers. Today, we have software updates every month, and our
computers do whatever we want at fast speeds. Even though computers are very different from the
past, they still do the same job of helping people work and communicate information.

After reading about the difference between older computers and computers now, answer the
following questions in complete sentences.
1. What is this reading (passage) mainly about?
The difference between old computers and computers now.
2. Name two differences between computers then and computers now.
The old computers were very big and the computers now are small.
The old computers only did one thing at a time, but new computers can do many things
at the same time.
Only special groups of people had computers in the past, now everyone has them.
The old computers did not have a mouse, but the new ones do.
3. Name one thing that is the same between computers then and computers now.
Computers help people work and communicate.
4. Name three things you can do on a computer now.
People can email, save multiple files, go on websites to look up information, message
and chat with friends, print papers, download software, etc.
SECTION 3 6-49
1
6
READING
ACTIVITIES
MAD Open Recording
How do you use your computer to communicate? Record yourself explaining how you use
your computer on a normal day to help you with work, school, or to communicate with friends
or family.
CULTURAL NOTE
Schools and Technology
The United States is a powerhouse in the technology world. Here, many popular computer
brands were born, such as Apple, Google Chromebook, Dell, HP, and Intel. These companies
make computers, PCs, laptops, and many other devices. It is common for schools to have
multiple computer labs, which is a room with 20-30 computers. Schools usually offer computer
classes, where students learn how to use a computer, type, use software *such as Microsoft
Word and Powerpoint, Adobe Photoshop, etc. Do research and make presentations. However,
any teacher is allowed to take his/her students into the computer lab. Students each sit at a
computer to do the work their teacher has assigned and then leave the computer to go to their
next class. Today, laptops are becoming very common in schools, instead of computer labs.
There is even a popular program called “one-to-one” which means every student is given a
laptop or tablet to use throughout the year, and therefore, classes don’t have to share
computers. Students can even take their laptops or tablets home with them! The goal of the
one-to-one program is to allow every student to learn to use a computer, especially students
that may not have a computer at home. This program is very expensive for school districts, but
many districts choose to invest in the technological education of their students.
6-50 SECTION 3
1
6
LET’S TALK!
VIDEO - LET’S TALK ABOUT YOUR FUTURE!
LT 6.1 - LISTEN (Available with or without captions.)
same time.
Jack: When I’m older I hope to be a businessman dealing with international business.
I’m a very personable person. I like to travel, I like to talk to people, and I feel I can, like I said,
communicate with people real well, so that would play well to my strengths in the business field.
So, if I am a businessman then I’ll be in international business.
Skylar: My goal one day is to be a musical therapist. Um, I’ve been singing and playing piano since
I was about 4. I have been in every musical aspect out there: school plays, musicals, all that jazz.
Um, I’ve been working with kids since I was little, too. I got chosen in elementary school to work with
the special education classroom, and that is where I absolutely fell in love with working with kids of
that sort, and I’ve been doing it ever since. And so, being able to combine my help of - or my love
of helping kids and my love of music into one aspect is the perfect area for me. So, if and when I do
become a musical therapist, I will be at my happiest.
Connor: When I get a little older I want to get into the business world, specifically international
business. I’m really into German and European business aspects and languages, so I hope to
continue that route and be able to work in Europe and in America, or wherever it may take me.
Um, so if I’m a successful business man, I’d like to - or I will be involved in management and human
resources and other aspects of the business world, that I can use my talents for, I guess. So, we’ll
see where that takes me.
Grace: So, when I’m older I want to be a pharmacist. I fell in love with chemistry during my high
school class and decided it was the route for me. I think the combination of math and science is
something that just really intrigues me. And, another aspect of pharmacy that I love is that you’re
helping people and that, you know, helping them get better, and although you might not be the
doctor doing the surgery you still help with that healing process. Um, I also think that it’s a cool way
to be able to help out people possibly in other countries and to travel around, do that type of stuff.
So, if I am a pharmacist, I will be working towards helping people.
LET’S TALK! 6-51

1
6
LET’S TALK!
ACTIVITIES
LT 6.2 - LISTEN
MAD Category Match
Listen to the chapter video of the students talking about their career goals. Then, match the
phrase or sentence with correct person who said it.
Jack Skylar Grace Connor
international business musical pharmacist international business
likes to talk to people plays the piano and sings likes chemistry and math German language
likes to help kids with wants to work in the U.S.

likes to travel likes to travel
special needs or Europe
likes to help people wants to be a manager
LT 6.3 - LISTEN
MAD Multiple Choice
Decide whether each statement is True or False.
1. Jack wants to be a musical therapist when he grows up.
A. True B. False
2. Skylar has been playing the guitar since she was 4.
A. True B. False
3. Skylar loves working with children.
A. True B. False
4. Connor and Jack are interested in working in international business.
A. True B. False
5. Jack would like to work in Europe.
A. True B. False
6. Grace is looking forward to helping people as a pharmacist.
A. True B. False
7. Grace dislikes chemistry.
A. True B. False
6-52 LET’S TALK!

1
6
LET’S TALK!
INTERVIEWS - LET’S TALK ABOUT JOBS!
LT 6.4 - LISTEN
Taylor Jason Emily

are missing in their interviews. The blanks may have more than one word, so listen carefully.
Taylor: “My [job] is: I work at a [restaurant] and bowling alley as a hostess. When I [grow] up, I
want to do [something] with performing or maybe [be] a human rights advocate. And my mom
[works] as a fitness trainer, and [my dad] is a manager of a mining [company]. And some of my
characteristic traits: I like to consider [myself] to be nice, and sometimes funny, and loyal to my
[friends].”
Jason: “I do [have] a job. I work at the [movie theater]. Uh, when I grow up, I [would] like to be
an [actor] or somehow involved in theater or the movies. My parents’ [professions]: my dad is
a [businessman] in human resources and my mom is a guidance counselor at my elementary
[school]. I think my friends would say that [I’m] hard working, I’m [artistic] and I have a very dry
sense of humor.”
Emily: “I do have a job and [it’s] at a local clothing [store]. I want [to work] with German and
marketing when I grow up. [My dad] is a pharmacist and my mom is a [nurse]. Some of my
characteristic traits are that [I’m funny], I’m nice, and I’m [friendly].”
LET’S TALK! 6-53

1
6
LET’S TALK!
ACTIVITIES
LT 6.6 - LISTEN
MAD Multiple Choice
After watching the interviews, choose the correct answer.
1. Who is not interested in acting or performing?
A. Taylor B. Jason C. Emily
2. Whose dad is a manager at a company?
3. Who does not say “nice” as being one of his/her characteristics?
4. Whose mom works at a school?
5. Whose mom is a nurse?
6. Who works at a clothing store?
7. Who works at a movie theater?
8. Who works at a restaurant?
LT 6.7 - READ & SPEAK

MAD Open Recording
1. Do you have a job right now?
A. If yes, where do you work?
B. If no, do you want a job?
2. Did you have a different job before?
3. Does your dad have a job/profession?
A. If yes, what does he do / where does he work?
B. If no, why not?
4. Does your mom have a job/profession?
A. If yes, what does she do / where does she work?
B. If no, why not?
6-54 LET’S TALK!
How well do I
Additional
Refer to...
I CAN... Practice
(Page = P.)
Review (R)
1. discuss professions using the future Section 1
R. 1, 2, 3, 7, 8
tense. P. 6-8
2. use the present continuous for the

R. 5, 8 P. 6-12
future.
3. discuss places of work using the Section 2
R. 1, 4, 8
1st conditional tense. P. 6-28
4. discuss communication through the
R. 5, 8 Section 3
use of technology.
P. 6-41
5. use infinitives and gerunds. R. 1, 2, 6, 7, 8
P. 6-44
R1 - LISTENING 1
MAD Multiple Choice
Listen as Joseph talks about his new job. Then, choose the best answer for each question based
on what he said about his job.
I just graduated from college with my business degree. I am starting a job working for a smaller
company next week. I prefer a smaller company because I get to know people really well. To start, I
will earn about $30,000 and can work towards a raise in the next couple of years. Another amazing
thing is that the office is about 20 minutes from my house, so the drive is going to be easy in the
future. My job will be to work as a computer programmer. I will work with other staff to organize
websites for different businesses. We want to make sure everything people access is organized
and interesting. That way, if people visit these businesses’ web pages, they will be able to find
everything easily. I have to report to my manager every day in the morning to talk about what I
need to accomplish each day. If I have any questions about the work during the day, my manager
will help me solve them, too. At the end of my first week, I have a meeting with the boss to discuss
my work and any questions I may have. His secretary set up the meeting, and she’s very friendly.
I can tell everyone in this office will be great to work with, and I will really like it here.
CHAPTER 6 6-55
REVIEW ACTIVITIES
MAD Multiple Choice
1. Why does Joseph prefer to work for a smaller company?
A. He can get to know people well.
B. He doesn’t have to work with a lot of people.
C. The boss of a small company is nicer.
2. How much will he earn?
A. $20,000
B. $30,000
C. $50,000
3. How long is the drive from Joseph’s home to his new job?
A. one hour
B. 45 minutes
C. 20 minutes
4. What will Joseph do as a computer programmer at this company?
A. He will organize web pages, so they are are easy to use.
B. He will fix software problems.
C. He will manage the staff and talk to the boss.
5. Who does Joseph have to speak with on a daily basis?
A. the boss
B. the secretary
C. the manager
6. Who does Joseph say is friendly?
A. his boss
B. the secretary of his boss
C. his manager
6-56 CHAPTER 6
REVIEW ACTIVITIES
R2 - LISTENING 2
Listen to the following student talk about herself and the chapter topic. Fill in the blanks with
words that are missing in her interview.
Ashley: “At my newest [job], um, I basically [work] in a daycare at a gym and
then the job [I’ve had] for longer: I help [coach] and help out with like field
trips ‘cause it’s for [gymnastics], so, and I want [to be] a physical therapist
when I [grow] up. Um, my mom recently got a new promotion. [She’s] a
Strategic Pricing Manager. I personally think I’m [a little] quirky. I mean
obviously I laugh a lot. I [take] things with humor. I don’t know, I’m just really
[excited] about life, so yeah!”
R3 - GRAMMAR 1
MAD Text Match
Match each sentence with the correct tense.
1. I will be a doctor. future
2. I was a doctor. past simple
3. I am going to be a doctor. present continuous
4. I am a doctor. present simple
5. I have been a doctor. present perfect
6. I was going to be a doctor. past continuous
7. Be a doctor! imperative
R4 - GRAMMAR 2
Fill in the blanks with either the present simple or future tense.
For example:
You see: If you [ _____ ] working with computers, you [ _____ ] a good programmer. (to enjoy; to be)
You type: If you [enjoy] working with computers, you [will be] a good programmer. (to enjoy; to be)
1. If I [am] a professional athlete, I [will earn] a lot of money. (to be; to earn)
2. You [will want] to look into being a veterinarian if animals [interest] you. (to want; to interest)
3. If Erin [is] sick tomorrow, she [will stay] home from work. (to be; to stay)
CHAPTER 6 6-57
REVIEW ACTIVITIES
R4 - GRAMMAR 2 (Continued)
4. The staff [will have] to pay for a new one if we [get] new uniforms. (to have; to get)
5. If Zach and John [are] pilots, they [will fly] often. (to be; to fly)
6. If someone [drives] too fast, a police officer [will give] him a ticket. (to drive; to give)
7. The photographer [will take] pictures in the evening if the sky [looks] beautiful. (to take;
to look)
8. Jackson [will find] a different job if he [feels] unhappy at his current job. (to find; to feel)
R5 - READING
MAD Multiple Choice
Read the following passage about being a businessman or businesswoman. Then, answer
the multiple choice questions below.
Being a businessman or businesswoman involves working for a company who provides a
service. A service is a need that people have. For example, if someone needs medicine, a
company will work to make medicine and sell medicine. If someone needs furniture for their
house, a company will work to design furniture and sell it to people.
A businessman or businesswoman works in an office with other staff. Their job involves
working with many different people in an office, so they need to be good communicators.
They spend most of their day on the computer. They use the computer to look up information
and create files. They then email those files to staff to share the information. Sometimes
people work to fix files. They download them on their computer and read them to correct
them or add more information. Once the file is perfect, it is sent to the boss for a final check.
Many times, businessmen and businesswomen will go to meetings every week. Using email
is excellent, but people need to talk in person to get organized. The secretary will set up a
meeting during a specific time and at a specific place in the office. The boss will come
sometimes depending on what information the team is discussing that day. If it is a smaller
meeting, the boss won’t come, but if it is important information, the boss will come. The group
of people will chat about their work and make plans for what they are going to do during the
week. A businessman or businesswoman is always busy!
6-58 CHAPTER 6
REVIEW ACTIVITIES
R5 - READING
MAD Multiple Choice
1. What is the purpose of this reading (passage)?
A. to get you to become a businessman or businesswoman in the future
B. to tell you about the job of a businessman or businesswoman
C. to tell you a fun story about being a businessman or businesswoman
D. to explain different types of companies
2. What is a service?
A. a need people have
B. a meeting
C. a type of company
D. a type of job in a business
3. The author mentions all of the following EXCEPT...
A. what a businessman or businesswoman does on a computer.
B. what happens during a meeting.
C. the job of a businessman or businesswoman.
D. how a businessman or businesswoman creates a website for their company.
4. Why do businessmen and businesswomen need to be good communicators?
A. because they write emails every day
B. because they work with different people in an office
C. because their files have a lot of information
D. because they chat with their group weekly
5. Who sets up a meeting in the office?
A. the boss
B. the staff
C. the secretary
D. the receptionist
CHAPTER 6 6-59
REVIEW ACTIVITIES
R6 - WRITING
Answer the questions in complete sentences.
1. Would you like to be a secretary? Why or why not?
2. Would you prefer to work on a farm or in an office? Why?
3. Would you like to have a business with your best friend?
4. Would you prefer early or late meetings?
5. Would you like to wear a uniform to work?
R7 - WRITING
MAD Open Recording
Use the picture to answer the following questions in complete sentences.
1. What profession will Tim choose?
2. Where will he work?
3. Will he have to wear a uniform?
4. What will he do in this profession?
5. What characteristics will Tim need for this
profession?
R8 - SPEAKING
MAD Open Recording
6-60 CHAPTER 6
ASSESSMENT
MY FUTURE PROFESSION
Give a presentation about your future profession. Use the future tense and if clauses.
Answer these questions and give any further information you think is important for your
future profession.
1. What do you want your future profession to be? Why?
2. What characteristics do you need to have to be good at your profession?
3. Will you earn a lot, average or a little money?
4. Why will this profession make you happy?
5. What will be difficult about your future profession?
6. What profession will you never become? Why?
7. What kind of hours will you have to work?

RESEARCH A CAREER
Research a career in the U.S. and answer the questions about that career.
What type of schooling do you need to become this profession?
How much does the average person earn in that profession? Starting?
What type of tasks do they have to do?
Do they have to wear a uniform?
Would you like to be this profession?
How is this profession different in the U.S. versus in your country?
Teacher Note: Have students do this project in the LAD Presentation mode, as an Open Recording
in the MAD or in front of the class not in the lab.
CHAPTER 6 6-61
ASSESSMENT
LISTENING
MAD Multiple Choice
Listen as Olivia talks about her new job. Then, choose the best answer for each question
based on what she said about her job.
After seven long years, I have finally graduated from veterinary school! I will be working at
an excellent veterinary clinic in Denver, Colorado. My starting salary will be $79,000. We will
not only be working with small animals but large ones, too. There are lots of horse farms in
Denver. I am looking forward to helping animals with their illnesses and injuries. If I have to
treat a horse, I will go to the farm of the farmer. It is easier to treat a large animal at his home
than in a veterinary clinic. Last week, I met the staff. There are four veterinarian assistants
and two receptionists. There are three other veterinarians at this clinic. So, if i have any
questions about how to treat an animal, I will be able to ask them for recommendations.
Everyone seems so friendly. I am very excited to work with them! As a staff we will meet once
a week to discuss how the office is running and discuss any changes that may need to be
made. In the future I would like to own my own veterinary clinic, but for now I will learn a lot
in this job.
1. What profession is Olivia? 2. How much will she earn?

A. a veterinarian A. $17,000
B. a receptionist B. $50,000
C. a veterinarian assistant C. $79,000
3. What types of animals will she work with? 4. How many other people work at the clinic?
A. small animals A. 6
B. large animals B. 9
C. small and large animals C. 3
5. How often will the staff meet? 6. What does Olivia want to do in the future?
A. once a week A. work at this clinic until she is 60
B. once a month B. own her own clinic
C. every day C. work as a veterinary assistant
6-62 CHAPTER 6
ASSESSMENT
LISTENING
words that are missing in his interview.
Carl: “I [have] a job. I work at the front desk of a [pizza] place, so just take
their orders. [It’s] nothing too complicated. When I [grow] up I want to be a
systems [engineer]. Everything in [the world] is a system and it interacts with
each other. So, [we try] to engineer it so that it [works] how we want it to.
Currently I’m just a [college] student. So, [I’m studying] to be a systems
engineer. My [dad is] an accountant and then my mom works for a startup
[company] that works on insurance. So, I’m a [very] sarcastic person. Um,
[I’m] kind as long as people understand my sarcasm. And, I don’t know, I just
[enjoy] life. I’m mostly a [happy] person.”
GRAMMAR 1
MAD Text Match
Match each sentence with the correct tense.
1. I saved my work. past simple
2. I will be saving my work when I finish. future
3. I was saving my work often. past continuous
4. I save my work often. present simple
5. Save your work! imperative
6. I have saved my work. present perfect
7. I am saving my work. present continuous
CHAPTER 6 6-63
ASSESSMENT
GRAMMAR 2
Fill in the blanks with either the present simple or future tense.
1. If I [have] my own web page, I [will want] it to be about health and wellness.
(to have; to want)
2. She [will print] the file for me if I [send] it to her by tonight. (to print; to send)
3. If you [are] brave, you [will be] an amazing firefighter. (to be; to be)
4. Alaina [will go] to college if she [decides] to become an engineer. (to go; to decide)
5. If the professional athlete [injures] himself, he [will not play] in the championship.
(to injure; to not play)
6. If he [enjoys] his profession, he [will own] his own company someday. (to enjoy; to own)
7. If you don’t [receive] the text message, I [will try] to send it again. (to receive; to try)
8. You [will have] to stand a lot if you [work] in a factory. (to have; to work)
READING
MAD Multiple Choice
Read the following passage about being a photographer. Then, answer the multiple choice
questions below.
A photographer is someone who takes pictures for their job. They can take pictures of the
country, the city, animals, people, special events, or anything really! Usually, photographers
will choose a specific area to work in. For example, if someone likes working with people,
they will be a wedding photographer or a school photographer. If someone likes animals
and being outside, they will be a nature photographer.
If you don’t like working in an office, then a photographer is a great job for you. They do
work for companies, but many times they are sent to locations to take pictures instead of
sitting at a desk all day. They will have meetings with their boss and discuss where they will
go, and what pictures they will take. Photographers are a type of artist and have the ability
to take pictures that they think will look best. The boss will normally give them ideas for
pictures, and they have the job of looking for different options when they are on location.
6-64 CHAPTER 6
ASSESSMENT
READING (Continued)
MAD Multiple Choice
After they are done taking pictures with their digital cameras, they will work on their computer
to edit or fix the photos. They have special software to help them look at pictures and change
them to make them look even better. It is necessary to have a good computer for this work
because they need to see every part of the picture. Working with pictures can take a lot of
time, but when they are done, it is beautiful and shows real life. Then, their pictures can be
in magazines, newspapers, websites, social media, in people’s houses, and more. They love
being able to share their work with the world!
1. What is this passage (reading) mainly about?

A. different jobs in a company
B. reasons why someone should be a photographer
C. the job of a photographer
D. different pictures people can take in nature
2. Why do photographers not work in an office all day?
A. because they hate working in offices
B. because they go to special locations to take pictures
C. because their boss lets them work from home
D. because they do not get along with other staff in the company
3. The author mentions all of the following EXCEPT...
A. what photographers earn every year.
B. the type of photographer you can be.
C. where photographers work.
D. how photographers edit photos.
4. What do photographers use to edit their photos?
A. digital cameras
B. social media
C. They send it to a company to be edited.
D. computers and special software
5. The word “amazing” in line #11 is closest in meaning to...
A. excellent.
B. famous.
C. interested.
D. brillant.
CHAPTER 6 6-65
ASSESSMENT
WRITING
Answer the following questions about professions. Use complete sentences.
1. Would you prefer to fix computers or cars?
2. Would you prefer to work on a farm or on a computer?
3. Would you like to travel for your job?
4. Would you like to a teacher? Why or why not?
5. Would you like to earn a lot of money, but have to work a lot of weekends?
SPEAKING 1
MAD Open Recording
Use the picture to answer the following questions in complete sentences.
1. What profession will Molly choose?

2. Where will she work?
3. Will she have to wear a uniform?
4. What will she do in this profession?
5. What characteristics will Molly need for this
profession?
SPEAKING 2
MAD Open Recording
Look at the vocabulary images from the beginning of each section. Describe one image
6-66 CHAPTER 6
LEVEL A1 LEVEL A2 LEVEL B1 LEVEL B2
LET’S TALK!
ENGLISH
Four courses, (A1, A2, B1, B2), Engage and motivate your students to develop their
each with over 380 activities speaking, listening, writing & reading skills.
representing 50-70 hours of
practice. Focus on speaking practice with recording and
pronunciation exercises – using speech recognition
Courses have a 350-page that provides instant feedback.
Teacher’s Handbook. Students
use a paperless all-electronic Let’s Talk! uniquely combines modern communicative
approach. pedagogy with SmartClass+ digital interactive,
multimedia technology.
More than 50-pages of
photocopiable handouts are Support Any-time – Any-place – Any-device learning
provided to facilitate classroom flexibility.
activities like pairing activities,
group-work, and games.
www.robotel.com

A2 Elementary Teacher Handbook

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

A2 Elementary Teacher Handbook

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ELEMENTARY A2

LET’S TALK! ENGLISH

© Robotel Corp. 2018

First published in 2018

All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be

The Publisher grants permission for the photocopying

Under no circumstances may any part of this book be

Authors: Lindsey Klein

Illustrator: Mirella Morrone

Technical Consultant: Gerry Sullivan

Collaborators: Erin Swierczek

Videographer/Editor: Kelsi Gard

Many thanks to the participants that played a role in the

SmartClass® and Robotel® are registered trademarks of Robotel Corp..

RUBRIC R-1 TO R-6

Robotel Corporation Robotel Inc. (HQ)

+1 (800) 465-0356 +1 (450) 680-1448

Robotel Oceania Robotel Middle East

+61 (0) 4 3090 1475 +962 795088015

 Can understand sentences and frequently used expressions

 Can use language effectively, socially & professionally

CHAPTER 2 - FOOD & DRINK

Some vs. Any

Verbs of Preference + Gerund

Polite Requests using could

Past Simple of Irregular Verbs

CHAPTER 4 - AROUND TOWN

Imperatives (Let us/Let’s)

CHAPTER 5 - HEALTH & WELLNESS

LESSON PLAN III

My name is Jack Jones. My name is Connor Olsen.

Hi! My name is Grace Parker. Hi! My name is Skylar Campbell,

I will be able to...

• describe rooms in a house and household items. REVIEW & ASSESSMENT

UNITED STATES OF AMERICA

Abbreviation: CA Known For: Golden Gate Bridge

INTERNET SEARCH: (in your language)

Rooms in a Home Discuss a Home Prepositions of Place

SECTION 2 VOCABULARY: Items in a Home

Appliances Household Furnishings

SECTION 3 VOCABULARY: Chores and Frequency

Household Chores Set the Table Adverbs of Frequency

ACTIVITY 1.1.1 - SPEAK

ACTIVITY 1.1.2 - LISTEN & SPEAK

ACTIVITY 1.1.3 - SPEAK

ACTIVITY 1.1.5 - READ

A. the garage B. the bedroom C. the bathroom D. the living room

ACTIVITY 1.1.7 - LISTEN

ACTIVITY 1.1.8 - LISTEN & WRITE

above The picture is above the couch.

behind The yard is behind the house.

The dining room is between the living room and the

far from The bedrooms are far from the basement.

in The cars are in the garage.

in front of The car is in front of the garage.

near The chair is near the bed.

next to The bedroom is next to the bathroom.

on The cat is on the sofa.

under The dog is under the table.

ACTIVITY 1.1.11 - READ

2. The girl is next to the box. 6. The girl is between the

3. The girl is on the box. 7. The girl is in the box.

4. The girl is in front of the box.